Agro-Terrorism Research Paper A Level English Language Essay Help

Abstract Agro-terrorism is a form of bioterrorism that is gradually taking shape across the world following realization by the terrorists that it is cheap but effective means of weakening great economies of the world, threatening the lives of many people and causing political instability.

Agricultural sector is highly susceptible to terrorists because agricultural activities occur in expansive tracts of land where security surveillance is minimal, unlike business activities in towns that receive maximum protection from all forms of criminal activities. Moreover, ability to culture virulent pathogens and accessibility to poisonous chemicals predispose agricultural products to acts of terrorism.

Water infrastructural systems also provide means to terrorists of propagating their activities since contamination of water using virulent pathogens and poisonous chemicals have magnified effect due to great number of industries, farms, people, and animals relying on water supply from a common source. Therefore, agro-terrorism activities that target food and water supply are posing threatening challenge to agricultural economy, health of population and political stability of many countries.

Introduction Following the September 11, 2001, attacks, the United States has been facing constant terror from terrorists for they seemed to be in a position to use all possible means of attacks including biological weapons. Biological weapons are increasingly becoming terrorists’ means of attacking or instilling fears to Americans.

Given that agro-terrorism falls under biological weapons, terrorists have vowed to use agro-terrorism to attack the United States and its allies across the world. This means that agro-terrorism is becoming a national security as it is threatening food production and subsequently, human health. In agro-terrorism, terrorists generate plant and animal pathogens that have potential to cause diseases with the view of instilling fear, causing agricultural losses, economic instability, and even deaths of human beings.

Monke (2004) argues that, agriculture is more susceptible to acts of terrorism because terrorists prefer using plants and animals as they have diverse pathogens as compared to human beings, it is hard to protect expansive farms, production and processing of food entail long procedures, and that agriculture is central to economic growth of a country (p.5).

Thus, agriculture is a potential means of terrorism since human beings are dependent on agricultural food. Moreover, since human beings rely on water and aquatic organisms as food, water systems also pose potential source of terrorism. Given that agro-terrorism has potential effect on food and water systems, what are the current agro-terrorism events with respective lessons learned, and greatest impending threats that the world is facing?

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Agro-Terrorism in Food and Water Systems Agro-terrorism is threatening the safety of food and water systems because terrorists are increasingly innovating various means of propagating terrorism activities in jurisdictions of their perceived enemies. Counter-terrorism experts argue that agro-terrorism is an emerging terrorism issue that seems to have potential impact of undermining not only safety and security of the people but also poses great challenge to health and economies of nations.

Due to its potential impacts, legal experts have defined agro-terrorism as deliberate use or introduction of pathogens such as bacteria, viruses, fungi or protozoa into plants and animals with the objective of eliciting food insecurity, threatening lives of the people, destabilizing food industry and consequently causing economic losses.

According to Hurt (2010), agro-terrorism is affordable means that terrorists use to attack United States’ economy, disrupts political stability, generate terror on food security and propagate their activities and networks (p.4). Despite the potential impact that agro-terrorism poses, the United States is insufficiently prepared because there are diverse pathogens that terrorists may deploy, thus making it hard to devise intervention measures that involve detection, prevention, and management in the event of attacks.

Although terrorists utilize pathogens that target animals and plants, their primary objective is to attack human beings. Since plants and animals interact effectively with human beings and provide source of staple food, terrorists have noted that introduction of pathogens through them is an effective and affordable means of creating terror among humanity.

Since economies of most countries heavily rely on agriculture, terrorists have found out that agro-terrorism is an effective way of crippling agricultural and food industries so as to subject target population to economic and political crises.

According to Monke (2004), potential impact of agro-terrorism emerged in the year 2002 when United States military found out Al-Qaeda manuals showing procedures of creating poisonous plants and animals to threaten existence of agricultural and food industries in the United States with a view of crippling the economy (p.6).

Since terrorists aim at crippling United States’ powers across the world, they are employing agro-terrorism in weakening social, economic, and political stability because agriculture interfaces with them.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Agro-Terrorism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Expansive nature of agricultural resources in farms and diversity of pathogens make it challenging to devise and implement counter-terrorism measures. Moreover, agricultural production and processing of food is a long procedure that is highly susceptible to contamination by terrorists. Thus, agro-terrorism poses significant threat to food security and safety.

Apart from threatening food safety and security, terrorists can also direct their attacks on water infrastructural systems by contaminating or disrupting water supply.

Since government is responsible in ensuring that citizens get sufficient and quality water, contamination or disruption of water supply means that government does not perform its role of protecting the interests of the public, thus creates social and political instability. Also, lack of water or contamination of water results into serious health and environmental problems that are difficult to address or costly to mitigate.

Copeland and Cody (2005) assert that, water infrastructural facilities are very susceptible to terrorist attacks because they have political inclination, play significant role in industries, and are essential in maintaining health conditions of Americans (p.3). Thus, agro-terrorists can disrupt or contaminate water supply that is critical irrigating expansive tracts of farms, hence causing a crisis in agriculture and food industries.

Moreover, water infrastructural systems intricately link with other infrastructures such as roads, electricity, pipelines, and communication lines making it a potential target for terrorists. Water infrastructural systems can become a potential means of propagating terrorism because large population of plants, animals, and human beings rely on a single dam or water reservoir.

Contamination of dams and reservoirs using pathogens or chemicals can have direct effects on plants, animals, and human beings or can cause indirect effects on human beings through food chain. According to Copeland and Cody (2005), water infrastructural systems pose great challenge in combating terrorism because terrorists introduce undetectable levels of pathogens or chemicals that have long-term health effects (p.9).

Pathogens are more dangerous because they are virulent, hard to detect, multiply exponentially and requires expensive interventions when eliminating them in water infrastructural systems, thus threatens the lives of many people. In this view, agro-terrorists can use water infrastructural systems as means of propagating their activities in the United States and across the world. Therefore, what are the current agro-terrorism events that affect food and water systems?

Ku Klux Klan Agro-Terrorism In 1970, members of Ku Klux Klan carried out agro-terrorism by poisoning cattle that belonged to black farmers in Alabama, United States. Ku Klux Klan members envied that the black farmers in Alabama had large number of cattle that made them wealthy and thus planned to exterminate their cattle to weaken them economically.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Agro-Terrorism by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Since livestock and human beings rely on water from common water supply systems, the Ku Klux Klan poisoned water using cyanide salt. The poisoned water led to death of great number of cattle and left others very adversely affected by the poison.

According to Foxell (2001), black farmers in Alabama were in great terror for the agro-terrorism acts of the Ku Klux Klan threatened their source of livelihood and by extension posed a great threat to the safety of water systems in the United States (p.117). The availability of poisonous chemicals like salt of cyanide, water supply as means reaching out targets and terrorists like Ku Klux Klan predispose people and livestock to agro-terrorism acts.

Following this agro-terrorism action, the greatest lesson learned is that terrorists can use water supply systems as a means of targeting livestock as well as people. Given that, water sources such as dams and reservoirs are very expansive, which make it difficult to secure them, they present a potential means that terrorists can employ in carrying out their activities. Introduction of poisonous chemicals or virulent pathogens into water supply implies that both industrial and domestic uses of water become unsafe.

Copeland and Cody (2005) argue that water infrastructural systems offer terrorists effective means of carrying out their terrorist actions since they supply water to virtually all farms and households (p.12). Thus, water infrastructural systems, as seen in the case of Ku Klux Klan poisoning of water provide infrastructural means for agro-terrorists to inflict terror on population and cause deaths to both animals and human beings.

Another lesson learned is that availability of water-soluble chemicals or pathogens that can survive in water enables terrorists to use water infrastructural systems as a means of targeting large population of livestock, crops, or people. If terrorists can easily access poisonous chemicals such as cyanide and virulent bacteria, all they need is just to contaminate water systems and subsequent all water supplies in a given city become contaminated.

The consequences of water contamination are very grave since chemicals and pathogens affect plants, animals, and people. By the time health experts identify the cause of massive poisoning or spread of diseases among the population, it would have cost many lives. Moreover, medical costs of treating patients and expenses incurred in decontaminating water supplies are very high for a nation. Thus agro-terrorism affects negatively growth of economy and destabilizes the political climate.

To prevent future occurrence of agro-terrorism actions that target water infrastructural systems, the United States government and other nations across the world should ensure that sources of water supply and water infrastructural systems receive constant surveillance to prevent terrorists from contaminating them. Since water infrastructural systems are very expansive, they increase probability of terrorists contaminating water. Hence there should be series of water treatment plants, which ensure real-time testing and purification.

Byrne (2007) argues that highly sensitive detective techniques are essential in monitoring safety status of water so that incase of contamination, people can receive warning in time to avert impending crisis that would have occurred (p.18). Thus, water treatment experts and personnel carrying out surveillance of water infrastructural systems are critical in preventing terrorism actions. In addition, government should restrict access to poisonous chemicals and virulent pathogens in various laboratories.

Rajneeshee Agro-Terrorism In 1984, cult members of Bhagwan Shree Rajneesh who believed that the world was going to end sooner due to atomic bomb or occurrence of some incurable diseases launched an agro-terrorism act where they contaminated food in a restaurant using a bacterium called Salmonella typhymurium.

The cult members aimed at incapacitating local population so that they could not vote in a local election and give them an upper hand in taking leadership. According to Dudley (2004), the cult members cultured Salmonella typhymurium, and came to restaurants in Dallas, Oregon where they spread the bacterial culture on salad bars (p.123).

The cult members sprayed bacterial culture on salad bars in several restaurants, on grocery stores, public places and doorknobs so that whoever touched contaminated surfaces with virulent bacteria were infected. During the fateful day of election, about 700 people were suffering from food poisoning, although it never resulted into any death. This became the first incident of food poisoning that emanated from pathogens in the United States.

The incident of food poisoning that occurred at Dallas awakened Americans for they learned that food poisoning does not only occur due to chemicals but also due to contamination of food by virulent pathogens.

The greatest lesson learned in the incident of food poisoning that occurred in Dallas is that virulent pathogens such as Salmonella typhymurium have capacity to infect greater number of population within a short period. Byrne (2007) asserts that ability of virulent pathogens to multiply rapidly and grow exponentially make them potential weapons that terrorists employ when targeting greater number of population (p.13).

Moreover, it is cheaper for terrorists to culture virulent pathogens than to make atomic weapons. Another lesson learned from Dallas’ incident of food poisoning is that pathogens are very hard to detect and thus, food need to be in secure and safe places to prevent terrorists from accessing and contaminating it.

Prevention of food poisoning requires that foodstuffs should always be in safe and secure stores where limited number of people who deal with their storage, processing and packaging in industries can only access. Food industries and restaurant need to restrict strangers and screen them before allowing them to enter into specific places.

According to Byrne (2007), free entrance of strangers into the farms, food industries, hotels, and food stores pose great threat to food poisoning since agro-terrorists may take the opportunity and introduce virulent pathogens that contaminate food and eventually lead to food poisoning (p.18).

Moreover, the government should be vigilant in ensuring that terrorists do not build laboratories where they can culture virulent pathogens or gain access to available laboratories and use them in culturing and manipulating pathogens. Virulent pathogens that cause food poisoning need destruction so that they are neither easily available nor accessible to any potential agro-terrorists.

Wisconsin Agro-Terrorism In 1996, agro-terrorists at Wisconsin, United States contaminated animal feeds with organophosphate pesticide, chlordane. Chlordane is a very poisonous insecticide that does not decompose immediately in the feed or in the animals. If animals ingest chlordane, it persists in their systems through accumulation and eventually passed to human being through various animal products, hence causing human poisoning.

In Wisconsin, agro-terrorists spread chlordane to over 4,000 farms that mainly produced dairy feeds. The agro-terrorists aimed at crippling lucrative farming activities that gave them competitive edge in dairy markets.

They targeted animal feeds because they were easy to contaminate and that they wanted to affect the quality of products and degrade safety confidence that people had in the dairy products that originated from farms. Schneider, Webb, Hubbard, and Archer (2009) explain that, contamination of over 4,000 farms using chlordane resulted into great losses because it led to recall of dairy products such as butter, cheese, milk, and ice cream of Midwestern states (p. 3).

The dairy farmers in Midwestern made great losses due to agro-terrorisms, which cost above $500 million combined with contaminated animal feeds. The chlordane contamination also posed great threat to human health because organophosphate, a component of chlordane is a poisonous chemical that accumulates up the food chain.

Lessoned learned from Wisconsin agro-terrorism is that contamination of animal feeds using pesticides such as chlordane with organophosphate does not only affect human health but also has great economic losses that add into millions of dollars.

Organophosphate is a chemical component of chlordane that has detrimental effect on the animals and subsequently human beings since they will acquire it by consuming various dairy products such as milk, butter, cheese, butter, and meat.

Given the diversity of dairy products that human beings utilize daily and expansiveness of farms that produce feeds, it implies that dairy farming offers potential means that terrorists can use in threatening the existence of humanity and in crippling economies that rely on agriculture.

Padilla (2008) affirms that, well-coordinated agro-terrorism attacks in United States farms can have significant impact on economy because farming and related economic activities accounts for about 16% of employment opportunities (p.55). Hence, misuse of agricultural chemicals such as pesticides can have detrimental effects to both human health and agricultural economy.

To prevent future occurrence of agro-terrorism that involves contamination of animal feeds using harmful pesticides that have organophosphate such as chlordane, the government should ensure that there are no harmful pesticides in the markets.

If harmful pesticides are accessible to agro-terrorists, they will use them when they want to attack farmers, entire populations and eventually cripple agricultural economy. For farmers and consumers of dairy products to be safe, government needs to ensure that there are no harmful pesticides or other chemicals that agro-terrorists can potentially utilize in threatening lives of people or animals.

According to Padilla (2008), to combat agro-terrorism, agro-chemicals require certification of safety to prevent terrorists from taking advantage of available chemicals in propagating their activities (p.58). Thus, government must ensure that all agro-industries produce safe chemicals that affect neither animals nor human beings. Moreover, mega farming companies need to monitor constantly their farms because they are potential targets of terrorists.

The Aum Shinrikyo Agro-Terrorism Aum Shinrikyo is a religious sect, which believed that doomsday was to happen according to their apocalyptic prophecy that they had preached across Japan. Seeing that probability of doomsday happening was quite negligible, the sect planned to release anthrax and other pathogens both into the livestock and people so that they can prove their prophecies.

In 1995, the sect attempted to spread anthrax pathogens across Japan targeting both animals and populations to enhance spread of pathogens. The sect carried out agro-terrorism acts across Japan because they wanted to weaken political stability and attain power so that they could establish their own theocratic state.

According to Turvey, Mafoua, Schilling, and Onyango (2003), in spite of numerous series of attacks that the sect conducted in Tokyo, Japan, the spread of anthrax and other pathogens failed to become virulent and thus no one suffered from any sicknesses related to the attacks (p.26). The pathogens were not virulent because the sect did not manipulate and develop the pathogens well in their laboratories to become virulent as they expected.

Further investigation of the sect members led to the discovery that they were developing a host of virulent pathogens, which included anthrax, Ebola virus, botulinum toxin, cholera, and dangerous chemicals such as sarin gas and hydrogen cyanide. The pathogens and chemicals did not only threaten existence of humanity and animals, but also political and economic stability of Japan.

Following this incident, the lesson learned is that agro-terrorists can use virulent pathogens that target animals, food, and people in causing great terror and havoc in a country. The Aum Shinrikyo sect use of variety of virulent pathogens did not only threaten existence of humanity and their animals but also caused political and economic stability of Japan. The incident depicted that terrorists are devising all possible means of instilling terror among populations, causing significant financial losses and even loss of lives.

Since the sect members used virulent pathogens of anthrax, which affect both animals and human beings, they aimed at causing both the death of human beings and animals. Moreover, given that the sect members were developing other virulent pathogens and preparing dangerous chemicals, it means that they had well-equipped laboratories where they manipulated pathogens and prepared chemicals.

Monke (2004) argues that, agro-terrorists can generate pathogens that affect plants, animals, and human beings at the same time if they want to cause utter destruction of a nation (p.21). Thus, the Aum Shinrikyo sect was developing various kinds of virulent pathogens so that they could decimate population of Japan within a short period, but their plan did not work as they expected it.

Prevention of future occurrence of agro-terrorism acts that involve spread of pathogens requires the government to investigate all laboratories to ensure that they do not store virulent pathogens or manipulate microbes. The government also needs to be vigilant in monitoring terrorist activities with objective of tracking and preventing them from committing heinous crimes. Given that pathogens have ability to multiply exponentially and spread across population within a short time, it poses great challenge to intervention measures.

According National Defense Research Institute (2003), since pathogens and agro-chemicals are central in agro-terrorism, and are accessible and affordable, government should establish intelligence surveillance of potential terrorists’ attacks, carryout vaccination and establish laboratories that monitor occurrence of virulent diseases in time to avert serious crises (p.2).

As a preventive measure, vaccination of animals and population is critical in averting and alleviating impacts of agro-terrorism attacks and controlling spread of pathogens in population.

Chilean Agro-Terrorism In 1989, there was great political rivalry in Chile, which prompted anti-Pinochet movement to poison grapes with cyanide so that they could weaken agricultural economy and subsequently create political instability in the country.

According to Turvey, Mafoua, Schilling, and Onyango (2003), poisoning of grapes with cyanide led to serious economic crisis in agriculture, as major importers of Chilean fruits such as United States, United Kingdom, Canada and other countries suspended their importation because consumers feared poisoning (p.24).

The anti-Pinochet movement used cyanide successfully in poisoning grapes and weakening Chilean fruit farming because it led to losses that added up to $210 million. Moreover, grape poisoning led to political instability as farmers lost confidence in government, and damaged bilateral relationship with business partners across the world.

Chilean agro-terrorism led to realization that use of poisonous chemicals such as cyanide has detrimental effects on agriculture, human beings, and political stability of a nation. Agricultural sector can lose millions of dollars when agro-terrorists poison agricultural produce because customers will shy away from buying products that emanates from the region where attacks occurred.

If a country loses confidence of customers due to agro-terrorism, it directly translates into losses since customers turn to competitive products that are in the markets. Moreover, restoring confidence of customers is an expensive and daunting task that ultimately slows down agricultural economy in a country.

Foxell (2001) argues that agricultural economy is very fragile and susceptible to terrorism, yet it is central to economic development in any nation (p.27). Thus, Chilean incident proved that agro-terrorism have grave impact on agricultural economy and subsequently political stability because it also affects lucrative relationships with other countries and citizens’ confidence on government.

Since agricultural economy plays a central role in general economic development of nations and provides stable food supply to the people, it is imperative that government aids farmers in protecting their farms and agricultural products.

The Chilean agro-terrorists successfully used cyanide, which is a poisonous chemical, in poisoning grapes so that Chilean fruit industry could lose competitive advantage in the world market. Subsequently, the Chilean fruit industry and farmers made significant losses worth $210 million dollars. Therefore, government should ensure that poisonous chemicals that terrorists can potentially utilize in agro-terrorism are inaccessible to public who do not have appropriate certification to use them.

According to National Defense Research Institute (2003), comprehensive intervention measures are critical in ensuring safety and security of food during production and processing to prevent terrorists from poisoning agricultural products (p. 4). Hence, surveillance of farms and carrying out real-time quality analysis of agricultural products can help in averting great economic losses that resulting from agro-terrorism.

Greatest Agro-Terrorism Threats Agricultural economy is very fragile because it is susceptible to various actions of agro-terrorisms such as food, animal, plants and water poisoning or contamination. In this instance, food and water systems are the main targets that terrorists focus in achieving their ends. Food poisoning is the greatest agro-terrorist threat because production of food is a long process that entails farming, processing, and distribution to respective consumers.

The long process of food production provides an opportunity for terrorists to poison or contaminate food using chemicals and pathogens. Pathogens pose greatest threat to humanity and agricultural economy because it is hard to detect their presence in food and they spread very fast. Unlike chemicals that can undergo dilution with time, pathogens multiply exponentially and increase in number, hence threatens existence of animals and humanity.

Monke (2004) asserts that it is very difficult to detect presence of pathogens in food samples unless they cause contamination because agro-terrorists are generating new strains of pathogens, which require a lot of time to identify and classify (p.11). Thus, identification and classification of new strains of pathogens is a great challenge in combating agro-terrorism, and therefore agro-terrorists are taking advantage of weak intervention measures that result into slow response to their attacks.

Water infrastructural systems are another target for terrorists because disruption of water supply or contamination of water results into grave consequences in health and economy. The case of Ku Klux Klan poisoning of water using cyanide salt depicted that poisoning of water using lethal chemicals or virulent pathogens adversely affect the lives of people and animals that rely on poisoned water supply.

Since there are numerous pathogens that can contaminate water, terrorists can decide to use various pathogens at the same time in contaminating dams and water reservoirs. The contamination will result into grave consequences because it is very difficult and take great deal of time for water experts to indentify and classify each strain of pathogens. In addition, given that patients will depict various symptoms of illness, it will be very confusing for medical experts to ascertain real cause of water poisoning.

Expansive nature of water systems make them prone to contamination or poisoning as security are not able to carry out real-time surveillance of water systems. Hence, multiple poisoning of water systems is a potential threat that terrorists may employ in targeting population that lives in cities and have common source of water supply.

Conclusion Agro-terrorism is an emerging issue in terrorism because since Second World War, cases of terrorism attacks that target agriculture and human beings have been gradually increasing. Since the aim of terrorists is to weaken economies and create political instability of their enemies, agricultural sector has provided an effective platform for terrorists to achieve their desired ends.

As examined in various cases of agro-terrorism across the world such as Ku Klux Klan, Wisconsin and Chilean agro-terrorism, it emerged that agricultural sector is highly susceptible to terrorism acts that involve poisoning or contamination of agricultural products using chemicals and pathogens. During the dawn of 21st century, the United States faced serious terrorism attacks on September 11, 2001, and subsequently experienced anthrax attacks.

The anthrax attacks signaled that terrorists are gradually beginning to use biological weapons in expanding their terrorism actions and instilling terror on Americans and entire world’s population. The terrorists have realized that agro-terrorism is an affordable means of causing political instability, threatening lives of many people, and weakening economies of great nations.

References Byrne, R. (2007). Agro-Terrorism and Bio-Security, Threat, Response and Industry Communication. Rural Affairs and Environmental Group, 1-31.

Copeland, C.,


Work of Art from the Hunter Museum of American Art: Hughie Lee-Smith’s Confrontation Essay college admissions essay help

Introduction Art is a reflection of reality. An expression of emotions, realities, and concerns, art incorporates different elements to make this expression visible and comprehensible.

The end of WWII was followed by the growing popularity of realism in America: dozens of talented artists created their works, trying to re-evaluate the social anxieties of the postwar order. Hughie Lee-Smith was among those, who felt desperate and isolated in postwar America. Colored with civil rights controversies and torn between numerous economic, cultural and social priorities, America of the 1960-1970s deprived thousands of non-white citizens of their right to equity and acceptance.

Hughie Lee-Smith’s Confrontation was created in 1970, to express the brokenness of the racial order in the United States. With no bright colors but smooth texture and clear lines, Hughie Lee-Smith’s Confrontation (1970) reflects the main racial tendencies in 1970s America and expresses the feeling of black isolation against the background of white supremacy.

Why Lee-Smith gave the work this particular title is difficult to define. Different people explain the meaning and implications of his work in entirely different ways. On the one hand, Lee-Smith’s picture depicts the act of confrontation between two young ladies and the broken wall of their hopes and beliefs.

On the other hand, it seems that both girls are confronted by inner conflicts which they try to resolve. Most probably, the title reflects a broad confrontation of racial and social ideas in 1970s America, when the Civil Rights Movement was on the rise and the gap between the white majority and minorities was particularly visible.

This confrontation causes the feelings of isolation and alienation, which neither of the two girls can overcome. It is a realization of someone else’s presence in this world. It is a moment when reconciliation is possible but not inevitable. It is a moment when both girls have to decide, whether they are prepared to see each other and make a step forward toward peace.

Confrontation (1970) is not the only Lee-Smith’s work. Realism was the main thread in Hughie Lee-Smith’s creative career. For example, in 1989 Lee-Smith created his Promise – a painting with a young man, a young woman, and a child standing at the top of the brick wall and looking into the sky.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Like with Confrontation (1970), Lee-Smith does not give up his hope for a better future. Even in desperation and hollowness, Smith always leaves some room for improvement. However, as always, the theme of race continues to dominate his works. An African-American, Lee-Smith is extremely persistent in his striving to communicate the message of racism and equity to the public.

Lee-Smith’s Confrontation (1970) was an acute response to the contemporary social realities in America. The Civil Rights Movement had already achieved its purpose: the Civil Rights Act was passed in 1964 and America was in its way to future prosperity, equity, and citizenship. That was the time when “a balancing act between a race consciousness in art and visual assimilation into the white cultural mainstream” was adopted and expressed through realism (Powell).

That was also the time, when legal developments and achievements had to support the American society in its pursuit for equity and inclusiveness. That was the moment when racial consciousness became a serious barrier to equality and non-racism in America: laws could not change the public mentality, and Americans were left alone to deal with the realities of multiracial existence.

Hughie Lee-Smith never said anything about his work. Moreover, it seems that the artist never wanted to discuss his creative career. Critics were silent, too. Yet, Lee-Smith once wrote:

“As an artist, I am at once a participant and a detached observer of the maelstrom of life in contemporary society. […] my art is a unique visual account of […] what I perceive as a surreal world”.

In this sense, Confrontation (1970) is a complex reflection of the multifaceted social reality, in which the artist lives. It is equally enigmatic and comprehensible. The main benefit of the work is in that it generates different explanations and makes the audience think.

Pic.1. Hughie Lee-Smith. Confrontation. (Hunter Museum).

We will write a custom Essay on Work of Art from the Hunter Museum of American Art: Hughie Lee-Smith’s Confrontation specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The painting is made by oil on canvas, size 33×36 inches (Hunter Museum). It has the artist’s signature in the lower right corner (Hunter Museum). The painting has been loaned from the Smithsonian American Art Museum and does not belong to the Hunter Museum of American Art (Hunter Museum).

It can be found in the East Wing of the museum, titled The Depression and Beyond (Hunter Museum). The picture lacks bright colors. For this reason, it creates a thinking atmosphere and erases the boundary between the painting and the audience. The transition between the light and shadow is extremely smooth; so is the texture. The lines are clear and accurate. Angles are perfect.

Linear perspective creates an impression that the scene is observed through the window. It also feels like the two girls in the picture are not aware of the audience’s presence. There is a feeling that the painter gives the audience a unique chance to observe the girls, as they are trying to take the best decision. Even with a dozen of viewers looking at the painting, the space in which the two girls are located remains intact. This is again due to the linear perspective, which makes possible to evaluate the entire scene from a distance.

The mood of the work is depressive, but with a tint of hope. Heads bent, bodies apart, the two young girls stand at a distance. Faces hidden and eyes closed, they are in the state of desperate separation from the rest of the world. They are thinking. They are facing a tough choice.

However, a ray of light from behind the scene creates a feeling of hope. Lee-Smith does not say that the problem is irresolvable. The girls can find the way out of the spiritual labyrinth they are currently in. However, they will have to pass a long way to reconciliation with the realities of life.

I believe that the picture fits perfectly well in the realities of multicultural American life. Looking at the painting, I find myself at the beginning of the 1970s, when hope and anticipation of the major social improvements were the main features of public mentality in America. Simultaneously, I also feel isolated from the most important things and changes.

I feel like facing a difficult choice – a choice too painful but essential to my life and future wellbeing. Everyone faced such choice at least once in a lifetime. In this picture I see the beginning of something new, but whether this future is better than the past will depend upon the choices these girls eventually decide to make.

Conclusion Hughie Lee-Smith’s Confrontation (1970) is a reflection of civil rights anxieties in 1970s America. With smooth texture and no bright colors, the picture adds to the feeling of isolation from the rest of the American society.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Work of Art from the Hunter Museum of American Art: Hughie Lee-Smith’s Confrontation by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The picture was created when the Civil Rights movement had already achieved its culmination and the American society had to adjust its mentality to the new realities of multicultural life.

However, even in desperation the artist leaves some room for hope. The problem is not irresolvable, and the two girls still have a chance to take a step forward towards peace. This picture can be a beginning of something new, but whether this future is better than the past will depend upon the choices these girls eventually decide to make.

Works Cited Anonymous. “Hughie Lee-Smith.” Michael Rosenfeld Gallery, 2011. Web.

Lee-Smith, Hughie. Confrontation. 1970. Hunter Museum of American Art, Chattanooga.

Powell, Richard. “African American Art.” Traditional Fine Arts Organization, 2005. Web.


Role of Alternative Energy Resources in Reshaping Global Transportation Infrastructure Research Paper best college essay help: best college essay help

Abstract Transport infrastructure is one of the most important and ancient developments in human history. Since the invention of wheel in ancient world, improvement of transport sector has dominated human activities. Over the years, infrastructure has improved in virtually every country. Recent developments have seen production of several PHEVs. This is mainly attributed to economic developments, which are spurred by the need to move goods and services from one place to another.

This technology combines the two methods, use of electric motor to propel vehicles as well as (internal combustion engine. This is very helpful as it mitigates the drawbacks of electric vehicles as well as those of highbred vehicles. This results in low greenhouse gas emissions, pollution, as well as cost of transport. Another factor that receives attention is driving range, which has been faulted in electric cars.

Fortunately, PHEV is well prepared for such eventualities, since it has both electric motor and ICE for fuel. Therefore, in the event that battery runs out, hybrid vehicles can convert to ICE powered propellers. This makes it easy for owners and improves the vehicle’s driving range. Merging of these, two technologies have improved efficiency of PHEV in terms of recharging periods.

However, the only barrier to its full usage is the cost of production. This is major concern as in the case of purely electric cars. However, recent research have shown that by 2020, their costs will depreciate considerably as prices of rechargeable lithium batteries will fall by about 50%. Green stimulus packages that are currently rolled out by most governments are working to promote building of more PHEV cars (Shah, 2009, p. 29, 37 and 43).

Introduction Transport infrastructure is one of the most important and ancient developments in human history. Since the invention of wheel in the ancient world, improvement of transport sector has dominated human activities. Over the years, infrastructure has improved in virtually every country.

This is attributed to economic developments, which are spurred by the need to move goods and services from one place to another. This has enabled man to improve their infrastructure as well as vessels and resources required for transportation. For instance, modes of transportation have increased and improved with inventions after inventions. Moreover, improvement on vehicle models have enabled man to reduce on energy costs.

As much as these developments have made work easier in improving economic development, this has come at a great cost to human lives since most of these vessels use energy from fossils, which are being depleted repeatedly. In fact, fear is gripping the world on its future since exploitation of fossil fuels has reached its peak.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Moreover, these fossil fuels have increased the world’s susceptibility to natural calamities like famine, unpredictable weather, and global warming, among other severe effects. This has led to research and investment on alternative energy, which is aimed at conserving our environment. This paper will therefore explore the roles of alternative energy resources in shaping global transportation infrastructure. In this regard, it will emphasize on the invention and use of electric cars to achieve environmental conservation (Sperling


Psychology in Everyday life Essay cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Seligman’s video

Silver’s video

Terry Gross’ talk

Jill Bolte Taylor’ video



Works Cited

Introduction When psychology is mentioned, the most common mental image that forms in the minds of many individuals is that of a profession that entails working in a clinic or hospital. This image describes the role of one particular type of a psychologist known as the clinical psychologist. There are many other types of psychologists given the diverse nature of psychology.

Psychology covers a large number of areas because psychologists perform numerous different functions ranging from research to providing psychological services to individuals, businesses or schools. Psychologists are usually identified with one particular specialty or subfield within psychology which may include experimental, clinical developmental, social psychology and educational psychology.

While some individuals may think of psychology as a course that is only important to students, therapists or everyone else that is interested in the field of psychology, knowledge in psychology is actually helpful to everyone in relation to improving the quality of everyday life.

Despite the fact that the most of the materials available for studying psychology can be very challenging to read through for the average individual, there are experiments that have revealed that psychology can go a long way in helping individuals handle some of the numerous challenges experienced in life. This essay shall explore three such materials that explore how psychology can be helpful in treatment of psychological disorders.

Seligman’s video Of the numerous materials that explore the field of psychology is a video featuring Martin Seligman that illustrates the benefits of positive psychology.

Seligman, a University of Pennsylvania psychologist, is singled out as the individuals who ignited the recent explosion of interest in positive psychology, perhaps driven by the need to make people utilize psychology to improve the quality of their lives. In his video about positive psychology, Seligman explores the field of psychology as it is studied and examined and how it applied by patient and practitioners.

As one watches this video, it comes out rather obvious that Seligman is stating that psychology is concerned with more than just treating psychological disorders and that it can be applied to several other fields including improving quality of life. Even though Seligman’s talk in this video does little to back up the claims stated with scientifically researched data, it explores several experimental methods that have been used to illustrate the positive effects that arise from various practices.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Seligman also briefly talks about the length of time that these positive effects have been known to last. One of the notable statements included in this video is that happiness is more than just the state of nonexistence of a disorder but an expression that is felt by individuals upon applying their signature strengths.

This statement is followed by an exploration of numerous rigorously tested measures that not only help in increasing the level of happiness but also in decreasing the level of depression among the individuals. Dr. Seligman also attributes some of the ideas included in his talk to some researchers who explored the field of positive psychology before him and even mentions some of the ideas he borrowed from their findings.

Generally, Dr. Seligman illustrated the importance of psychology and how much fun one can derive from applying psychological techniques in helping individuals live a life that is happier, more engaging, and meaningful. Any individual who watches this video is likely to be drawn by the mind opening conversations included in this video and may even experience some eagerness to apply the numerous innovative ideas explored by Dr. Seligman to his or her everyday life.

Silver’s video The other video that explores the field of psychology is the one titled “how to do a self hypnosis.” In this video, Andy Silver who is a performance coach who normally uses Neuro-Linguistic Programming and hypnosis, demonstrates how to perform hypnosis on a patient who in this video is called Joyce.

This video is a good example of how psychological can be used to help people who may not necessarily be suffering from mental illnesses. Hypnosis has the positive psychological effect of altering perception. As has been demonstrated in this video, hypnosis can not only be useful in curing mental conditions but also in improving an individual’s way of thinking.

In this case, Silver is utilizing hypnosis to help the patient improve her performance by focusing her thoughts on the things she wants and where she wants to be instead of thinking of the things she does not want. By helping the patient develop positive thinking through hypnosis, Silver is actually helping Joyce increase her self confidence levels and success rates.

Terry Gross’ talk The other video that illustrates how the science of psychology can be helpful in understanding human behaviors and habits is Terry Gross’ “Fresh Air” interview of David Linden which explored the reasons behind the good feelings that accompany some common actions in almost everyone. In the interview that centered on his recently published book titled “The compass of pleasure,” Linden explains that the brain’s lack of ability to feel pleasure is what can be used to scientifically define addiction.

We will write a custom Essay on Psychology in Everyday life specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More He further states in the interview that while most individuals can attain certain amounts of pleasure without overindulging in the activities that cause them pleasure, there are those individuals, particularly those with dopamine systems that are blunted, who are most likely to over indulge in pleasurable activities to attain the same level of pleasure that other individuals achieve with ease.

He gives an example of this by pointing out that while some individuals achieve pleasure after just two bottles of beer, there are those individuals who have to consume six bottles of beer to get to the same level of pleasure.

As the talk continues, Linden states that it is through the understanding of the science behind the brain’s perception of pleasure that can enable us to be in a better position to administer the proper treatment to those suffering from addictions.

The talk gets more interesting when Linden points out that most people who find themselves addicted to certain activities are driven by more than just the desire to engage in those actions. Rather, the need to satisfy a certain need also significantly contributes to turning a pleasurable activity into an addiction.

Jill Bolte Taylor’ video Dr Jill Bolte’s talk is yet another video that demonstrates the usefulness of having knowledge in psychology. In this video, Dr. Jill tells a story of how she experienced and recovered from a massive stroke and goes ahead to explain to her audience about what she learnt in relation to the meaning of life from this scary experience.

Not all patients who have experienced a massive brain stoke can have the ability to describe their experiences during the stroke and recovery period as lucidly as Dr. Jill does. Being Neuro-Anatomist who mostly deals with the human brain, Dr. Jill utilizes the knowledge she has gained over the years during her profession together with her experience to paint a clear picture of the functioning of the human brain after a massive stroke.

From the way Dr Jill explains how she felt during the stroke and the eight year recovery period, one gets to understand what individuals who have gone through a stroke feel like. It is from understanding such individuals and what they are going through that we can be able to help them deal with their situations.

She then encourages her audience to live a full life everyday and not to wait for a near death experience such as the one she faced to teach force then into consciousness. The talk is generally about the functioning of the human brain and how a stroke can interfere with the normal functioning of one’s brain.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Psychology in Everyday life by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Dr. Jill’s story is an authoritative talk that explores how the functioning of the human brain helps humans to connect with not only one another, but with the world as well. The information contained in this video can prove every helpful and insightful to an individual recovering from a stroke and to anyone who is helping such an individual recover.

The DSM-IV Apart from videos, there are also numerous other materials that are readily available to individuals interested in enhancing their knowledge about psychology. One commonly read material that is related to psychology is the fourth edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-IV).

The DSM-IV and the editions that predeceased it are published by the American Psychological Association for the main purpose of providing clinicians with a well defined classification system that is based on objective and measurable criteria to make it easier to make reliable diagnoses of psychological disorders.

The DSM-IV describes mental disorders and barely attempts to account for how these disturbances come about. Specified diagnostic criteria are presented for each disorder and include a list of features that must be present for the diagnosis to be made.

The DSM-IV also systematically discusses each disorder in terms of its associated descriptors such as age, gender, prevalence, incidence and risk factors. The DSM-IV is basically intended for the purposes of classification and diagnosis and does not suggest therapies of treatment for the various forms of psychological conditions.

The DSM-IV utilizes a five-axis system that evaluates patients along several dimensions. The first and second axes make up the entire classification of mental disorders. Before a diagnosis is made, the patient should be subjected to the entire five-axis criteria for diagnosis.

The first axis of diagnosis is made up of conditions that fall under the category of clinical disorders and these include major depression and schizophrenia. The second axis is made up of personality and developmental disorders. Conditions such as mental retardation and autism are examples of those classified under developmental disorders paranoia and anti-social behaviors are classified as personality disorders.

The third axis is made up of physical disorders and other general medicinal conditions. The fourth axis is used to code psychosocial problems that contribute to a patient’s psychiatric problem. The data about these stressors are especially helpful during the development of patent treatment plans. Finally, the fifth axis is helpful in developing a global assessment of functioning (GAF) which is based on a continuum of health and illness, using a 100-point scale on which 100 the highest level of functioning.

Conclusion Psychology is not only used to treat patients suffering from mental conditions but also in improving the quality of life of healthy individuals.

This essay has explored two videos illustrating different ways of applying psychology and an article that explores several steps that are taken in the diagnosis of a mental condition. The information in this essay illustrates the importance of possessing knowledge in psychology.

Works Cited “Compass of pleasure: why some things feel so good.” Fresh Air 23 June 2011. Digital file.

Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fourth Edition (DSM-IV).15 May, 2004. Web.

Seligman, Martin.”Martin Seligman on positive psychology.” Ted, July 2008. Digital file.

Silver, Andy. “How to do self-hypnosis.” e-how health. Digital file.

Taylor, Jill Bolte. “How it feels to have a stroke.” 13 March, 2008. You tube video


Are Americans Killing Themselves Essay college application essay help: college application essay help

According to the article written by Dr. Richard Carmona about the health status in America, it is evident that there is a problem in their eating habits. The article talks more about the health behaviors of Americans, and the impacts that those behaviors impose to their health. The essay will focus on Americans unhealthy eating and its consequences.

The possible solutions are also discussed. Although several deaths have been associated with more weight as because of bad eating habits, in America still other causes of overweight are not related with eating habits such as genetic constituent, social, and environmental factors (Carmona 49). Some eating habits can also be controlled early enough, to avoid reaching to that fatal point of causing deaths. To some extent, the bad eating habits can be well controlled during the early childhood stages when children are growing.

According to the research done by Dr. Richard Carmona, there is health crisis affecting various sates, cities, communities and schools in United States. The major health crisis that is causing many diseases and deaths in America is obesity. Although the crisis is growing rapidly, it can be prevented through the right measures.

According to the statistics provided in the article, it showed that two thirds of the Americans are either overweight or obese. One eighth of deaths in America are because of diseases related to overweight or obesity (Carmona 51). The worst part of these statistics is the fact of realizing that many people are dying of something that is preventable. Just eating something at the wrong time and in wrong amount will make some people have limitations of time they are planning to serve their communities and their families.

Through the unhealthy eating, and lack of enough physical exercises, young children are facing very serious consequences. The rate of childhood immunization is very high in United States, and the infant mortality rate is on the other hand low. Other discouraging news in this article and others are that a great number of children in the United States have excess body weight.

Due to this excess weight with the young children, there is an increased factor for these children to contract serious diseases, and experiencing other health problems (Dickinson and Leming 246). Some of the diseases that have been spotted out because of unhealthy eating habits are diabetes, heart illnesses, and mentally related problems.

The author of the article reminds parents and the guardians that they should work extra hard to enlighten their children on the importance of practicing healthy eating and physical activity at the same time. This idea of the author is very true, as this will be laying a good foundation for a future of people, who understand well the risks and consequences that are likely to arise because of unhealthy eating.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Moreover, if every child grows up with understanding of what is good and healthy for him or her to consume, it would be a very good start up for its lives. A study that was conducted by the New York City Department of Health and Mental Hygiene, revealed that there is epidemic of childhood obesity, whereby one quarter of the children in most of the public schools in the city are overweight (DeSpelder and Strickland 187).

Unless some efforts are put in place to educate these children on the risks that are ahead of them due to their overweight status, it would be preparing them for deadly diseases. The main reason behind people becoming overweight especially young children is by eating too much and making minimal moves.

The major source of this behavior is not the children, but their parents who increases the portion of food that their children feed on un-proportionally. Another cause is the type of games that the young children are introduced to, computer games and television programs are the main games that young children spent their leisure time engaging in.

Parents being the source of this problem are also expected to come up with solutions to solve their eating habits problems, and those of their children. One major step that the parents, organizations, and other leaders are taking is to facilitate the campaign against childhood obesity (Dickinson and Leming 112).

The main initiatives that are put in place are to teach children as well as the adults the importance of enjoying healthy foods in the required portions. Parents and guardians are urged never to use food as a type of a reward or a punishment to the growing children.

In addition to taking care of what the growing children and the adults are eating, physical exercise should be an important factor of controlling the weight gain. Young children are encouraged to engage in physical exercises at least one hour per day. For the children, simple things can do good to them like taking the stairs instead of using lift, riding bikes, and other times taking part in sports (Carmona 51).

For instance, Mr. Thompson the secretary in the department of Health and Human Services initiated the idea of dieting within the department, and set a good example by loosing more than 15 pounds. Children may find it hard to do what their parents may be telling them, but they do not fail to imitate what their parents are doing. The author of the article advises the parents to guide the growing children through actions.

We will write a custom Essay on Are Americans Killing Themselves specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Moreover, something else that should be considered in the United States to guide the eating habits of both the children and the adults is through conducting regular check ups (DeSpelder and Strickland 177). Someone may not be sure of how the body is responding to the foods he or she is feeding on. Instead of waiting until the body start experiencing some healthy problems, one should be always visiting the physician for BMI checks and nutritionist for more advice on what best to feed on, and at what time of the day or night.

The whole process of feeding on healthy foods starts with the initiative of making the right and informed decision of what to eat and what to avoid eating. Things like alcohol, tobacco, and drugs should be avoided, as they are also contributors of healthy problems. The healthy status of anyone may be deteriorated by consumption of alcohol and drugs.

Another initiative that may work best to promote healthy eating is the youth media campaign, as it is discovered that most of the American youths spend a lot of time watching television (Dickinson and Leming 113). These media campaigns would help a great deal to pass the relevant information to the youths concerning what is health for them.

Through these campaigns, it would be possible to remind them on the importance of taking part in physical activities, avoiding drugs and alcohol, and eating small proportions of food regularly, instead of taking much food at once. When people realize the consequences of unhealthy eating, they would be in a position to make informed decisions on what to eat and what not to eat.

In conclusion, the high level of globalization in America has come up with advancement of every aspect affecting the citizens eating habits. There are foods that are refined to an extent of loosing their nutritional value, hence increasing their energy contents. When these foods are consumed, they end up adding more calories in the body than what the consumers are utilizing hence weight increment (DeSpelder and Strickland 231).

To some extent, the citizens are coming up with such foods, and consuming them without engaging themselves in physical activities. The articles discussed in this paper are enough evidence that, it is the Americans, who are killing themselves and their children through bad eating habits. Most of the foods that add many calories to consumers are manufactured by the United States` industries.

Unless some positive steps are initiated like what the Department of Human health is doing, the Americans will continue to kill themselves with high-energy foods that are the cause of deadly diseases. Most of the people suffering from obesity and other healthy illnesses are because of unhealthy eating, while others suffer because of genetics and environmental factors (DeSpelder and Strickland 203).

To avoid the overall health related problems with adults and their children is to practice regular check ups to discover when things are going wrong. It is the responsibility of everyone especially the manufacturers, restaurant workers, and other people dealing with foods to provide people with healthy foods, especially the growing children. With this, the society will have a healthy generation with a bright future and unlimited lifespan.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Are Americans Killing Themselves by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Works Cited Carmona, Richard. “The obesity crisis in America.” Public Health (2003): 40-56.

DeSpelder, L. and A Strickland. The Last Dance: Encountering Death and Dying. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2011.

Dickinson, G. and M. Leming. Dying, Death and Bereavement. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2011.


The Success of Flight Centre Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Flight Centre is a travel agent situated in Australia that has enjoyed a lot of success over the years making it one of the leading travel agents in Australia and the rest of the world (Roth, 2010).

The main objective of compiling this special report about Flight Centre as an organization is to find out the secrete behind the success of the company and the various management approaches and principles applied by the company’s management to ensure the company maintains its level of success (Johnson, 2005). This paper will explore the management strategies of Flight Centre and the importance of social co-operate responsibility in the development of the company image and brand.

Flight Centre Limited as a company became fully operational in 1981 and since then has emerged as the leading travel agent in Australia and the rest of the world. The company had a market capitalization of $1.145 billion on the Australian by the year 2006 indicating a steady growth since its establishment (Johnson, 2005).

The company has expanded beyond the boundaries having opened up branches in ten other countries in Europe, America and Africa. Flight centre is one of the leading employers offering jobs to over 8000 workers in its 1500 stores spread across different countries (Roth, 2010).

Some of the major countries in which the company has experiences rapid growth include Canada, United States, United Kingdom, New Zealand and South Africa. Since its establishment, the company has revolutionalized international travelling and diversified its services to fully meet customer demands (Roth, 2010). Apart from being a travel agent, the company offers other services such as accommodation, car rentals and holiday packages to comprehensively meet business and holiday needs for its clients.

Flight Centre has been able to increase its sales because of its effective market segmentation strategies that cater for online, wholesale, corporate and retail clients (Joyce, 2001). Some of the major outstanding factors that make Flight Centre remain very competitive in the market is its extensively network of stores that makes distribution faster and effective and the fact that it is an internationally recognized brand compared to other brands (Thompson, 2005).

Flight Centre is the leading travel agent in terms of online transactions making it have a competitive edge over its competitors. Flight Center has been acquiring other companies around the world with the recent one being the Liberty Travel company as a strategy for penetrating the North American market (Dobson et al., 2004).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More One of the weaknesses of Flight Center is its inability to sell tickets directly to its clients a fact makes it face a lot of competition from other travel agencies like Qantas, Trailfinders, Webjet and S8 which are able to sell their tickets directly.

The company also is threatened by the preference of many travelers to make their travel arrangements online instead of engaging the services of travel agents (Soloner, et al., 2006). However, the company has an opportunity to exploit the market due to the ever increasing number of leisure travelers and students who are in need of more affordable flights that can only be organized by travel agents.

Flight Centre has a current share price of $21.590 regardless of the fact that there were many natural disasters experienced in the just concluded financial year. The company is expected to record a pre-tax profit of around $ 250 million which will be a 20% increase compared to the previous profit record (Roth, 2010).

All the Flight Centre branches in ten countries recorded an increase in sales with the United States Branch being the highest with a $2 million profit. The high profits recorded in the last financial year are attributed to the increase in the number of leisure of travelers (Copley, 2004).

The success of any organization depends on the strategic plans of the company and the management principles applied by the company’s leadership. Flight Centre has remained competitive and stable over the years because of the board’s resolve to safeguard the value of its shareholders all the time (Clegg et al., 1999).

Some of the strategies put in place by the board to ensure the shareholder’s value is safeguarded include effective communication and charting of the company’s objectives, constant performance monitoring, establishment of risk identification and control mechanisms and strict monitoring and control of capital expenditure and investment.

The board delegates power to managers and employees to ensure all the company’s financial and strategic objectives are met (Kotler, 2005). All the employees are expected to uphold ethical standards in all their dealings. All the decisions made are based on the company’s constitution and core philosophies. Integrity is highly emphasized with all the managers and employees expected to comply with ethical and legal requirements of their area of duty.

We will write a custom Essay on The Success of Flight Centre specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Flight Centre has a well established audit committee that ensures that there is integrity in all financial reports of the company (Baherjee, 2007). The audit committee has the responsibility of reviewing the company’s financial reports to ensure all financial policies of the company are not altered in any way. Flight Center has transparent mechanisms that ensure a continuous disclosure of information to its shareholders especially on issues concerning share values (Werther, 2010).

The company’s management respects the rights of its shareholders with the shareholders being given an opportunity to raise their concerns and opinions during annual general meetings. Flight Centre has well established risk management and control mechanisms with a strict compliance to Australian laws.

The Remuneration structure of Flight Centre is fair to all the employees with the board ensuring that it is done responsibly and all the records included in the annual financial report (Mallin, 2009). Flight Centre has a fare wage structure compared to other players in the industry which has contributed immensely to the high level of motivation among its staff.

Corporate Social Responsibility is an integral part of a company’s business activities and involves processes that ensure that the organization brings a positive effect to its immediate environment and the society in general (Kotler, 2005).

Most companies are always under scrutiny by external stakeholders who always want to know what the company does to promote the immediate communities and how it treats its staff and other stakeholders. Companies have the responsibility of improving the quality of life of its employees and the local communities.

Companies pay taxes from their profits and also allocate a certain percentage of its profits to charity works that improve the general welfare of the society (Kotler, 2005). Social responsibility ensures that the company is well managed to make business remain competitive and sustain the value of wealth creation. Corporate Social Responsibility helps the company address environmental and social concerns voluntarily.

Corporate Social responsibility offers the company a good opportunity to interact with its stakeholders and in the process impacting the society positively (Baherjee, 2007). By contributing to societal growth and development, the company is in other words promoting public interest.

A good company should not only focus on making profits but should also be concerned about the environment and the people inside and outside the company. Corporate social responsibility clearly shows the consumers what the company stands for and its actual mission (Kotler, 2005).

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Success of Flight Centre by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More There is no formal legislation to govern corporate social responsibility but companies have to adhere to principles for responsible investment (Kotler, 2005). Apart from benefiting the society, companies receive a fair share of benefits through its Corporate Responsibility activities. The benefits might include financial benefits through gaining business, staff retention and recruitment, risk management, brand differentiation and goodwill from the government.

In conclusion, Flight Centre Limited is one of the leading travel agent organizations because of its effective management strategies. Despite stiff competition from its competitors, the company has remained stable through diversification of its services and its efficient distribution centers established in more than ten countries around the world.

Strategic planning combined with effective management approaches and principles have made Flight Centre to continue enjoying high profits over the years despite the many challenges the industry has been facing.

Corporate social responsibility forms an integral part of the company’s involvement in the betterment of the environment and the society in general. How the company treats its employees together with their families and its role in improving the environment and the general society are key aspects of an effective Corporate Social Responsibility strategy. Apart improving the welfare of the society, the company gets some business and goodwill benefits in return.

References Baherjee, S. B., 2007. Corporate social responsibility: The good, the bad and the ugly. New York, NY: Edward Algar Publishing.

Clegg, S. et al., 1999. Global management: Universal theories and local realities. New York, NY: SAGE.

Copley, P., 2004. Marketing communication management: Concepts and theories, cases and practices. New York, NY: Butterworth-Heinemann.

Dobson, P. et al., 2004. Strategic management: Issues and cases. New York, NY: Wiley-Blackwell.

Johnson, M., 2005. Family village tribe: The story of Flight Centre Limited. New York, NY: John Wiley and Sons.

Joyce, P., 2001. Strategic management: A fresh approach to developing skills, knowledge and creativity. New York, NY: Kogan Page Publishers.

Kotler, P., 2005. Corporate social responsibility: Doing the most good for your company and cause. New York, NY: John Wiley and Sons.

Mallin, C. A., 2009. Corporate social responsibility: A case study approach. New York, NY: Edward Algar Publishing.

Roth, M., 2010. Top stocks 2011: A share buyer’s guide to leading Australian companies. New York, NY: John Wiley and Sons.

Saloner, G. et al., 2006. Strategic management. New York, NY: John Wiley and Sons.

Thompson, J. L., 2005. Strategic management: Awareness and change. New York, NY: Cengage Learning EMEA.

Werther, W. B., 2010. Strategic corporate responsibility: Stakeholders in a global environment. New York, NY: SAGE


Market Segmentation and Branding Report essay help online

Executive Summary This report entails a comprehensive analysis of the concept of market segmentation. In the report, the researcher is aimed at developing a concrete understanding of how business organizations undertake market segmentation. Additionally, the report also involves an evaluation of how organizations apply branding in their operation.

The report is organized into two parts. In the first part, the researcher conducts a review of different elements of market segmentation. In this section, the report analyzes the process of market segmentation. This is achieved by evaluating the various steps that organizations undertake in their market segmentation effort. Seven steps are evaluated.

The section also illustrates the various forms of market segmentation that are integrated by organizations. These include geographic segmentation, demographic segmentation, benefit segmentation, volume segmentation and psychographic segmentation. The researcher also evaluates the benefits associated with market segmentation. In the second part, the researcher evaluates the branding process in organization.

This part is composed of a number of sections. The first section entails an evaluation of the branding process. Six steps are evaluated. These include market analysis, brand architecture, the big idea, and market communication, employee involvement and brand measurement. The second part also entails an evaluation of the benefits of branding. Finally, a conclusion and a number of recommendations are outlined.

Introduction Background to the study

The success of business firms in different economic sectors is dependent on the effectiveness with which they undertake their marketing activities (Baines, Fill


Gender and National Identity in the UAE Research Paper a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Introduction Different societies and countries have had unique gender relations, gender rights and national identity characteristics during different eras of their history. This uniqueness and diversity is a function of various factors including religion, history of a society, socio-political fundamentals, as well as unique societal cultural factors.

It is needless to mention that most societies in the West, Africa, America, and in the East have been largely patriarchal in the sense that the male gender tend to dominate the social, economic and political spheres of a society for a considerably long period of time (Moghadam, 1999).

The female gender has largely been denied the right to take part in governance or to own property. Even in Western countries, which are largely the origins of our notions of democracy, citizenship started to take on a more all-encompassing framework of reference during the early 20th century when the right of adult universal suffrage was established (Moghadam, 1999).

In fact, in most societies, women were treated as property by men, whether fathers or husbands. The purpose of this essay is to assess how women in the UAE participate in building and maintaining an Emirati national identity. It also seeks to find out gender-specific discourses and practices that the state employs to interpolate women into nation-building process and how women appropriate or resist these gendered state practices.

How women in UAE participate in building and maintaining an Emirati identity

The United Arab Emirates (UAE) commonly known as The Emirates is a federation located in the southeast of the Arabian Peninsula (Archive editions 1994). It borders Saudi Arabia and Oman and shares sea borders with countries like Qatar, Iran, Iraq, Bahrain and Kuwait (Archive editions, 1994).

It is called The Emirates since federal regions which include Dubai, Abu Dhabi, Sharjah, Umm al-Quwain, Fujairah and Ras al-Khaimah are governed by emirs. Abu Dhabi is the country’s capital and its center of industrial, political and cultural activities. UAE’s political organization is based on the country’s constitution, enacted in 1971. Islam is the national official religion while Arabic is the official language (Archive editions, 1994).

United Arab Emirates (UAE) is one of the Arab Gulf countries that have succeeded in embracing and institutionalizing a genuine sense of national identity and nationhood. According to Carreiras (2008), in the recent past, tribal arrangements have begun to fade away and state institutions are slowly taking their place.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As a result, ethnic and tribal conflicts are no longer common in most Third World countries, especially in Africa. Currently, UAE citizens are highly unified in a way that has never been witnessed in the history of the Emirates before.

One of the main contributing factors to this commendable socio-political trend has been the tremendous change in the country’s demographic structure which has been replaced by new cosmopolitan population. For instance, many people do not dwell traditionally in the same towns and villages, under the same roof, or in the same community as the older generations used to before national economic breakthrough following the discovery of oil which has culminated into rapid and enormous social change (Carreiras, 2008).

In particular, the younger Emiratis who make up the bigger portion of the ‘s population are more attached to a national identity as Emiratis as opposed to a tribal identity which was common with older generations before attainment of economic prosperity which have been critical in establishing a stable government and a calm social structure of the federation. In fact, in some emirates, ethnic or tribal attachment is nothing more than a mere last name (Carreiras, 2008).

However, it is important to note that being identified as UAE citizen does not necessarily imply that one must absolutely denounce or deny his or her tribal identity. Nevertheless, majority of the young people are fond of identifying themselves as Emiratis proudly without despising their tribal roots.

In fact, a considerable percentage of the UAE nationals perceive these two as being well-matched to each other and even manage to put together their national integrity with tribal idealism (Carreiras, 2008).The big question is given the conventional place of a woman in the UAE where Islam guides individuals and the society’s daily life, how do women take part in building and maintaining an Emirati national identity?

Even though the UAE is evidently trying to diversify her political organization and establish a particular level of equality that is fair in the eyes of the ordinary people who have been slowly embracing western values by shifting away from tribalism, religion, class, as well as race, gender inequality is still rampant (Carreiras, 2008).

This is an important issue that brings up the question of equal opportunity for both male and female genders within the UAE society. There is certainly an organizational relationship of inequality between men and women founded up on apparent sex differences in the national-identity formation process in the UAE. Like in most Middle East societies, UAE women have been accorded a second-class citizenship which has long been institutionalized (Moghadam, 1999).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Gender and National Identity in the UAE specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This denies women an equal opportunity in the process of creating shared perceptions relating to members of the community, nation-state, heritage and national culture especially at the national and public levels mainly because women have not yet realized their political rights. According to Moghadam (1999), the problematic element of women’s citizenship rights arises partly from lack or underdevelopment of democratic institutions in the country.

However, it is to a large extent an outcome of inconsistency between the country’s constitution that give equal rights to both men and women and family laws which are exclusively based on the Sharia law that does not recognize equality between men and women in anything within an Islamic society.

Nevertheless, women take part in building and maintaining Emirati national identity through their natural roles in the biological birth of UAE nationals and tribal groups, socialization of the young whereby they pass up on their children the assignation of spreaders of culture and identifiers of national or ethnic differences (Moghadam, 1999).

They also participate in national-identity formation process through their representations which usually takes on a political importance. Moghadam (1999) points out those particular women images characterize and differentiate tribal communities, cultural projects or political groups.

Furthermore, women’s behavior and out ward look, as well as their different activities plays a significant role in establishing a county’s identity. For instance, in Islamic societies like UAE unveiled modern woman is a sign of modernity, development and progress while on the other hand veiled woman symbolizes legitimacy, cultural renewal and societal potency to give rise to new ethnic or national group.

Gender-specific discourses and practices that the state employs to interpolate women in nation-building process

As mentioned earlier, UAE government is slowly moving away from the conventional formations of class, religion and tribe up on which her political system has operated for a considerable period of time.

It is trying to establish a certain level of equality, attain a certain level of democracy and realize certain legitimacy objectives by allowing more and more women and men to participate in national politics. Both men and women are gradually introduced to their political entitlements.

The state is including women in the national-building process by randomly choosing women voters and political contestants through governors of individual emirates. Some female, as well as male appointees are entirely selected by state officials (Carreiras, 2008).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Gender and National Identity in the UAE by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Surprisingly however, majority of the appointed members of the Federal National Assembly Council (FNAC) both men and women are ordinary average members of the society. In other words, they were not chosen on basis of their economic background, affiliation to a given tribe, or their last names but on citizenship basis (Carreiras, 2008).

In the recent past, women have been resisting gender based state practices mainly through women’s organizations which have been vocal in agitating for equal political, social, economic and cultural rights for women. Women organizations have been challenging their institutionalized second-class citizenship (Moghadam, 1999; Hasso, 2010; Joseph, 2010).

These organizations are generally campaigning against women’s state declared position in the private sphere and men’s control of the public realm. According to Moghadam (1999), women’s organizations have particularly been calling for modern transformation of family laws which are currently abusive and discriminative to women, illegalization of domestic violence, establishing bigger access to employment and participation in governance and women’s right to hold their own nationality and to carry it down to their children.

These organizations have also been drawing attention to the current family laws which are incompatible with universal standards of equality and nondiscrimination enshrined in the international laws like the Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination against Women (Moghadam, 1999; Joseph, 2010).

Reference List Archive Editions. (1994). The UAE: Arabian geopolitics. Cambridge: Archive Editions.

Carreiras, H. (2008). Women in the military and in armed conflict. VS Verlag.

Hasso, F. (2010). Consuming Desires: Family Crisis and the State in the Middle East. Palo Alto, CA: Stanford University Press

Joseph, S. (2007). Encyclopedia of women and Islamic cultures. Tokyo: Brill.

Moghadam, V. M. (1999). Gender, National Identity and Citizenship: Reflections on the

Middle East. Comparative Studies of South Asia, Africa and the Middle East, 14(199), 137-157


Under Armour Business Plan Report online essay help

Executive Summary Under Armour is at the final stages of introducing a new product to its current product line. The product, known as The Sharp Shooter, is a soccer boot that will target the lower end of the market. The purpose of this business plan is to offer a concise explanation of the business goals for which we intend to venture in.

The plan offers details of our strategies and objectives towards achieving the business goals in both foreign and home markets. The report also covers a market analysis that will aid in formulating strategies for entering the markets and achieving a significant market share

Company Description Under Armour is a US based sports clothing and accessories company that was founded in January 2006 by Kevin Plank, who is currently the company’s CEO. It specializes in sportswear and trendy casual apparel, mainly targeting athletic teams in schools, colleges, and in the military.

The company has been very successful at designing sports wear and basketball shoes and, due in part to the huge success of its clothing line, wishes to expand its operations into the soccer boots market. Under Armour intends to market the new product as part of the existing basketball shoes and differentiate itself from competitors by the marketing strategies, exclusiveness, and high brand awareness.

The factor to the company’s success at this new venture is that Under Armour has already established its brand in the market and will be aiming to extend its customer base to football and soccer players. However, we shall continue to market the rest of our products especially in cases where they are complementary, for instance, colleges and schools that use Under Armour sweatshirts can buy our football boots too for use by football and rugby players. Other institutions may prefer to purchase all of their sporting items from us.

Product Under Armour deals mainly in sports clothing and accessories. Currently, our main product focus is on sports shoes, specifically football boots that can be used by soccer and rugby players. The product will be known as Under Armour Sharp Shooter, shortened to The Sharpshooter.

One advantage that The Sharp Shooter will possess over the mainstream football boots is that it will have adjustable insoles that can be adjusted when a player feels so, and hence increase a player’s comfort while improving grip. The Sharp Shooter will also be made using the latest technological in leather treatment that will make them durable, more comfortable, and minimize injury to player’s feet.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Market Analysis There has been a steady increase in the number of students and youths participating in football games mainly as s recreational activity. These players do not require expensive sporting such as those used by professional athletes and normally have trouble finding durable, low budget boots. The main industry players in the market are Puma, Nike, Adidas and Reebok, all of whom target professional athletes and large sports clubs or groups.

Hence, Under Armour recognized the difficulty encountered by non-professional athletes and has stepped in to manufacture its own low-priced yet durable soccer boots to serve this steadily growing market. however, the company will also target large sports clubs in its long term strategy and will begin by introducing the Sharp Shooter to sections of its current client base that may find the product useful.

Competitive Analysis and Strategy

The market for soccer shoes is currently dominated by Nike, Reebok, Puma and Adidas. Although these companies are huge in the world arena, their presence is rarely felt by small sports clubs that make up Under Armour’s main client base since they mainly target large football and rugby clubs.

Hence, Under Armour will not come under direct competition with these multinational companies. However, in the future, we will market our products to big clubs and will differentiate ourselves from the competitors by adopting aggressive pricing and promotional techniques.

Under Armour will be the only company offering a complete set of sporting items, from hats, shirts, pants, sporting shoes and other accessories. The company shall strive to market and supply its products together in order to fight off competition and maintain its market share.

Marketing Plan

Our initial market will be our existing client base. The company has been contracted to supply shirts by a number of small and large sporting clubs in schools, colleges and large football clubs such as Tottenham Hotspurs of the UK and Hannover 96 of Germany and even rugby unions.

Under Armour will approach these customers and present the product to them at a commission. This will help in brand improving brand awareness and expand our client base. The company has established positive relationships with major chain stores and distributors around the US, and this will help in marketing.

We will write a custom Report on Under Armour Business Plan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Pricing

Under Armour will use a competitive pricing strategy during the early stages of entrance in the market. At the introductory stage, the football boots will start selling at $50. This price is below the typical prices offered by the aforementioned competitors, and will give us an edge. The price is friendlier too, and this will enable persons who are not employed to own new boots. The strategy will also help in brand awareness and, in a sense, will act as a promotional tool.


Products will be distributed through retail chains and stores, and our strength lies in the fact that we have previously established positive connections with these stores. This will greatly boost our distribution channel. As previously stated, we will also distribute our products directly to our clients.

Under Armour have a number of exclusive retail outlets around the country that specialize in selling its products and these stores will be filled The Sharp Shooter football boots once they come out the factory. These stores are found at the Westfield Annapolis mall in Maryland and a larger store at Westfield Fox Valley in Illinois and in other areas in and out of the US.


Apart from promoting our products by presenting them to existing customers, the company will use radio and television the new product. Since the product will be used mainly by soccer and rugby players, Under Armour will attend similar sporting events and promote its products.

It will also organize or sponsor a sports event, in these sponsored events, the company will offer its products to the top three winning teams in each category. There will be raffle tickets in the venues and the winners will be given an assortment of Under Armour products, however, focus will be on the football boots and every effort will be made to inform the public of their strengths through public address systems at the sports venues.

In order to woo current customers, Under Armour will offer discounts if these customers agree to purchase the football boots alongside other sports apparel. All customers, new and existing, will be offered sliding sales discounts when they buy in bulk (20 pairs or more). Finally, Under Armour shall promote its new product on college and school websites and on other sports websites, as well as through celebrity endorsements.

Operation objectives and strategy

We have decided that we will increase our productions capacity and the number of salespeople in order to satisfy future market demands. Additionally, we will enhance training, research and development, add new product lines and encourage innovation and modernity in our product.

Financial Plan

Plans for the introduction of The Sharp Shooter have been ongoing for a number of years. Consequently, Under Armour has accumulated enough capital to fund the whole program. The company intends to trade publicly at the NYSE, this will provide us with the additional capital outlay should there be need to expand our operations in line with increased demand.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Under Armour Business Plan by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


Family as Agents of Socialization Research Paper custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction



Work Cited

Introduction Socialization is a gradual process through which a baby learns the principles, ways of life, conventions, and regulations of his or her society. Sociologists define it as the process through which one inherits cultural beliefs and ideologies of his society. It involves learning of the crucial processes in the society (Mitchell 199).

Agents of socialization refer to the structures and techniques of social organization that control the behavior of an individual in a given society. There are four socialization agents in the society. These include the family, academic institutions, peers, and the media. Socialization agents vary in different societies.

In most circumstances, the family is the key socializing agent. It is the most crucial socialization agent in a primeval society. The human concept of a family is a group of persons who are linked together by resemblance, consanguinity, and co-residence. In many communities, it is the principal agent for children socialization (Rosenberg 672).

There is no set time concerning the commencement and end of socialization. However, some social scientists have devised distinct socialization stages. These include oral, anal, oedipal, and teenage stages. The family is the chief socializing agent in these stages. Oral stage is the stage where an infant is not involved with the whole family but associates with the mother.

The newborn at this point only identifies the mother. The second stage, anal, usually begins after the first year and ends when the child is three years. During anal stage, the infant distinguishes his role from his mother’s. It is also during this stage when the child learns fundamental issues in his society. Oedipal stage starts when the infant is about four years to adolescent.

The child during this stage becomes a full member of the community and identifies his role in society. The last stage, adolescent, starts in puberty, and this is when the child seeks freedom from his parents. It is at this stage when he chooses his career and a spouse. At this stage, he learns about the taboos of his community. This paper will discuss the family as the utmost socialization agent (Berns 316).

Discussion The family marks the start of socialization for most people. It assists young ones assimilate their culture and identify with their community. The family also gives the young members their social status. It plays a prominent role in teaching these members of society about the dangers and effects of early sex. Young members of the society usually socialize with their relatives by learning their routines and establishing signals for their wants (Mitchell 296).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The family as an agent of socialization is seen in the fact that the young grow in a vicious association, wherein they are taught to love people who strike and subjugate them. The family thus comprises the initial cell of the society. Children start to watch their parents and siblings for satisfactory ways to intermingle socially, and this remains as a physically powerful influence in their lives.

Family influences on socialization have become highly influential. The family regardless of its nature and size is the fundamental factor in socialization. The young learn how to associate with others by observing their parents. They learn how to behave in disagreements. They also learn how to achieve what they want from others.

Children are socialized via their families control to view the globe in different ways. This may include viewing the nation as an insecure place, a place to train and discover, a place where one needs to take care of himself and where one is sustained and totally loved. Though these lessons keep changing all through the live of an individual, the influence of the family as an agent of socialization never weakens (Berns 398).

As an agent of socialization, the family provides a person with skills and practices necessary for partaking in societal activities. Communal and cultural stability are achieved through the family.

It entails an understanding of how things occur in the society and the development of emotional associations with the community members. Through the family, socialization endows a society member with the responsibility of performing certain tasks in the society. This means that the closest relatives are the most imperative agents of socialization agents.

A family provides to its members love and care. This helps the child to grow socially, emotionally and physically. The parent is the most crucial in the development of the child. By interacting with other family members, the child learns social, acquaintance, loyalty, and patriotic skills. When a child lacks a family to train him in his early stages, then socialization for this child becomes exceedingly hard (Rosenberg 672).

The basic function of the family is to bring persons into being both physically and socially. One’s family experiences, therefore, fluctuate with time. From the children’s point of view, the family is the basic unit for orientation. It positions children socially and plays a key task in their culturalisation and socialization. From parents’ perception, the family is the basic unit of procreation whose goal is to give birth, acculturate and bring children together (Mitchell 199).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Family as Agents of Socialization specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The family has an effect on the social relationships in any community. It is depicted as the building social element of the structure of any community. The family as an agent of sociological change is also seen when it comes to patterns of exchanging ideas. There is a set of beliefs in a family that demonstrate how the family members should exchange ideas and interrelate with one another.

The family pattern of exchanging ideas originates from two fundamental principles. This is the level at which communication is valued and the degree at which the family unit strains on similarities and variations concerning beliefs and attitudes (Rosenberg 672).

In communities with sexual distribution of labor, matrimony and the consequential relationship amongst persons, the establishment of a cost effective family unit is necessary. Although the context of a family was initially referred to as blood associations, intellectual anthropologists assert that one must comprehend the blood notion metaphorically. Many communities, however, recognize the family via other contexts such as genetic detachments (Berns 398).

The veracity of a state is the integrity of its maleness. In fact, it can be reproductive if only the right version of sex hierarchy has been developed and reproduced. The family is the chief instrument in this process. It binds all the males and females in a society to a larger combination in which they are supposed to familiarize themselves to one another to be productive.

If the contemporary state is to be set for a war, then the preferred institutional setting to carry out this action is the family. The family as an agent of socialization is thus comprehended as a fundamental building slab in the creation and elevation of the state. This state building idea of the family runs all through to totalitarianism and its characteristic traditions of rebirth after times of fault and decadence (Rosenberg 672).

In the modern society, the family is viewed as a place of safety, which supplies total fulfillment. It encourages closeness, love, and confidence where persons may run away from the struggle of dehumanization. The family is a storehouse of warmth and compassion and stands in resistance to the aggressive world of trade. It safeguards its members against the external world (Mitchell 199).

The family in a customary community forms the basic economic unit. This monetary role of the family has, however, slowly diminished in the modern era. In the US, the family is still immensely influential in the agricultural sector and many other sectors in the country.

The association between the financial role of the family unit, socialization, and artistic values is still complicated. Family units may also affect both national and religious organizations. The surprising esteem for women in any society means that young people in that society tend to doubt strong dictatorial leaders (Berns 398).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Family as Agents of Socialization by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion The protective nature of the family has currently declined as the ethics of family accomplishment have taken new structures. In the present day, the family is more rewarding than protective. It provides what is crucially needed but absent in other communal arrangements. Family organizations of the ancient times were advanced. Families were steady and happy since they did not have to compete with difficulties such as undisciplined children and separation.

High rates of family separation and births out of wedlock designate a decline in the family institution. Marriages are no longer organized but are for financial gain and children do not add to the family proceeds. The increased position of love signifies a societal change towards supporting emotional implementation and associations within the family. This change essentially deteriorates the family institution (Mitchell 199).

Work Cited Berns, Roberta. Child, Family, School, Community: Socialization and Support. Belmont: Cengage Learning, 2010. Print

Mitchell, Barbara. Family Matters: An Introduction to Family Sociology. Toronto: Canadian Scholars’ Press, 2008.Print

Rosenberg, Michael. Introduction to Sociology.Routledge: Routledge Publishers, 1983.Print


Contribution of the Factors to the Internet Growth Essay essay help online: essay help online

The World Wide Web as it is today has witnessed myriad changes. It began as a closed resource only used for governments and large organisations until later when it was revolutionized and became an open resource for the whole world. The benefits the internet has brought forth are mind boggling particularly in the aspect of globalising the world. The possibilities accompanied with its robust growth are inexhaustible.

The internet has become the world’s richest resource of information making knowledge far more accessible at the touch of a button. This paper will look at a few factors and how they have each contributed to the immense growth of the internet. It will also look at scripting languages both one server side and one client side and discuss the different methods used to integrate multimedia features into various multimedia products such as websites and CD-ROMS.

Scripting languages are increasingly gaining popularity as a result of the emergence of web based applications on the internet. The World Wide Web market is exponentially moving towards the age of dynamic web content which is a great advancement compared to the static content that has been in existence for a long time.

Day in day out web gurus are busy developing new scripting languages which are more user friendly requiring very minimal or no programming prerequisite. This in turn has led into an explosion in the development of highly interactive web pages. Nonetheless scripting languages have a major loophole that developers have not been able to counter which has proved to be a major security breech that is encountered by majority of the internet users.

This is the ability of executable code to be unconsciously downloaded to a web browser’s machine from the remotely located server and easily run on the browser’s interpreter. This in turn results to issues of security where malicious characters use this loophole to get into peoples computers and steal valuable information (Whitcomb, “Client and Server”).

The integration of multimedia features into multimedia products on websites is perhaps one of the paramount achievements witnessed in web development. One therefore wonders how this has been achieved. This is where the concept of one server scripting language and one client scripting language kicks in.

The one side client environment solely plays the role of running scripts this is in essence a browser. The scripts (in form of source codes) are obtained from the web server over the internet and processed on the end users browser (“Methods Used to Implement Client-side Scripts” n.p). The client computer’s browser has to have the scripting language enabled for it to run. Various methods can be used in the implementation of client side code. These include;

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Integration of scripts in between a pair of script tags

Can be stored in an external file that is singled out form the extension src which attributes a script tag.

Can also be implemented within an event handler.

Finally can be implemented in various URL’s that use certain kind ofprotocols.

The one server side environment scripting language is run by the web server. When a user on the client server side sends a request it is fulfilled directly after the script is run of the web server thus generating dynamic HTML pages.

The generated HTML is then sent to the client browser as output.One server side scripting language is the wheel behind dynamic and interactive websites which are linked in with databases on the server (“PHP Server Side Scripting Language” n.p). It generates items from the database and sends to the client browser which is the displayed out by the browser as results.

The major advantage of one server side scripting is the unlimited ability to highly customise results based on the user’s requirements, access databases in form of queries and the unlimited access rights they poses. With the use of this different scripting languages integration of multimedia features into products has become a reality and with the advancement in scripting languages the internet in the near future is expected to have limitless functionalities embedded within it.

Having looked at how scripting languages work it is imperative to look into how modern scripting languages have further backed the transformation of the web. As explained earlier,modern scripting languages have been instrumental in the transformation of the web. Earlier scripting languages such as Perl are slowly fading awaydue to their limitation in functionality as well as their complexity levels.

Another major difference between modern and earlier scripting languages is the fact that the modern languages are easy to pick up and learn even for beginners as compared to earlier languages that were more structured with heavy code(Joan, “Difference between Pearl and Python”). This limits the users as not many people would easily understand them.

Earlier scripting languages used confusing keywords that more often than not do not conform to the task that the coder had in mind. This only served to confuse the more. Scripting languages in the earlier days were as complex as software development languages and thus took longer time to debug. This would mean that a programmer writing complex code would have to take a very long time in checking for errors. However modern languages have overcome this barrier.

As it has been shown modern scripting languages have in more ways than one proved to be advantageous in many ways thus propelling the growth of the internet. Other factors of modern scripting languages that have propagated this growth include (“Advantages and Disadvantages of Scripting Language” n.p);

We will write a custom Essay on Contribution of the Factors to the Internet Growth specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More They require minimal programming experience to learn

They allow programmers to perform intricate tasks relatively fast

They provide room for simple editing within most text editors

Provide room for the creation of very interactive web pages

Code runs fast

The last part of this paper will chiefly focus on the importance of open source movement and its role in the development of the modern internet. Open source movement is an organisation that believe that human knowledge is for the world and should be shared among all free of charge.The issue of open source software has been one that has brought forth many mixed reactions from different groups of people.

Notwithstanding the idea of open source software has been a great motivator and a large catalyst in the advancement of the internet. Many advantages are associated with open source movement. The first easily perceivable benefit of this open source model of software is the fact that it is made available at minimised cost or free of charge in many cases(Gonzalez, “Advantages of Open Source Software”).. However this is not exclusive to open source kind of software as some companies provide proprietary software products at no cost.

The distinguishing factor between open source software and software that is provided at no fee is the fact that the source code for open source software is made publicly available and modification rights granted to anyone who would like to make changes unlike with proprietary software where only the developers can make changes to it.

The public availability of source code has ensured the limitless modification of software products. This in turn for enthusiasts as well as pro developers to be able to carry around code within different hardware under different modifications to enable the software survive different changing conditions. Thisfactor has by itself fuelled the growth of the World Wide Web to the levels that are witnessed today.

Another key advantage of open source software that has propelled the growth of the internet is the right to make improvements to code and redistribute. The fact that distribution rights cannot be revoked is an attractive package for developers worldwide. They are attracted by the fact that these rights are universal and they can have their idea spread out to the whole world.

The right to use software in whichever manner one pleases ensures that software attracts a large crowd of users. When a large user base is created it promulgates the creation of a market for the support and development of the software and in the long run attracts more and more developers. This encapsulation of many developers leads to quality products in the market and thus the user numbers keep increasing. This factor has been key in the growth of the World Wide Web over the years (“Key Advantages of Open Source” n.p).

Open source software is advantageous because of the fact that no single entity that determines the future which certain software will take. Say a certain company A relies on another company B for all its software upgrades. Incase something befalls B since they own all the rights to the software and thus it means that the production of the software ceases (Delaney, Cleg


Teenage Pregnancy Concept and Problems Research Paper college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Effects of Teen Pregnancy

How to Prevent Teenage Pregnancy


Introduction It is important to discuss the concept of pregnancy before delving into what teenage pregnancy really is. Pregnancy, in broad terms, is a condition whereby a female human being carries a fetus in their womb. This is because of the fertilization caused by fission of the male sperm and female egg in the fallopian tube.

The fetus grows gradually in the womb eventually becoming a human species with all organs well developed after nine months after which the baby is born. It is also crucial to note that this development can happen in the body of any woman who has menstrual cycles irrespective of the woman’s age (Kaplowitz, 2006).

Teenage refers to the age between thirteen years and twenty years. This is the period when most, if not all human beings, are at their puberty stages and are very sexually active. At this stage though, neither the female nor the male are ready to assume the role of parenthood as they themselves are still considered as minors.

Unfortunately, most teenagers are so curious and most have the urge to have sex at this early age. Since most of them are, do not have much knowledge regarding sex, most female teenagers end up being pregnant at this minor age. This is what is referred to as teenage pregnancy as the women in question are not yet above twenty years old.

Teenage pregnancy in many countries is considered illegal. This is because the pregnant women are still minors who should be at the care of their parents. In most cases, these minors become pregnant without their conscious knowledge and most are not ready to carry pregnancies at this age.

There many cases reported of teenage pregnancies in not only the United States but also the world over. These cases vary from one region to another depending on the region’s economic status. It has been recorded that the poorer the region the higher the rate of teenage pregnancy. This therefore means that teenage pregnancy is more prevalent in the developing countries than in the developed countries.

A study showed that out of every 143 teenagers become pregnant out every 1000 in sub Saharan Africa. This compared to 2.9 teenagers out of the same number in south Korea is an alarming rate and can be reason enough to say that poverty is a major contributor of teenage pregnancy as countries in the sub Saharan region are poor. It is alarming per se according to research that about 13.5 million children are born of teenagers. Majority of these teenagers are mostly in the developing countries.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Effects of Teen Pregnancy Among the issues stated earlier, there are more causes of teenage pregnancy rather than curiosity and being sexually active. Studies have shown that teenage pregnancies in the developed countries are associated with lower economic status, lack of education and are in most communities a taboo.

Most of these teenage pregnancies are outside marriage as it is very unusual to find a minor in this case a teenager being married in the developed world. Teenage pregnancy in the developed world is highly stigmatized and is considered a social ill (Macionis, 2010).

On the other hand, though not as socially accepted, communities in the developing countries do not stigmatize teenage pregnancy. This is because; teenagers are married off to older men way before they are adults. It therefore follows that teenage births are well within marriage in most communities in the developing countries.

In the sub Saharan region of Africa, therefore, many women give birth to their first children before the age of eighteen. Some communities like the Maasai in Kenya have been known to marry of teenage girls to older men leading to the high number of teenage pregnancy in such communities.

In the western world, especially in Western Europe and middle income countries like South Korea and Singapore, there have been decreased rate of women fertility. Because of this, the age at which women give birth has increased reducing the number of teenage pregnancy.

Teenage pregnancy can also be attributed to poor or lack of sex education among teenagers in most countries and communities. In fact, this could be the major contributing factor of teenage pregnancy. Very few teenagers understand the issues regarding sexual intercourse and the use of contraceptives. In a study done in the United States, about 53% of all teens lack information regarding sexual intercourse and the use of contraceptives.

US record the highest number of teenage pregnancies among the developed world. It is usually very rare for parents to approach the issue of sexuality to their teenage children. This education is not also offered in schools or is sometimes offered in limited quantities and quality. Lack of sexual education therefore contributes a lot to teenage pregnancy.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Teenage Pregnancy Concept and Problems specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More There is also the issue of peer pressure and drugs and substance abuse. Most teenagers are pressured to have sex at an early age by their peers. This is more so with girls who are easy prey for older men. A girl is more likely to be involved in a sexual act as a teenager as would a boy.

It is wrongly considered trendy by many girls to have sex way off before they become adults. It has been observed that most teenage girls at the age of between 15 and 18 will have sex with men the age of 25 and above. These men are way off beyond these girls in terms of age and experience. They would therefore very easily lure these girls into having sex with them. Young teenage have a false conception that having sex with their boyfriends would result to the boy friend loving them more.

There is also the issue of drugs and substance abuse. Most teenagers are very outgoing. They may be involved in drugs and substance abuse. Considering that these drugs especially alcohol are easily accessible, they abuse these drugs which as a result impair their judgment.

A teenager is more likely under the influence of alcohol is involved in unprotected sex, as would an adult. Such cases in most cases result to teenage pregnancies and are unintentional. Most teenage pregnancies although whether under the influence of drugs or not are unwanted and unintentional.

Another major cause of teenage promiscuity leading to teenage pregnancies is the explicit exposure to the media. Most often than not, the main stream media portrays sex and sexual activities as trendy totally misleading their audience teens as a result. The media instead of contributing to educational matters these days concentrates instead on what is appealing to their audience.

Educational stuff or material most of the times lacks an adequate audience and is not good for business. This has led to the media having content that are positively inclined to sex thus totally misleading the teenagers who happen to form the widest and the majority of their audience.

Most teenage girls who end up being pregnant are also associated with single parenthood especially in families that lack a father figure. It seems to be a cycle where young women get children out of marriage resulting to single parenthood thus interfering with the social structure of what a family ought to be.

Lack of a father figure who in most cases denies having fathered the teenage babies affects a lot teenage girls in such families. Such girls are pushed by circumstances to seek father figures in older men who in most cases take advantage of them leading o teenage pregnancies thus perpetuating the cycle (Ellis, 2003).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Teenage Pregnancy Concept and Problems by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More There are also psychological factors that lead to teenage pregnancy. Some parents become over protective especially about their teenage daughters. This stringent upbringing can result to rebelliousness on the part of the teenage girl due to the feeling of lack of love and freedom. This couple with the lack of proper sexual education and bombardment from the media and other factors will most often than not lead to the teenager being involved in sexual activities. This in most cases lead to teenage pregnancies.

The issue of poverty in the developing countries prevents the teenage girls from using contraceptive if they even know about them at all. Considering that teenagers are sexually active, it becomes an obvious fact that these teenagers are going to take a risk by having unprotected sex leading in most cases if not all too teenage pregnancy.

Having highlighted some of the causes of teenage pregnancy, it is important now that we see the effects or the impact of teenage pregnancy to the young individual mothers as well as to the society (Macleod, 1999).

Giving birth can be strenuous to an adult woman who is fully aware of her condition and who is having adequate prenatal care. It thus can be detrimental to a teenage girl whose body is not even fully developed to give birth.

Most teenagers will not disclose their conditions to their parents or to any one else unless it is their secret confidant. This becomes potentially dangerous to the teenage girls due to the lack of prenatal care and the fact that her body is not fully developed to carry a pregnancy. A pregnant teenager requires even more prenatal care than her elder counterpart does.

This is because her body is still developing and requires a lot of nutrition to do so. This therefore calls for extra care to a pregnant teenager in order to have both the mother and the child developing on well without any complications. Lack of this care might be potentially dangerous to teenage mothers and can lead to the death of either of them or both. In case of a stillbirth, the teenager may be severely impaired psychologically.

How to Prevent Teenage Pregnancy Considering the stigma that comes along with teenage pregnancy especially in the western world, most teenagers prefer not to expose their condition thus risking both their life’s and that their unborn babies. Going on with their daily lives as if nothing is happening in their bodies can be potentially harmful and dangerous to the pregnant teenagers.

This is what usually happens to many pregnant teenagers leading to birth complications. These complications can harm the mother as not to have the ability to have any more children or can even kill her and her baby. It should be noted here that teenage mothers despite their age could give birth to very normal and healthy babies if given proper and appropriate prenatal care.

There is also the issue of abortion. Most teenagers are encouraged by their peers to carry out an abortion whenever they get pregnant. Some go through the process successfully after visiting qualified medical practitioner where this practice is legalized. In countries where abortion is illegal, the teenagers are forced to go to unscrupulous medical personnel or try to induce abortion themselves. Death of both the teenage mother and the child is usually the result in most such cases.

Other than the physical and health complications associated with teenage pregnancy, there are other social and environmental effects associated with teenage pregnancies. At the top of the list of these effects is the loss of an opportunity to continue with one’s education.

Most often than not, a teenager, who has given birth is forced out of school to assume the responsibility of parenthood. This happens in most developing countries in the sub Saharan region where there is prevalence of poverty.

Parents of such teenagers are in most cases not capable of supporting both the teenage mother and the child. The teenage mother subsequently leaves her education. Lack of education means that it is very difficult for the teenage mothers to secure any meaningful employment. This leads to a perpetuating the cycle of poverty (Treffers, 2003).

Psychological problems on the part of the teenage mother coupled with the trauma and the stigmatization can result to a teenage mother committing suicide. There are cases of teenagers, which have been recorded of teenage suicides due to pregnancy leading to children growing without parents. Other than the teen mothers, the teen babies are also affected both physically and psychologically.

A teenager baby could be born with health complications due to poor prenatal care. This coupled with poor postnatal care may result to impaired growth and other health complications. The child may also be affected psychologically especially in cases where the parent neglects the child or the parent takes away her life leading to a life without parental care (East and Jacobson, 2001).

Teenage pregnancies can although be substantially be lowered especially in the regions where there are most prevalent which is the USA and sub Saharan Africa. There should be proper sex education in schools and at homes. There should be limited sexual content in the media and more of sexual education. The sexual content in the media should also be limited to a particular group of audience rather than being exposed to everyone.

The society should be made aware of the social and physical implications of teenage pregnancies to avoid stigmatization so that the few teenage pregnancies occurring as a result can be cared for appropriately instead of being ignored completely.

All in all the most important aspect of preventing teenage pregnancies or lowering the cases of teenage pregnancies is the creation of awareness not only to the teenagers but to the entire society as well. The society should be made aware that teenage pregnancies in most cases are a set back to the economy as they bring about uncontrolled population growth among many other effects.

References East, P.L., Jacobson, L. (2001). The Younger Siblings of Teenage Mothers. USA: Yale University Press.

Ellis, B. (2003). Child Development, Father Figure Influence. Journal of Child Development, 23. 4: 4-5.

Kaplowitz, P (2006). Pubertal Development in Girls: Secular Trends. Journal of Child Development, 23. 4: 41-55.

Macleod, C. (1999). The Causes of Teenage Pregnancy. Cape Town: Cape Town Publishers.

Treffers, P.E. (2003). Teenage Pregnancy, a Worldwide Problem. Amsterdam: Flemish Publishers.

Macionis, J. (2010). Society: The Basics. New York: Cenagage Publishing.


Environmental Urbanism Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

Introduction Research conducted by various researchers on the environment, in particular the urban centers, reveal various practices that range from pollution in the cities through conservation of natural vegetables to soil, that are worth checking towards sustaining the environment. In the chapter An Introduction to Ecological Design, Stuart Cowan and Sim van Der ryn argue in terms of the way people and cultures have established various mechanisms, all of which aim at preserving their environment.

Human beings can live together in harmony just like the way wild animals interact, not only with one another, but also with their environment (Van Der Ryn


Best Online Research Practices Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

The wealth of information available online makes it simple to research virtually any topic. However, in order to do so efficiently, you need a strategy to find quickly exactly what you need, in the right format and from the sources that are relevant to your current task. An efficient, yet simple strategy is to use the best online research practices: identify your best search terms and places, use online libraries, narrow down your search using Google’s search operators.

Identify your best search terms and places The key to a quick and successful search is, of course, to search for the right thing in the right place. When searching for information online, this means that you need first to find out two things: the domain terms that are most relevant for your topic and the desired context of your sources.

The domain terms are specific words and keywords that are commonly used to describe your topic by people who work in related fields (specialists). It is important to realize that the domain terms are not necessarily always the same words that a non-specialist would use.

For instance, if your topic is “how to design computer programs that are pleasant and easy to use”, you would need to search for the domain terms “user interface design”, “usability” or even “human-computer interaction” in order to find the most relevant sources. A simple search based on the original topic description is likely to return mainly articles written by non-specialists and hence less reliable, possibly containing less information and surely less appropriate as sources for an academic assignment.

The desired context of your sources refers to whether you need for instance academic sources (such as papers published in scientific journals or conference proceedings), newspapers articles, or even texts from a specific discipline or domain (such as electronics, medicine, law or computer science). If this context is clear to you, then you can identify the main websites that are relevant for your search and use the following best practices to find on these websites the information that you need.

Use online libraries If the context that you identified is academic, your best chance for finding fast the most relevant information is often to search directly in online libraries. Depending on the concrete topic and domain of your research, useful online libraries might be the ACM DL (Association for Computing Machinery Digital Library), IEEE Xplore (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Digital Library), Questia (a more general, less technically-oriented online library) or Jstor (a library of academic journals).

All those online libraries (and many others) have their own search facilities and quite often allow more specific searches (for instance, searches based on the keywords stated by the authors of a paper or based on a hierarchy of topics for a domain). Alternatively, you can also use GoogleScholar to search through a wider set of academic papers than offered by a single online library.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Narrow down your search using Google’s search operators To find quickly what you want instead of having to read through a long list of results, you need to narrow down your search, using Google’s search operators. One way to do this is by using Google’s advanced search form. However, the fastest way is simply to use the operators directly in the search box.

The most useful operators include quotes, plus sign, minus sign, site, intitle, intext, filetype. They can be used one at a time or combined together for a more complex search. For instance, a valid search is: “user interface design” -“human-computer interaction” The results for this search will be only pages from the website containing the fragment “user interface design” and excluding those pages that contain “human-computer interaction” as well.

Conclusions Using the above best online research practices, you can save a lot of time and find quickly the exact information that you need and the best sources for your paper. Those practices usually focus on narrowing down your search that only relevant results are returned. However, when an information proves elusive and hard to find, don’t be afraid to also expand your search with cleverly chosen alternative keywords and search practices.

How to Avoid Plagiarism While Using Materials Found Online

To avoid plagiarism while using materials found online, you need to follow a few steps that will also help you write your paper faster, better and with greater confidence in its originality: narrow down your topic; keep track of sources and take notes; analyze and synthesize; use proper quoting, paraphrasing, summarizing and citation.

Narrow down your topic

The first step to avoiding plagiarism is to know very clearly what you will be writing about. This will guide your research for online materials and will help you find your own original ideas and thoughts on the subject.

At the very beginning of your project, take a few moments to narrow down your topic so that you understand not only the general subject that you will be writing about (such as “avoiding online plagiarism”), but also the exact angle and issues that you will cover (such as “concrete steps to write good papers and avoid plagiarism while using online sources”).

Keep track of sources and take notes

Having narrowed down your topic, you can start searching for related information. To avoid plagiarism, it is crucial that at this step you keep track, in an organized manner, of everything you read, and that you take notes.

We will write a custom Essay on Best Online Research Practices specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Keeping track refers to recording the full URL of every page or document that you read for your paper, preferably with an offline copy of it as well and any details required by the citation style that you will be using.

Taking notes refers at the very least to summarizing in a few words what you found relevant on every page or in every document that you are keeping track of. However, notes can also contain your thoughts on the matter (take care to always express them in your own words and never to use words from the original text) or even fragments of the text that you consider citing in your paper.

Make sure to clearly mark, with citation marks, any fragments (even single words) that you copy directly from the source – this will help you at writing time to avoid any form of plagiarism. Moreover, mark in a different way (for instance by using a different color, or italics) what is summarized, so that you will know, if you decide to use it, that it requires a citation of the source.

Finally, organizing means to group those URLs and notes in a way that is meaningful, based on the information that they contain. To help you with this task, you can use special software such as a citation manager, or you can just use separate files and folders on your computer.

Analyze and synthesize

The key to avoiding plagiarism is to obtain your own, original thoughts on the topic of your paper and this can be done only if you analyze and synthesize first the materials found online.

Analyzing means that you extract the ideas from the text you read and try to think them separately, identifying their components and implications. It is best to do this while you are taking notes – it will help you to write down useful notes and to find your own words and thoughts.

Synthesizing is the next step and consists in connecting the various ideas that you identified during analysis, finding new relationships among them. It helps at this stage to add to your notes any new thoughts and to regroup your notes according to the new relationships.

Proper quoting, paraphrasing, summarizing and citation

If you followed the previous steps, the first draft of your paper is ready, made up of your previous notes. Now it’s time to put them all together, properly acknowledging your sources. Try to use quotes sparingly and to paraphrase rather than quote. Paraphrasing simply means restating the content of the original text using your own words.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Best Online Research Practices by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Whenever you use a quotation, a paraphrazed or a summarized fragment, make sure that you add immediately both the paranthetical citation and the relevant entry in the reference list (or bibliography). Don’t leave this for later, as you might forget about it. At the end, do a final review and check that everything that appears in the paper and is marked in your notes has the proper citation as well.


War in Afghanistan Annotated Bibliography scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Causes of the War

Justification and Criticisms of the War

Positive Effects of the War

Negative Effects of the War


Causes of the War Aldrich, G. (2002). The Taliban, Al Qaeda, and the Determination of Illegal Combatants

The American Journal of International Law, 96 ( 4), 891-898. This article gives an in depth description of the causes of the war in Afghanistan. The war had been caused by the September 11 bomb attacks in the U.S which had been conducted by Al Qaeda.

There terrorists had a base in Afghanistan and it was established that they had a link with political government in power in that country at that time. The author highlights the reasons for the invasion and why the U.S government had to get involved. The journal article also highlights on a few difficulties at that time on how the terrorists captured will be treated according to international law.

Justification and Criticisms of the War Franck, T. (2001). Terrorism and the Right of Self-Defense. The American Journal of International Law, 95(4), 839-843. This highlights the causes of the war and Justifies the United States Action to invade Iraq on the argument of self-defense based on the UN Charter. The author begins by highlighting the reasons certain experts have given on the illegality of the US invasion.

He goes ahead to address these criticisms one by one. He also gives the arguments supporting the invasion. The author has dissected the controversial Article 51 in the US charter which the US gave to the public as the reasons supporting its actions throughout that period.

O’Connell, M. (2002). The myth of preemptive self defense. The American Society of International Law Task Force on Terrorism. Web. This paper discusses United States justification invading Afghanistan. The author highlights the reason why the invasion was wrong and unnecessary.

The author interprets the United Nations Charter Article 51 which allows a country to arise in self-defense when it has faced an armed attack. The article analyses the Article 15 and gives examples in history on the application of the guideline. It concludes that the United States should not invade a country based on the expected future actions of the country rather it should be on the armed attacks that have occurred.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Positive Effects of the War Dunn, D. (2005). Bush, 11 September and the Conflicting Strategies of the ‘War on Terrorism’ Irish Studies in International Affairs 16, 11-33.

The Journal article discusses the different strategies the US government has taken in dealing with terrorism. The author shows the changes in approach since September 11 attacks. He highlights three main strategies, the counter-terrorism, pre-emptive and pre-eminence and the democratization of the Middle East.

The paper shows the positive effects of the war in Afghanistan in the region and the enhancement of security in the region and the US. The journal also highlights the tensions and arguments that have arisen over time concerning the use of the three strategies.

Negative Effects of the War Belasco, A. (2006). The Cost of Iraq, Afghanistan and other Global War on Terror Operations since 9/11. Congressional Research Service, Library of Congress.

This paper discusses the costs effects of the wars the United States government has engaged in including Afghanistan. The high spending on defense has had a high impact on the budget of the country. The money could have been used in other critical sectors of the economy such as health, education and social security. The paper highlights the actual and opportunity costs of the wars. The paper goes into details showing the actual item costs of the wars and the trend in the costs both in the past and in the future.

References Aldrich, G. (2002). The Taliban, Al Qaeda, and the Determination of Illegal Combatants The American Journal of International Law, 96 ( 4), 891-898.

Belasco, A. (2006). The Cost of Iraq, Afghanistan and other Global War on Terror Operations since 9/11. Congressional Research Service, Library of Congress.

We will write a custom Annotated Bibliography on War in Afghanistan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Dunn, D. (2005). Bush, 11 September and the Conflicting Strategies of the ‘War on Terrorism’ Irish Studies in International Affairs 16, 11-33.

Franck, T. (2001). Terrorism and the Right of Self-Defense. The American Journal of International Law, 95(4), 839-843.

O’Connell, M. (2002). The myth of preemptive self defense. The American Society of International Law Task Force on Terrorism. Web.


The war in Afghanistan Research Paper writing essay help: writing essay help

Introduction Whenever the name Afghanistan comes up in a news item, print or electronic, stories of war always follow with notoriety. Audiences across the world normally brace themselves for news of suicide bombings, shootings, and drone attacks. The intensity and duration of the war in Afghanistan has made people all over the world accustomed to the attendant carnage (Goodson, 2001). Should this be so? The aim of this paper is to look into the contextual issues surrounding the war in Afghanistan.

By looking at these issues, it will be possible to uncover the critical issues that have caused Afghanistan to remain in a state of perpetual war since time immemorial. Is there any justification for the current war playing out in Afghanistan? What historical factors caused its outbreak and what contemporary issues fuel its perpetuation? This war remains a very significant contemporary issue that warrants a critical examination.

Description of the War in Afghanistan The Parties To The War

War is a complex enterprise. Wherever there is a war, there is always an intricate web of interests. Wars bring together parties whose conflicts surpass the threshold for resolution leading to the picking up of arms in order to inflict pain and to suppress the will of opponents (Gagliardi


Quaker Oats Company (Healthy Eating) Report essay help online free

Executive Summary This is an analysis report of the Quaker Oats Company where its communication system both internal and external strategies are been covered. The analysis puts emphasis on how these communication strategies are carried out to bring forth effectiveness and efficiency in its performance. However, it has taken into account organizational literature available about this especially the one that relates to its communication procedures.

Nonetheless, the analysis establishes that communication strategies that are currently being employed by the company are responsible for its continued operational effectiveness. This is as a result of positive revolutions that have taken place since its inception and the continued effectiveness and efficiency experienced in its business operations.

Consequently, internal communication strategies that are being practiced by the company are built on the company’s organizational culture premise which relates to teamwork. As a result, flattened system of organizational structure was adopted by the management to facilitate smooth communication internally as opposed to tall organizational structure that promotes bureaucratic system of communication.

On the other hand, in terms of external communication strategies, the company appreciates social relationship. Therefore, its external communication system is built based on this foundation where by it seeks to develop cordial relationship with its external stakeholders who include its customers. In relation to this, the company practice good public relationship where by it values corporate social responsibility to nurture and develop some good social relationship with its external stakeholders.

Lastly, basing on the analysis carried out, the paper proposes some recommendations that the company can adopt to further its communication effectiveness. For instance, sound communication in change management comes handy to avoid some uncertainties that come with change since it’s inevitable.

Introduction Quaker Oats was founded in 1901 as an oats processing company based in Chicago in the United States. However, over the time the company has been revolutionizing and currently it makes instant oatmeal. Consequently, in 1966, instant oatmeal was introduced which became a regular flavor. Nonetheless, in 2001, the company was acquired by PepsiCo which currently controls its operations. In addition, the company has expanded its operations and currently, it has a range of products mainly made from oat.

However, since its inception, the company has made major positive strides. For instance, it has expanded its product base which has resulted to expansion of its operations. As a result of this, its workforce has tremendously increased. In relation to this, effective business communication both internal and external has been the pillar that the company has banked on over the time to assure its effectiveness and efficiency in its business operations.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Main Message Communication is the most crucial function in management of any organization. Therefore, improved communication results to improved performance of the organization both internally and externally. However, for this to be accomplished there is need to develop better communication structures that are able to address both internal and external needs of the company. For instance, good internal communication structure helps to prevent issues that could lead to conflict in the organization.

Internal Structure Quaker Oats as a company prioritize communication system in its operational structures. It values communication among its structure of management since its workforce freely communicates to each other irrespective of their level in the organization.

For this reason, the company has flattened its structure of management where traditional tall bureaucratic system of management was replaced to enable free flow of information from any level. According to Nagar (31), flat system of management has few levels which implies that both upward and downward communication are simplified and as a result, there is always less distortion and inaccuracy in the message relayed.

Notably, Quaker Oats adopted flat structure in its management which helps it in its communication system since several benefits are accrued to it. For example, due to decentralization, there is a feeling of personal satisfaction among employees which positively contributes to its growth. Furthermore, this approach gives employees an opportunity to develop skills in decision making since one has to have good critical thinking and decision making qualities to effectively communicate in the organization.

Since the company’s culture is that of building team mentality through teamwork atmosphere, flat system of management provides the best avenue to orchestrate this philosophy. This is so since any form of information in the company is shared freely among its employees. However, to effectively and efficiently accomplish internal communication aims and objectives, the following principles govern its communication structure:

Building Connections The company uses this principle to encourage its workforce to build strong rapport amongst them. As a result, internal information is able to be relayed effectively due to good cordial relationship built. Furthermore, this principle is able to promote organizational culture of team work since connections built become pillars on which teamwork and communication is orchestrated.

Moreover, according to Wright (119), connection building helps to cultivate some sense of belonging which facilitate human contact, friendships, acceptance, love, teams and social life that are the biggest panacea to effectiveness in internal communication.

We will write a custom Report on Quaker Oats Company (Healthy Eating) specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Performance Communication Quaker Oats recognizes communication to be a major asset in performance. Therefore, its communication principles and policies are based on performance. Communication department of the company usually conducts research to determine specific information needs and commits itself in availing the required information. This principle has helped the company by concentrating on issues of communication that are most beneficial to the organization.

Principle of Connecting Unconnected Fraternity According to Wright (68), any organization consists of acute split between information poverty and information elitism. To this respect, the company employs the principle of connecting its employees who falls under the category of information poverty to reduce information sharing parity among its workforce. For instance, employees are empowered with skills that facilitate their access to information from the global superhighway (the internet) by being equipped with relevant computer skills.

Nonetheless, this internal communication strategy has over the time proved to be efficient in creating good communication environment in the company. In doing so, it has helped to foster its culture, aims, mission, vision and objectives. However, in addition to internal communication system being effective, the company has a separate external communication strategy that fosters its business mission.

External Communication

External communication entails all efforts that the organization takes to ensure that it continues to exist on the market. The company’s market consists of several stakeholders who are the determinants to the organization’s operations. Therefore, it is imperative for the company to have sound external communication strategies to guarantee its business survival. In respect to this, Quaker Oats adopted several strategies which include:

Social Relationship

Quaker Oats recognizes that for external communication to be effective there must be good social relationship with its stakeholders. This strategy is affirmed by Wright (276) who believes that establishing social relationship with stakeholders such as customers can bring a sense of belonging amongst them and therefore any kind of information that is relayed by the company can be received positively.

This is so since they tend to build some loyalty to the company. However, in developing good social relationship, the company uses a variety of techniques which include customer education and good public relationship.

Customer Education

The company established external communication strategy inform of customer education. In this strategy, the company educates its customers on several matters that relate to their products. Since its core business products are food stuffs, the company designed communication system that relates to healthy diet to inform their customers on the best practices to balance their diet and how to live healthy. This forms part of its external communication system since it helps to build its social relationship.

Good Public Relations

The company acknowledges the power of good public relationship which is noted by Kapoor, Justin and Biplab (271) to be one of the key elements in achieving external communication goals. To help build their social relationship, the company has a separate department that mainly takes care of its public relations where corporate social responsibility (CSR) is highly valued. Some of the CSR that the company is involved in include sponsoring several homes such as homes for the needy members of the society by donating food stuffs to them.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Quaker Oats Company (Healthy Eating) by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Media Communication

Quaker Oats uses several media channels to foster its external communication. With the advent of technology and revolution in information communication technology, the company has adopted the use of World Wide Web (WWW) where it has its company website for external communication.

This website can be accessed globally irrespective of the geographical hindrance. In addition, the company also uses other communication media such print media like newspapers, magazines and the electronic media such as the radio and the television to communicate externally. All these communication media facilitates good linkage with its stakeholders hence advancing its mission.

Recommendations Quaker Oats has been successful in its business operations since its inception. The company has gone through several positive revolutions that have resulted to growth in its activities. This can be highly attributed to its sound communication strategies both internal and external. However, there are several recommendations that the company can implement to facilitate its communication further in its operations. These include:

In addition of providing education program to its customers, the company must carry out evaluation exercise to determine its derived effects.

Have proper communication strategies for change management within and without the organization to avoid adverse effects that are related to change since it is inevitable.

Provide avenues in the organization where employees can provide their inputs in decision making process. This will promotes sense of belonging and security in the organization hence facilitating internal communication.

Conclusion Good communication structures both within and without the organization are vital in meeting organizational goals, vision and mission. Quaker Oats has effective internal communication that is highly boosted by its flattened organizational structure.

This structure promotes teamwork which is the core organization’s culture of the company. On the other hand, in terms of the external communication strategies, the company banks on its social relationship philosophy to advance its external communication. This has resulted to positive communication that has facilitated company’s operations.

Work Cited Kapoor, Ramneek, Justin, Paul


Southwest Airlines Company SWOT Analysis Essay college essay help near me

SWOT Analysis SWOT analysis evaluates a firm’s strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats. Strengths place a firm at an advantage over rival firms, while weaknesses act as disadvantages to the firm when compared to others.

Opportunities are chances that present themselves to the company and when the company grabs them, it stands a chance of making more profits. Threats are associated with those factors that can cause trouble for a company such as stiff competition (Hayward, 2002, p141). Southwest Airline is one of the low-cost airlines and a leader in terms of the number of passengers who board it annually.

SWOT Analysis; Southwest Airlines Opportunities

Southwest Airline has been in operation for along time, and just like other businesses, it has been faced by both challenges and opportunities, which has made it stronger to date. First, the mission statement is simply dedicated to quality customer service, which is attained via warmth, friendliness, pride, and company’s spirit. This has proved to be true as the airline operates with the interest of a customer in mind.

The airline has been associated with a number of strengths; first, it has always been the best low-cost airline in term of fares for passengers. Therefore, most passengers have preferred it.

The airline has always maximized on internet booking, thus making it easier for its customers, and acting as a way of marketing itself. The airline pays its pilots handsomely compared to other airlines, hence motivating the pilots to fly at least an extra hour as opposed to other airlines (Mouawad, 2010). This has made it possible for the airline to make almost 3,100 flights in a day.

It is evident that the Southwest Airline has its employee’s interest at heart, thus proving difficult for them to be poached by other airlines. In addition, the airline has a unique culture, that of entertaining its passengers, thus encouraging them to fly with Southwest again.

The well utilization of Boeing 737 has made it unique as it only uses this model of airplane. Its main concentration on short trips has yielded to cutting of costs, thus benefited the airline. Nevertheless, the airline has been using one type of airplane, Boeing 737 that incurs minimum maintaining expenses.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Weaknesses

The airline is associated with a number of weaknesses. First, it is limited to sixty cities. This is a major challenge for the airline due to the mergers formed by United Airline and Continental Airline, thus being capable of offering passengers access to the world.

The airline has not been able to defend its territory in the costs leadership, as some other airlines are imitating it, for instance, Jet blue airline that is determined to attain cost leadership. Concentration on domestic flights has made it vulnerable to other airlines, like delta, which provide international flights.

Different unions have been formed by the airline employees, thus proving challenging to the management. The use of a single model of plane could limit its efforts to minimize on petrol consumption. The airline does not rely fully on booking agencies, as compared to other airlines, hence being at a disadvantage in regard to customers who prefer booking tickets through agencies.

However, the airline does not offer the services provided by other airlines like airport lounges, reserved seat assignments, video or audio programming and First Class cabin, and video/audio programming (Dan


Sleep and Dream Research Paper argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Sleep and its physiological benefits

Psychological role of sleep

Impact of sleep deprivation: sleeping disorders

Dream and its importance



Introduction Sleep is a physiological and psychological condition, which animals undergo especially at night. During sleep, animals are unconscious and most part of the nervous system/voluntary muscles is at rest or the sensory nerves are in an inactive state.

Sleep is essential in all living things especial mammals (human beings), who should sleep at least eight hours a day. As an essential body requirement, sleep functions in rejuvenating, repairing, and renewing body tissues or organs especially after a long day’s work. When an animal is under sleep, it subsequently starts dreaming, which is part of the sleep cycle.

Psychologically, sleep and dreams occur concurrently and in different stages. Dreams are mental representation of figures or emotional sensations that occur during sleep. Therefore, sleep and dream are human daily activity or cycle that ensures an animal body is healthy and vibrant.

Sleep and its physiological benefits According to researchers and health experts, sleep is a physiological necessity that all mammals, especially human beings, need in order to keep fit and function normally. Most of the physiological activities are inactive during sleep and thus a sleeping person is unaware of any activity that happens in his/her immediate environment. During sleep, the brain is at rest while the rest of the body system is in active state.

The sensory nerves become inactive; thus; a person in sleeping state cannot use his or her limbs as it happens during wakefulness .The body cells and tissues are in full activity to repair any form of injuries to the skin, blood tissues and other cells. During sleep, the body’s immune system grows stronger leading to an increase in the number of leucocytes.

Moreover, enough sleep reduces fatigue and prevents the occurrence of diseases like diabetes and high blood pressure (Kalat, 1995, p.25). Therefore, for anybody to be healthy and live a longer life he/she should have enough sleep as a basic requirement for the body. Infants, children, adolescents and adults, each need enough sleep as directed by most health experts.

Psychological role of sleep As aforementioned, sleep is a psychological necessity that the brain system is unable to function properly incase of deprivation (Plotnik


Environment, Disease and Crime in Egypt Report cheap essay help

Introduction It is notable that environmental problems, diseases and criminal activities affect the development process in a country. Indeed, an environmental problem, which distorts people’s ability to gain livelihoods eventually, affects their well-being. Similarly, the prevalence of diverse diseases in Egypt limits the citizens’ ability to attain sound health. This eventually causes the demise of monumental proportions of citizens or their reduced productivity. It emerges that criminal offences in Egypt is elevated thus affecting progress.

These crimes emanate from individuals and forces taking advantage of compromised security to execute various activities. These affect Egypt directly or obliquely. Investigating the diverse predicaments in Egypt’s environmental status, disease prevalence and crime activities constitute this paper. Consequently, the paper offers an overview of these aspects. It equally focuses on the concerns and identifies the probable effects on Egypt development. It ends by summarizing different vital issues.

Overview of Environment, Disease and Crime in Egypt Environmental predicaments in Egypt entail mainly water insufficiency and degradation of land. It is observable that the Nile water in Egypt has persistently continued as an opinionated problem for many decades. Soil salinity causes diminished productivity thus necessitating adoption of unreasonable farming tactics that escalated land degradation (Rubio, 2009).

Undoubtedly, the climate change vagaries also worsen the environmental predicaments suffered in Egypt. The diseases, which appear a humdrum in Egypt, include certain transferable diseases. Furthermore, diverse food related diseases and waterborne maladies also exist (CDC, 2011). Egypt faces limited vector borne maladies including “Rift Valley fever”. Additionally, Egypt citizens’ also suffer ailments, which emanate from gaining contact with water.

In terms of criminal activities, it emerges that Egypt faces escalated criminal occurrences. Criminal actions including bombings, murders, gun battles, and religious wars affect the country. Most offences occur on streets and at remote countryside. Furthermore, it appears that a certain wave of transgressions has hit Egypt because of police absence thus augmenting insecurity (Kirkpatrick, 2011). It is obvious that these challenges facing Egypt hampers progress thus stalling her economy.

Environmental Concerns in Egypt The environmental predicaments facing Egypt includes water scarcity. It appears that Egypt is needy on the Nile, which they use diverse purposes. Water insufficiency emanates from the notion that the dry conditions in Egypt limit peoples’ ability to access this precious resource (Rubio, 2009).

This has augmented water-related maladies among the citizens. It is also notable that land degradation affects Egypt expansively. The degradation originates from diverse unreasonable farming techniques, which apparently humiliates land. These techniques include over utilization of fertilizer and reliance on irrigation (Rubio, 2009).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The sandy nature of Egypt’s soils causes salinity, which necessitate continued application of fertilizers thus degrading land further. Great erosions also occur causing more degradation (Rubio, 2009).

This occurs because wind carries the soil transporting them to diverse regions. Water erosion also occurring in the Northern regions of Egypt causes unprecedented degradations to land. The peoples’ livelihoods are profoundly affected by these ecological concerns. Climate change also appears to affect Egypt because of the observable water insufficiency (Rubio, 2009).

This originates from continued drought conditions apparently caused by alterations occurring in the climate. Lands, which appear cultivable, continue to shrink because of the biting climate changes. Egypt also faces predicaments of sea level elevations, which causes occasional flooding thus affecting property (Pallister, 2004).

Egypt also suffers pollution related environmental predicaments created by individuals and companies compromising water quality atmospheric air health. The acts of disposing substances emanating from diverse manufacturing industries significantly lower the aesthetic value of land (Pallister, 2004).

This scenario has augmented chances of attracting environmental diseases, which affects well-being of citizens. Peoples’ interaction with their surroundings’ predisposes them to harmful and noxious substances, which appears dangerous to their existence (Pallister, 2004).

Diseases Concerns in Egypt Egypt contains food-related together with water borne ailments attracted through eating diverse foods and consuming polluted water. They include strains of hepatitis and typhoid, which cause the demise of citizens (CDC, 2011).

The country’s vector borne ailments, which affect people occasionally causes deaths. Malaria cases appear to cause citizens deaths under untreated conditions. Dengue fever is common in urban surroundings’. Yellow fever also exists in the country resulting to the demise of citizens (CDC, 2011). Egypt has African trypanosomiasis and plague, which also endangers lives of citizens.

We will write a custom Report on Environment, Disease and Crime in Egypt specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Diseases, which emanate from contact with water, include leptospirosis, which distress people and animals. It arises from contact with animal urine. Schistomiasis also caused by snails affects people urinary together with intestinal tracts. Animal contact ailment rabies, which also impinges on the cerebral part of peoples’ body, emanates from animal bites (CDC, 2011).

Criminal Activities Concerns in Egypt Egypt enjoyed almost a crime free environment over long periods before the people’s power rebellion of ousted former president Mubarak. It is notable that originally serious crimes centered on bombings, which terrorists executed (U.S Department of State, 2011). Egypt has sustained criminal bombings occurring in different areas in the country thus causing the demise of magnanimous proportions of citizens’.

The most notable bombings emanate from religiously instigated attacks executed by Islam loyalists targeting Christians. These bombings eventually ends lives of non-Egyptians found at bombed locations (U.S Department of State, 2011). It also appears that kidnappings escalate in Egypt with possible killing of victims, confiscating possessions, and paying ransoms. Terrorist attacks directed at crowds also increases notably during holidays.

The observed escalating lawlessness created opportunities for executing criminal activities. This lawlessness resulted from police absence because after the rebellion of leadership offered by former president Mubarak. Criminal occurrences increased sharply thus affecting sections of the citizens (Kirkpatrick, 2011).

Huge proportions of escapees from prisons access deadly weapons, which they use to bully people within Egypt. The surfacing of vigilante groups, which terminate people’s lives, causes more crimes. Religious clashes also escalate crimes as Muslims battle Christians for with intents of filling vacuums in leadership (U.S Department of State, 2011). The criminal activities associated with the revolution include robberies, killings, kidnappings, shootings, and destroying belongings.

Effects of Environment, Disease and Crime Concerns on Development in Egypt It is prominent that environmental problems limit development in Egypt to lesser levels. Egypt, which contains water insufficiency and land humiliation problems still, continues to develop (Pallister, 2004). Egypt uses the Nile waters to implement expansive irrigation initiatives, which apparently enable her raise magnanimous harvests. This facilitates her efforts to avail food for the betterment of her citizens’ livelihoods.

The problems originating from environment have enabled Egypt to shift focus on facilitating progress through motivating productions from diverse sectors. Similarly, Egypt contains attractive resources, which gains use in spurring economic progress (Pallister, 2004). The country ought to establish equilibrium between the escalating travelers’ marketplaces with her citizens’ fundamental needs.

Egypt’s disease problems have little effects on development because of the notion that they do not present huge challenges requiring magnanimous expenditures to alleviate. However, diseases may diminish progresses in Egypt through straining the economy during serious ailments outbreaks. It is noteworthy that Egypt continues spurring its development through integrating diverse aspects initiated to handle diseases.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Environment, Disease and Crime in Egypt by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Criminal occurrences in Egypt have associated with the revolution badly affected the economy. It is notable that lawlessness infiltrated work surroundings’ as people engaged in protests and sit-ins demanding improved work rewards and conditions. These emerged harmful to the productivity thus diminishing the outputs emanating from producing companies (Kirkpatrick, 2011).

Crime within Egypt and insecurity also appear to worry tourists and investors. This affects the economic status and hampers availing employment opportunities. Killings resulting from criminal actions also limit human resource availability for Egypt. In some scenarios, people possessing abilities to spur development die thus making Egypt deficient of important brains. Bombings also causes property destruction, which reduces progresses already attained (Kirkpatrick, 2011).

Conclusion In summary, Egypt has diverse environmental problems, diseases and criminal occurrences, which influence progress. The environmental predicaments mainly occurring in Egypt entails water insufficiency, land concerns, pollution, erosion, and sea level elevations. It appears that Egypt enjoys lucrative progress amid the environmental challenges. Diseases, which appear prevalent, also include infectious ailments.

The country exudes ailments emanating from contact with water and foods. Vector borne ailments also emerge from bites sustained by citizens’ thus compromising their well-being. Criminal activities in Egypt escalated because of police absence during the post Mubarak ousting. The citizens’ created lawlessness which availed opportunities for criminals to strike. These predicaments affect development differently. Crime is the worst threat to progress for Egypt because of its insecurity creations.

References CDC. (2011). Health Information for Travelers to Egypt. Retrieved from

Kirkpatrick, D. (2011). Crime Wave in Egypt Has People Afraid, Even the Police. The New York Times.

Pallister, J. (2004). Egypt. London: Evans Brothers.

Rubio, J. (2009). Water Scarcity, Land Degradation and Desertification in the Mediterranean Region: Environmental and Security Aspects. Dordrecht: Springer.

U.S Department of State. (2011). Egypt: Country Specific Information. Web.


A Comparison between Swedish and Australian Culture Essay online essay help: online essay help

Different nations have different cultures. Cultural practices make an individual to be identified with a certain group. However, cultural practices can result to racial segregation, ethnicity and all other forms of discriminations.

This is because different cultures have different norms. So as to develop this topic, two interviewees, one from Sweden and the other from Australia were interviewed with an aim of exploring the different cultural practices and identifying how the two cultures compared. The following is a presentation of the findings from the interviews and a discussion on how the two cultures compared.

Interviewee from Sweden Background Information

The interviewee was born in Stockholm and had a good command of English, Swedish and Saami languages, since he was a businessman in the Northern regions of Sweden. He had a wife, four children and was a member of Lutheran church though his family rarely attended church service.

Having been born and brought up in Sweden, he was well acquainted with egalitarianism culture. As a result he was humble and found boasting totally intolerable. During our conversation, he preferred to listen as I talked. In fact, he only spoke when answering me. Moreover, he spoke gently and calmly. In his business, he worked hard, though not too hard as he was not out to compete with any one. His last child was below eight years old, so he did not have to work much until the time when the child would go to school.

A Description of Interviewee’s Perspective on Culture

The interviewee recognized the role that culture plays in ensuring that there was harmony in the country. He explained that Sweden’s egalitarian culture builds on past circumstances that support a sense of cohesion. He also liked the fact that activities in Sweden are usually carried out in moderation, nothing is done in excess. Excess, ostentation and boasting are disregarded in Sweden and persons struggle towards the hub way (Pred, 2000).

Impact of Culture on Life Experience and Belief System

The interviewee explained that having been born in Sweden, where Lutheran is the main church, he followed the teachings of the Lutheran church. He further explained that the Lutheran church had state back up and cultural dominion, although it faced rivalry from rebel churches. It is important to note that the Church of Sweden came out as a state church at the time of the protestant reformation (Hannerz, 1996).

On further interrogation, the interviewee explained that he faced lots of pressure to change his religion from the immigrants, mostly Muslims, but he had no plans to reconsider that. The interviewee explained that though he rarely attended church services, unless on special occasions.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Only five percent of the population frequently attended Sunday fellowship in Lutheran church (Stromberg, 1986). He also said that he was a Christian in his own way, thus he had less interest in following doctrines. He believed that earnest spiritual sentiments should be experienced when one is sole in nature.

The interviewee agreed to having been much influenced by his church ideals, Lutheran, about social ethics and open attitude towards technical modernity (Stromberg, 1986). He further explained that current reforms have caused the Church of Sweden to be a more autonomous religious organization. As a result the Church personnel often merged pastoral labors with public engagement, mostly in support of immigrants and global aid. The interviewee confirmed his participatory in these public engagements severally.

Three of his four children were baptized in the church and two were afterwards confirmed, as required by the church. His marriage was conducted by the church. Regarding death beliefs, the interviewee said that he was influenced by his church to belief that autopsy is important. He believed that death implicated losing one’s individual subsistence while becoming component of something superior. He said that English was the language of instruction that was used in schools where his children were.

Impact of Culture on Interviewee’s Interaction with Others

Culture impacts how one interacts with others. The interviewee mentioned several ways in which the Swedish culture has impacted his life. He said that he highly regards family life. He ensures that he adequately care for his wife and children. Whenever he has visitors, he prepares coffee as most Swedes love coffee.

If he is invited to someone’s home, he takes with him a bouquet of flowers, as it is required by the culture. When dealing with foreigners, he tries to understand them and build trust in them as Sweden is a high trust society. In his business endeavors, he puts on high quality suits and silk ties (Hall, 1998). He avoids wearing showy clothes and expensive jewelry.

Since business people in Sweden are normally somewhat reserved he ensures that all his dealings are official and serious unless it is deemed suitable by the particular client or consultant to let proceedings to become more relaxed. Whenever he wants to plan for a meeting, he informs the relevant persons two weeks earlier. He also ensures that he does not schedule his meetings during Christmas time and other months when Swedes are usually on holiday. He ensures that he observes punctuality in meetings.

He explained that in Sweden, lateness is interpreted very negatively and if it happens, it mirrors very badly on a person. When he plans for meetings, he too has to clearly stipulate the agendas for the meeting. In his presentations, he ensures that he enormously focuses on detail and prepares presentations with precise, supporting and appropriate data. This is because Swedes like detailed information. Swedes seldom make decisions during first meetings and as such, he never expects much from first meetings.

We will write a custom Essay on A Comparison between Swedish and Australian Culture specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Whenever he communicates, he ensures that he is sure of his words. When selling his goods, he always tries to moderate the use of stress or superlatives as it is not common for Swedes to be adamant during a dialogue. Failure to hold to this could result to his business being regarded as insincere. When negotiating, he ensures that he remains calm, restricted and does not show any sentiments as this could be taken negatively. When addressing others, he always uses people’s surnames of professional titles.

When out on his business dealings, he ensures that he gives others their personal space and restrains from contacting them physically. During weekends, he normally went out to party with his friends. Most of his friends were from childhood as Swedes make friendships gradually, with their friendships lasting forever.

At such times, they take fish, wild meat and alcoholic drinks. His friends said that his standard of living was high since Swedish inhabitants normally gauge standard of living by considering outdoor experiences, time spent with family, and instances to do things either unaccompanied or with their folks.

Interviewee’s Suggestions for Lessening the Impact of Cultural Divides

The interviewee emphasized on the need for cultural studies being incorporated into the curriculum. For business people, he said that it’s important for one to learn the culture of a country before carrying out any enterprise in the new country. He also recommended that the immigrants who come to Sweden make efforts to learn the Swedes culture as by doing so, they will fully be integrated into the country, noting that Sweden is a high trust society.

On the same note, he added that immigrants must first know that parting one’s resident country and relocating to a different country, particularly one that is culturally dissimilar, is forever going to have complicated issues that they will be required to conquer. Thus, they must be open -minded on how to handle situations and be ready to learn.

Interviewee from Australia Background information

The interviewee hailed from Sydney’s South-Western suburbs He could only converse in one language, English. He was an artist who had a sense of humor. He was also a student at Queensland University. At the University, he was in the school of nursing. On several occasions, he represented the school in cricket and rugby at national level. He was also a devout Christian who came from a family of four.

A Description of Interviewee’s Perspective on Culture

The interviewee expressed disregard to biculturalism, as practiced in his country. He argued that instead, foreign cultures should mix and blend with the mainstream culture. He felt that every Australian should be conversant with English language as their cultural identity was much Anglo-Saxon. He also felt ambivalent about calling himself an Australian because Australians are perceived to be jocular beer drinkers and square-jawed farmers.

Impact of Culture on Life Experience and Belief System

He was a Christian who fellowshipped at the Anglican Church previously called the Church of England. He highly regarded Christmas and Easter holidays. He believed in God and life after death. He also recognized the death and resurrection of Jesus Christ, God’s own son. He frequently attended and participated in church services.

Not sure if you can write a paper on A Comparison between Swedish and Australian Culture by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It is worth noting that most Australians associate themselves with churches as they act as ethical guardians, offer public worship and a variety of other community services. The interviewee explained that during lunch hours at the hospital, they were usually offered light meals.

Impact of Culture on Interviewee’s Interaction with Others

Being a nurse in Australia, the culture greatly impacted his interaction with others, especially patients. He said prior to making any clinical decision he always considers a patient’s beliefs and cultural background. For instance, when dealing with the Aborigines’, he had to identify the patient’s spokesman as he was not supposed to directly talk to the sick Aborigines (Horton, 2007).

Furthermore, if the Aborigine patient had to be referred to a different hospital, he has to organize how to ferry all the relatives of the sick patient to the hospital referred to, since Aborigines’ believe in close family ties (Bennett, 2001). He also said that culture impacts the way he conducts pain assessment.

Noting that patients come from different cultures, he said that there might be disagreement between care and cure and conflicting opinions about the role and position of nurses regarding provision of pain relief. Even in circumstances when he is completely pissed off by a patient’s behavior, he said that he always keeps this to himself. When he was not on duty, he normally listened to music or went out to party with friends, an act common with Australians (McDonald, 2002).

He had many and different kind of friends since Australians form acquaintances more rapidly, though these acquaintances are usually temporary (Kleinert


The Behavior of Wolves Term Paper college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Abstract This research paper is on the behavioral characteristics of wolves and specifically the scent marking behavior. Almost all animals in nature have their own natural behavior which is unique to them. As for the case of wolves, the scent-marking territorial behavior comes about when a wolf urinates or defecates to mark their territory.

This is done such that the outsider wolves are barred from getting into other packs that they do not belong. The scent marking behavior is also a way through which wolves detect preys as well as enemies that want to attack them. However, the territorial issues are responsible for most of the deaths of wolves because of fights between packs or enemies. All in all, the scent-marking behavior is classified as an important aspect in wolves’ behavior as it is used as a form of communication.

Introduction Wolves otherwise referred to as the grey wolves form the largest members of the Canidae family. They are descendants of a general ancestor common to all carnivores like dogs, bears and cats known as Creodont about a million years ago.

Of all the canines, grey wolves are the largest and can weigh more than 100 pounds. “The further north the wolves are found the larger they will be, with males being 20% larger than females. A wolf can grow up to 5.5 feet long and 2.5 feet tall and on the average its tail grows from 15 to 19 inches” (Mech and Boitani 185). The wolf has gray fuzz with elongated tawny-colored legs and borders and a tapered chest.

Wolves are extremely social predators existing in groups called packs. “Packs differ in sizes but on the average it has seven or less wolves depending on their population, availability of food and social factors affecting the pack. Hunting, travelling and resting is done together as a pack” (Mech and Boitani 190).

There is a highly structured hierarchy within each park. “It comprises of an alpha male and a female, a sole breeding pair, a lesser group of non-breeding adults with each having its individual position, a group of outcasts and immature wolves moving to the top” (Mech and Boitani 185).

Younger wolves might move at times to find a territory and a new mate. This paper is therefore an in-depth analysis of the naturalistic observation of wolves and more specifically their territorial nature using scent. Several experiments have been conducted to find out how wolves scent-mark their territories and if at all this scent-marking behavior is of any significance to them. These experiments conducted will act as case studies in this report so as to exactly find out how the scent-marking occurs and its importance if any.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The behavioral characteristics of wolves Just like most animals, facial expressions and body language is used by wolves as a wy of communicating with each other. communication with another. As a show of superiority the dominant ones will look at the others in the eye as a show of superiority.

As a show of submission the inferior or the minority wolves encircle the dominant wolf with their noses raised up against to it. In the packs, the use of nose, ears and mouth are very significant in conveying feelings. When they want to alert of danger, wolves normally erect their ears and open their mouth wide.

Wolves are mainly carnivores and thus feed on meat only, with their common preys being even large animals such as the deer. To hunt with ease, wolves strategize on preying the weak and sick animals. They easily target the sick, the elderly, the youthful and the less precarious species for the wolves.

They also have unique ways of defending their prey like eating very quickly to ensure that no other animal can steal the food from them. “When they have a kill, they feast on the best parts first and return later for the remains. During scarce times wolves can survive on little scraps for weeks but in abundance they can feed on an average of 5-6 hours”(Mech and Boitani 89).

On the other hand, “when left alone, they tend to eat worms, insects and berries. In summer, they feed on fish, birds and mice since all the targets have moved” (Haines 1). This is such that the indigestible parts of the prey such as bones are hid in the hairs so as to protect the wolf from injury. The allegations that wolves feed on humans have not yet been established empirically.

The scent-marking territorial behavior of wolves The most notable thing about the wolves is their territorial nature which they do not share with animals that do not belong to the pack. Wolves converse and mark their territories using scent (Peters and Mech 1). Wolves display a very unique behavior of being territorial using scent to mark these territories. “The dominant wolves and especially the alpha male are usually responsible for urinating close to the edges of the territory, on logs, rocks and stumps that are surrounded by the territory” (Peters and Mech 1).

Wolves can have an estimated home range of about 1,000 miles depending on the breed and where they inhabit. One wolf pack can take over an average of 77 square miles no wonder a number of them overlap with others. Their vast movements, coupled with their low population make it difficult for researchers to track them down for study purposes. A pack can cover 10% of the territory each day and they don’t remain idle for long.

We will write a custom Term Paper on The Behavior of Wolves specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Wolves have a territory that is regarded as the core, usually at the heart of the radius of their array or extremely close to it and half of a particular wolf pack’s time will be used up there. They feel very secure in that area and as a result they always ensure that hideouts where the mothers deliver are very near to the core.

Wolves issue alert signs by means of barking and howling. They also shun being close on one another in the same locality except when they are struggling for food which is insufficient. The fight is meant to increase their influence on that territory in addition to taking control over the food that is in the same locality.

In a study conducted by Zubiri and Macdonald on scent-marking and territorial behavior of Ethiopian wolves, it found out the wolves deposit scent marks after urinating while raising one leg then scratching the ground (Zubiri and Macdonald 356). The scent-marks were noted to be common along territories and boundaries such that an outsider wolf is able to know occupied and unoccupied areas.

At the same time, the scent marking behavior gives them the ability to sense food as well as their enemies thus taking early precautions. Previous research has shown that wolves are able to detect their prey even at a distance of about 3 kilometers. Another study conducted by Paquet indicated that the male adults of the wolves were the main scent-markers although the dormant members of the packs also played part (Paquet 1).

The most amazing thing concerning the scent-marking territorial behavior of wolves is that, it is responsible for over 90 per cent of the deaths among wolves. This happens as a result of fights that crop up due to territorial issues (Paquet 1). The occurrence of the fights is two-fold with the first cause being fights between different territories of the wolves such that the stronger or larger pack wins.

The second type is as result of attack by foreigner, for instance, a lion is able to get access to many of the wolves when they are in a pack rather than when they are a lone. As a result, some of the wolves have decided to be loners despite of their territorial behavior for fear of attacks.

Implications of the Research

The studies conducted on the scent-marking behavior shows that this is one way through which wolves communicate with each other (Haines 1). This is because, the wolves are able to know where to find its pack and also be deterred from entering a different pack. This becomes of essence when they have detected an enemy or they want to share a hunted prey. As a matter of fact, it used as a survival tool.

Limitations of the Research

In most of the studies conducted, the actual chemical found in the urine or faeces to bring about the unique scent has not been identified thus making it difficult to justify. It is also not explained as to whether the other animals other than wolves are also in a position to detect the wolves’ scents.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Behavior of Wolves by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion The behavioral characteristic of scent-marking in wolves is one important asset that the wolves have been endowed with. This is because in addition to marking their territory and acquiring preys, they are able to notice when an enemy is near thus taking early precautions. It can thus be described as a way of communication in the wolf family. It is recommended that more research is conducted on the scent-marking behavior of wolves to find out what exactly is the reason behind this unique characteristic.

Works Cited Haines, John. The Wolf Pack. 2011. Web.

Mech, David and Boitani, Luigi (2003). Wolves: Behavior, Ecology and Conservation. University of Chicago Press.

Paquet Paul. Scent-marking behavior of sympatric wolves (Canis lupus) and coyotes (C. latrans) in Riding Mountain National Park. 1991. Web.

Peters Roger and Mech David. Scent-Marking in Wolves. 1975. Web.

Zubiri Claudia and Macdonald David. Scent- marking and territorial behavior of Ethiopian wolves Canis Simensis. 2006. Web.


Critique of the artwork Secret Language II by Conrad Botes Essay (Critical Writing) college admission essay help

The work of art I have selected for this critique is the lithographic piece titled Secret Language II by Conrad Botes of South Africa. The artwork is currently hosted at the Museum of Modern Art as part of the exhibition titled Impressions from South Africa, 1965 to Now. It has been done using a combination of etching and ink illustration.

The contrast between the black and white background etched image and the blue ink illustrations makes it easy to see for the viewer to pick out the elements that the artist fixed in the piece as part of his hidden message. The red lines spreading around the background also contribute to reducing the dullness that would otherwise have been presented had the artist chosen to leave it plain. Balance has been attained by consciously ensuring that the elements on one side cover the same amount of space as those on the other.

The lithograph depicts the body of a bare-chested man with various images etched on his skin. A closer look reveals an image of a sword going through a heart, a skull smoking what appears like marijuana, the representation of a white man smoking a pipe, a skull wearing a crown of thorns, a man burning a cross and a snake among other depictions of what can be defined as evil.

It is immediately clear, that Mr. Botes was trying to show just how much evil had penetrated society and how varied its manifestation is. The knife going through a heart for instant could represent the pain of betrayal. This comes from the saying to drive a knife through the heart, which basically reflects the pain that one goes through when something unexpected has been done by someone he/she knew very well.

Snakes and skulls are generally regarded as representations of evilness in society and by having the skull smoke a roll of marijuana, the artist could be trying to send home the message that moral decadence eventually leads to death. The image of the man setting a cross on fire could be presenting the message religious persecution which was common in most societies especially in the 1960s.

Finally, the skull with a crown of thorns could have been a direct representation of the death of Jesus-from the Bible and in this instance the image could be illustrating the suffering of the righteous. From the outset, it is easy to see that the artist is a religious person, probably a Christian, because of the use of elements that can easily be interpreted by practitioner of the faith.

When I first looked at the image, I was more drawn to the image of the man and the two hands on the side of his head. It was, however, after a critical evaluation that I could see that the gist of the message that the artist wanted to communicate was hidden in the ink sketches.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The artwork has actually made me see the human being as the source of all evil in the world. This, to me, is a clever way of packaging a message as it essentially gives the artwork a certain air of mystery. I would definitely borrow some of Mr. Botes style for use in my own art and I would actually recommend this to any artist venturing into sketching and etching.

Works Cited Botes, Conrad. Secret Language II. 2005. The Museum of Modern Art, White River, South Africa. Artists’ Press. 26 January 2011


Analysis of Poet Robert Frost’s Life and Writings Research Paper custom essay help: custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Poet Robert Frost’s life and writings


Works Cited

Introduction Different people have distinctive life histories according to the works they get involved with and the achievements they are able to have during their lifetime. Robert Frost was an American poet who was born in the year 1874 and died in 1963 at the age of 89. Among the things he got involved with, he is well known for his poetic and writing works.

What was so unique about Robert Frost is that he was so realistic in depicting the aspects associated with rural life. His command of American idiomatic speech is also a concept he is remembered for to present time (Schmidt and Sorensen 2). This piece of work gives an in depth analysis of Poet Robert Frost’s life with much emphasis being given to his works especially the writings and poetry.

Poet Robert Frost’s life and writings Frost was born in California, San Francisco and spent most of his early years there. It is deemed that his writing and poetic nature could have been drawn from his father, William Prescott Frost Jr. who had a passion in journalism and also worked as an editor. Most of the works of Robert Frost revolved around the lifestyle of people in the rural areas of New England especially in the beginning of the 20th century.

Frost used the lifestyle and settings of the rural people in a creative manner and related them to the philosophical, cultural and social issues that existed at that time so as to bring in the relevance and hence inform a majority of the people. The irony that is seen is the fact that although he is known for his association and affiliation with the rural lifestyle and setting, he grew up in the city (Bloom and Zuba 106).

Before frost specialized in poetry, he was engaged in a variety of jobs including teaching but he felt that those were not in line with his talents and calling, which is poetry. He therefore sought to specialize in poetry so that he would not only earn from it but also enjoy his work and hence attain job satisfaction, an aspect that is very essential for every individual. He was however engaged in other works due to circumstances and he therefore never dealt with poetry and writing solely.

The first notable publication of frost was a poem that was featured in his high school’s magazine. The first poem to sell was however the one entitled “My Butterfly: An Elegy”. This poem was published in the New York edition Independent in 1894, November 8.

To Frost, this was a very great achievement such that he took the chance to propose marriage to his then girlfriend, Elinor Miriam White who did not agree stating that she wanted to first complete her college education. Frost then left the country to Virginia and on his return, he asked Elinor to marry him since she had already graduated and fortunately, she agreed (Anonymous par 4).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Writing was so much into Frost’s life that even when he left to take care of the farm that his grandfather bought him and his wife, he did not do away with it but ensured that he fixed it in his tight schedule. He used to write very early in the morning and compose poems.

The writings and poems that seemed just ordinary at that time later made Frost very famous. It was after the farm work he engaged in became unsuccessful that Robert decided to go back to the teaching field where he taught English subject in various schools for instance the New Hampshire’s Pinkerton Academy and New Hampshire Normal School.

Being an English teacher fostered his career as a poet as compared to farming which was completely parallel to his line of work. In his teaching career in different schools, Robert was so much concerned with poetry and all the aspects that surround it. He encouraged his students to be keen and take note of all sounds related to human voice and consider them in their writing.

Robert later left for Great Britain where he published his first poetry book in the year 1923. The book was entitled, A Boy’s Will. It was in England that frost was able to meet with many renowned people with whom they would help each other grow for instance Edward Thomas who is recognized in the poetry field among others.

In England, Frost was able to come up with most of his best works. The North of Boston is also another collection that reinforced Frost’s stand and reputation. It was after the First World War begun that Frost decided to go back to America to reinforce his career in writing.

In the year 1915, Frost set up a career in teaching, lecturing as well as writing in a farm he bought and dedicated specifically for that work. The farm is now preserved as “The Frost Place” and serves to show most of his work. It serves as a poetry conference site as well as a museum where a lot of his original writings and poems can be traced even today. This has so much contributed to his fame.

Robert spent a significant part of his life teaching especially at the Bread Loaf School of English. In the school, Frost did major developments in regard to writing and poetry and he is up to date remembered for his work. He achieved this through establishing strategic writing programs aimed at enhancing poetry in as many people as possible.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Analysis of Poet Robert Frost’s Life and Writings specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More During the 1920s, Frost was the most recognized and celebrated poet in America and his popularity grew day by day with the release of new and better collections. Some of his renowned collections include the New Hampshire published in 1923, A further Range published in 1936, Steeple Bush released in 1947 and In the Clearing which was produced in 1962 among others (Schmidt and Sorensen 4).

The works of Robert Frost made him very popular and was able to receive various awards and prizes for instance four Pulitzer prizes in relation to his poetry, an aspect that not many individuals have been able to achieve.

Today, Frost’s poems are usually assessed critically at the oxford university press in the Anthology of modern poetry. The evaluation shows that even though Frost was popular his poems have not been fully recognized and analyzed as it is expected or as compared to his fame and what he was able to do in the field of English writing and poetry.

Among the existing collections of frost at the Special Collections department of the Jones Library located in Massachusetts include photographs, correspondence, audio recordings, letters and poems, manuscripts as well as visual recordings all amounting to approximately 12,000 items excluding his papers that are located in the Archives and Special Collections at Amherst College.

Some of the poems written by frost include, “In White”: Frost’s Early Version of Design, A Boundless Moment, A Late Walk, After Apple Picking, a minor bird, a soldier, asking for rose and a patch of old snow among others (Anonymous par 7).

Although the professional life of Frost is surrounded by achievements and recognition, his personal life is not that interesting. It is a life that is characterized by grief and losses for instance his father died while he was still young and their family was not financially stable. His mother also died five years later and he was supposed to take care of the home and young sister who later died of a mental illness.

His family was not lucky either and different diseases run among them (wife and six children) and they did not live long and they suffered a lot for the time they were alive. All in all, he is deemed to be an inspiration to many including the readers of his collections.

Others who have include young as well as established musicians, writers/authors, poets and playwrights among others. Although his family life was not that good and was associated with a lot of pains and losses even of close family members, Frost was able to accomplish much in the field of writing and poetry and more so, he set programs that ensured that the field of poetry did not die off but rather grow in the people he left behind (Bloom and Zuba 105).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Analysis of Poet Robert Frost’s Life and Writings by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More When criticizing the life and works of Frost Robert, we can say that although he was full of potential and talent, he was not able to present it fully as expected. He for instance, did not appear public on many occasions in his lifetime and this made him to be termed as an unofficial poet.

His poems are also deemed to lack universal meaning since they concentrated too much on the rural life. His works also lacked seriousness in regard to the social and political problems faced by the society in his time as it was full of humor for instance when he stated that he was never serious except when he was fooling.

This has left him to be looked at by many as a regional poet who did not fully exploit his potential. Just as any aspect is linked with some benefits and drawbacks, the life and writing of Frost is also associated with some strengths and weakness but all in all, his works are still an inspiration to many and hence we can not deny the fact that he contributed significantly to the field of poetry by acting as an inspiration to many (Anonymous par 6).

Conclusion It is evident that the works of Robert Frost are unique and has hence drawn attention of a significant number of people due to their content.

To many he is a source of inspiration. Although the writings and poems have not been without critics, it is clear that they have attracted a significant readership and most of them adore his works as they draw comfort in the meaning they deduce from the work especially poetry. This is because Frost was able to incorporate almost every aspect that happens in our day to day lives more especially in the rural setting.

Works Cited Anonymous. “Robert Frost”. 1997. 26 July 2011.

Bloom Harold and Zuba Jesse. Robert Frost. USA: InfoBase Publishing, 2003. Print

Schmidt D. Gary and Sorensen Henri. Poetry for Young People: Robert Frost. New York: Sterling Publishing Company, Inc., 2008. Print


Georg Baselitz’s Orange Eater Research Paper essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Early life of Georg Baselitz

The Orange Eater

The Orange eater and the different theories in art




Introduction The field of art has been in existence since the ancient times. It provides a mechanism through which the artists express their feelings and emotions. Art encompasses a wide range of activities through which these individuals can express emotions or feelings.

This includes music, literature, paintings, and sculpture among many others. The products developed here are valued for their beauty or the information that it portrays to the viewers. The field has had certain developments over years due to the changing creative ability of the different individuals.

The modes through which individuals express their feelings have changed over the periods in different parts of the world. Some modes of expression that have had significant developments are music, painting arts, and recently, the art of movie making. Certain artistic competitions bring together different artists of a given genre with different abilities thereby creating competition. The viewers of the arts products have also developed more interest on the information depicted by a given art product rather than its aesthetic value.

These changes in the individual’s views of arts and artistic works explain the different generations of arts that have been witnessed in the recent past. Since there is a relationship between arts and the culture of a given group of people, the developments that have been registered in an area may be different from those registered in another area. One region whose art has been of interest is Germany.

Some of the generations that have been observed in the German art include Neo-Expressionism, Modern Art, Post-modern art, and inverted art. The developments that were seen in the German art can be attributed to different individual. One of the artists of the twentieth century who had significant contributions is Georg Baselitz. Others like Hans Thoma dominated the field in the nineteenth century[1].

It should be noted that paintings (or any other artworks) should portray some meaning. In doing so, they should also express some sense of morals and be in line with the legal provisions in a given region. This paper focuses on the contributions of Baselitz to the German arts. Some of his works that had significant impacts are highlighted here.

Germany also excelled in other arts apart from painting among photography[2]. The traditional arts involved manual creation of images. With the modern technology, some of these tasks could be performed by other devices. This includes computer arts, videos, and television programs. However, such applications have led to conflicting themes in the postmodern arts as the products become personal and self-critical[3].

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Early life of Georg Baselitz George Baselitz was born on January 3, 1938 in Deutschbaselitz, Germany[4]. His original name was Hans-Georg Kern, the name Baselitz would be adopted later in 1961 when he was enrolled for a Masters course at Hochschule der Kunste. His life has revolved around the field of arts, starting as a painter and developing further skills to become a trainer. He has had significant contributions in changing the course the German throughout the second half of the twentieth century to this date.

Baselitz had developed interest in artwork from his youth. He first encountered works of art in the school library (he was staying with his father and other family members in the school compound). Of more interest to him was the Expressionist impression that was depicted by the German art. Folk arts, children arts, or art of the insane[5] were the fundamental themes in much of the German arts, and these he found interesting. He began painting human portraits and still-life drawings at the early age of 14-15[6].

In 1956, he enrolled for arts studies at the Academy of Fine and Applied Art, East Berlin. This marked the beginning of his adventures in the field of arts. The instructors at the institution claimed that most of his works had negative impressions and did not depict social and political maturity. Thus, he was later expelled from the academy and left for West Berlin where he continues with his art studies.

Later on, he enrolled at the Academy of Fine Arts, West Berlin, where pursued his postgraduate studies. During this period (in 1960), he adopted the name Baselitz, a name that he derived from his hometown[7]. His career as an artist had significant developments throughout this decade. He was in the class of Professor Hann Trier and learned different theories by arts scholars. Much of his work had emotional impressions that were appealing to the viewers in some way.

By the mid-1960s, Baselitz had begun to focus on political issues. His paintings were seen to touch on transformational or revolutionary movements in the society. Towards the end of the decade, he embarked on a different approach to artwork, the inverted art, a unique generation of artwork that would be fully attributed to him.

One of his works that invoked criticism was a naked woman that had been painted upside down. Baselitz and many others in the field of arts have been in fore front to fight the negative and false images that can be derived from artistic works. He has also extended his artworks beyond painting, by involving in wood sculpture among other arts.

The Orange Eater The major developments in Baselitz’s artwork began in 1958 when he moved from East Berlin to West Berlin to continue with his study. It was at this time that he developed his first original work. His first original work was the imaginary portraits named “Uncle Bernhard.”[8]

We will write a custom Research Paper on Georg Baselitz’s Orange Eater specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In the same year, Baselitz began to work on another series “Rayski-Head,” and attended different exhibitions of Modern art New York. From the mid-1960s through the 1970s, Baselitz interacted with different people, collaborated with some of the artists, presented his works in different shows, and developed different series. Some of his works were condemned confiscated by the public officers for indecency[9].

The themes of his paintings varied from time to time and towards the end of 1970s, some of his works were abstract with fragmented pictures that did not provide initial impression. This explained the position that he took together with others regarding Neo-Expressionism (expressive paintings with recognizable subject matter). Some of the early works of Baselitz like the still-life drawings, landscape drawings or human portraits were visual rendering.

The exact image could be figured out by the viewers and the intended messages conveyed. Some of the paintings also applied allegory[10]. Images of ordinary objects were used as symbol to portray a different meaning in the social setup. However, other paintings were somehow abstract and had meanings that could not be figured out well.

The “Orange Eater” was developed in the early 1980s alongside the other series “Drinker”/ “Trinker.” Orange Eater was developed in the Neo-Expressionism movement. The series had a shift from the themes of arts that had dominated the 1970s. It had been noted that most paintings of the 1970s were mainly conceptual. The conceptualists believed that more visual sensation of paintings meant low cognitive value.[11] At this time, there was a constant cry that artists should develop paintings whose theme can be easily understood by the viewers.

As such, Baselitz and other German artists of the 1980s began to develop paintings that portrayed familiar objects. The artists expressed their emotions by using bright coloration on the objects drawn. With the re-introduction of this approach in the field of art, there was a significant change in the face of images, which could then be figured out by the viewers. However; some abstraction could still be seen in these Neo-Expressionist images.

The Orange Eater and the other series that were produced in the 1980s had both positive and negative impacts on his career. The series of the 1980s saw the artist being invited for various shows outside the European continent. He received constant invitations to present in various arts galleries in the United States.

Many artists developed interest in his works and many more sought to acquire the unique skills that were evident in him. Different training institutions sought for his aid in developing the appropriate skills required of an artist. This would determine his profession that he practices to date.

On the other hand, the development of Orange Eater in the Neo-Expressionism movement had certain negative impact that was general to the whole movement. Most of the paintings in these series portrayed images of naked human beings. This was seen by many critics as lack of morals by the artists.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Georg Baselitz’s Orange Eater by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The Orange Eater was viewed differently in different parts of the world in relation to arts generation to which it belonged. This was most likely caused by the different development pace that was observed in the field of arts in different parts of the world. Most of the artists and the scholars in Europe considered the works of this series as post-modern art. On the other hand, the series was regarded as neo-expressionist by the artists and scholars in the United States.

The Orange eater and the different theories in art It has been stated that different theories exist in the field of arts and some are still controversial to date. These theories include the modern theory, the neo-expressionism theory, the inverted art, and the postmodern theory. These theories had remarkable differences. They were also considered differently in different parts of the world.

The modern art is the theory that can be considered as initial development from the traditional approach that was used in art. The theory has different chronology in different parts, having developed as early as the nineteenth century in some parts of the world. The theory adopted a narrative format for all the works of art. Art was considered as tool to describe the feelings of an individual. The theory also held on decency in the images that were to be used to give the expressions. The visual rendering of the images was key feature in this theory.

The neo-expressionism began some time in the late 1970s following the abstraction of the paint images that were common at that time[12]. The painters ‘reasserted the creative possibilities of emotionalism, of narrative, and of historical content and of art historical references.’[13]

The images before this period were mainly abstract and their meanings could be explained. The theory advocated for clear images to be produced by the artists. It rekindled the need to paint recognizable images like those of human beings so that the viewers could gauge the artist’s intent.

It was widely spreads by the media promotion and marketing by the dealers in galleries.[14] However, the use of naked human beings in some paintings discredited this art theory. The theory was also seen to discriminate against females as most of the exhibitions carried during its period mainly male painters. In fact, there are certain exhibitions that involved no female painters at al. the theory prevailed in the field of arts in the 1970s and the 1980s.

More criticisms led to adoption of other theories, some of which had been in existence before. The inverted art theory is purely attributed to Georg Baselitz following an image that he painted of a woman in an upside-down position.[15] However, the theory is of little use in the field of arts.

The theory of post-modernism came as a development of the modern art.[16] Just as the theory of the modern art, this theory was adopted at different times in different parts of the world. It was evident as early as 1940s in the United States[17] and in the late 1960s in the European countries. In the US, this period designated the completion of another cycle of modern art[18].

The theory contrasted the narrative path and decency of the modern art. The theory also differed from the neo-expressionism in that it had no gender issues. The Orange Eater series does not take a narrative path. It is characterized by lack of decency. Thus, the series suffice to have followed a post-modern theory of art.

Conclusions The field of arts has an endless loop of transformation due to the new ideas that emerge among the different artists. Different theoretical approaches following the different abilities pf the artists and the divergent values attached to paintings and other works of arts.

The contributions of Georg Baselitz to the field of arts cannot be underestimated. He has been depicted to have unique skills and artistic abilities that have generated different approaches to arts. His current career as a trainer in the field of arts designates the climax of his contributions to this field.

Bibliography Baselitz, Georg. Nostalgia in Istanbul-Biography. Web.

Baselitz, George. Biography, Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc. 1994-2010. Web.

Fichner-Rathus, Louis. Foundations of Art and Design. New Jersey: Cengage Brain, 2007

Honour, Hugh and Fleming, John. A world history of art. London: Laurence King Publishing, 2005

Hopkins, David. After Modern Art; 1945-2000. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2000.

Kort, Pamela. Georg Baselitz talks to Pamela Kort – ’80s Then – Interview. 2003. Web.

Lyotard, Jean-Francois. The postmodern explained: correspondence, 1982-1985. New York: Amazon, 1993.

McLachlan, Gerald. The rough guide to Germany. New York: Amazon, 2004.

Mooney, Kempton. The evolution of conceptual art in America, (FKM Books).

Neo-Expressionism. Web.

Schulte-Peevers, Andrea. Lonely Planet Germany. (Germany: Lonely Planet, 2010).

Selz, Peter. German expressionist painting. California: University of California, 1974.

Smith, Bernard. The Femalesque: a guide to modern art and its history. Australia: Palgrave Macmillan Australia, 2007.

Wilder, Joseph. Art history for dummies. Chicago: dummies, 2007.

Wilson, Brent. Art visual culture, and child /adult collaborative images: recognizing the other than. Art journal. Penn Sylvia: the Penn Sylvia State University. 2007.

Footnotes Gordon McLachlan, The rough guide to Germany (New York: Amazon, 2004), 336.

Andrea Schulte-Peevers, Lonely Planet Germany (Germany: Lonely Planet, 2010), 75

Jesse Bryant Wilder, Art history for dummies (Chicago: dummies, 2007), 372.

Georg Baselitz, Nostalgia in Istanbul, n.d, para.1

George Baselitz Biography, Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc. 1994-2010.

Baselitz, n.d, para.2

Baselitz, n.d, para.8

Baselitz, n.d, para.5

Pamela Kort, Georg Baselitz Talks to Pamela Kort- ‘80s Then- Interview (April 2003): para.5

Peter Selz, German expressionist painting (California: University of California, 1974), 153.

Kempton Mooney, The evolution of conceptual art in America (FKM Books), 3

Hugh Honour and John Fleming, A world history of art (London: Laurence King Publishing, 2005), 877.

Lois Fichner-Rathus, Foundations of Art and Design (New Jersey: Cengage Brain, 2007), 304.

Neo-Expressionism, n.d, para.1

Brent Wilson. “Art visual culture, and child /adult collaborative images: recognizing the Other than” Art journal (2007).

Jean-Francois Lyotard, The postmodern explained: correspondence, 1982-1985 (New York: Amazon, 1993), 13.

David Hopkins, After Modern Art; 1945-2000. (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2000); 12

Bernard Smith, The Femalesque: a guide to modern art and its history (Australia: Palgrave Macmillan Australia, 2007), 105.


Computer Technician Essay college essay help online

Table of Contents The profession

Source of demand


Government control and regulations

Works Cited

In capitalistic nation like the United States of America, the labor market is controlled by forces of demand and supply. When demand for a certain profession is high, then salaries and wages are expected to be high; on the other side when the demands of a certain profession is low, then wages and demand of the profession will be lower.

When a profession is paying higher than the equilibrium wage rate, then the profession is considered to be getting higher return than the expected ones (Goodwin-White, 1119). This paper discusses computer technician profession as one career that earns high returns than the equilibrium wage rate.

The profession One profession that is earning higher than the equilibrium wage rate is computer technician job; the main work of the technicians is to repairs and maintains computers hardware, software, computer accessories, and servers.

Other than the tasks started above, at high level, technicians are involved in the works of configuring new hardware, maintaining system networks, installing and updating software packages; there are different ranks and levels of the career from certificate level to doctorate level. Wages and salaries from the profession depend with ones level of education.

Source of demand The main source of demand for computer technicians comes from corporate and individual customers who have adopted current technologies in computers. There is an increased use of computer for various activities; the computers, both hardware and software need to be maintained and managed; this is the role of the technicians.

The demand and increased use of computers means that there will be an increased demand for technicians and their service; other than the increase in demand, there is a fast upgrading of computer systems calling for people to need the demand of technicians. To tap the increasing market, technicians use different methods; they include formal employment, freelance computer technicians and businesses.

When employed, their wages is relatively high compared to wage of other people in different professions. On the other hand, when they are operating personal businesses and as freelancers, they get an increased demand for their services, thus increasing their returns (Goodwin-White, 1119).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Supply The demand of technicians is expected to be fulfilled by young people graduating from colleges and universities. However, the arte at which students are taking computer science as their course is not as high as the demand for the course. On the other hand, it is considered as one of the courses that require high college entry marks thus it limits the number of students that engage and take the course this further reduces the supply of professionals.

Another thing that has affected the supply of the labor is increased movement of trained profession to other nations where they go to get better chances in life; the outflow makes the United State market suffer a deficit (Sobel and Stroup 23).

Government control and regulations Although the United States regulates wages and salaries in the economy, it does not set the highest limit that someone should get as his or her salary. On the other hand, there is no central body of technicians that can control the prices they should charge for their services. The lack of control leaves demand and supply to be the only determinant of price in the market; the capitalistic nature of the market works for the good of the profession.

Works Cited Goodwin-White, John. “Emerging Contexts of Second-Generation Labour Markets in the United States”. Journal of Ethnic


Social Media and Interpersonal Relationships Essay online essay help: online essay help

The social media has become popular with the number of the social networks increasing drastically. The developers of the social networks like Face book, MySpace, and Twitter, among others, have been competing so as to offer excellent features.

This can be categorised in terms of privacy, interaction, socialization as well as entertainment. Through the use of wide range of communication platform, the sites can be accessed from laptops, mobile phones, iPhones, and iPads. This has made it easy for people to interact freely anytime given that they have internet connections.

The social media has made it easy for people to communicate without need for face to face interactions. However, the concern has been whether social media is eradicating the essence of interpersonal relationship. Interpersonal relationships involve the association between people for a long period, where the association is based emotional feelings, social commitments as well as regular interactions.

The relationships can occur in different situations, such as friends, clubs, acquaintances, family, workplaces, and churches among others. The difference between the two is that interpersonal relations are determined and regulated by society, law and customs that are shared. Social media has both the negative and positive impacts to individuals’ relationships that affect daily activities.

The social media has both negative and positive impacts on relationships. However, the social media is expected to have more positive than negative impacts because of lowered constraints of traditional communication (Anderson, 1). This has made it possible for people to connect more rapidly with more zeal and zest. According to Jain (1) the social media enables people connect easily with many other people from different parts of life far more than the people we meet in the street.

This is true because people share what they have in common and they make a relation out of it. However, this is degrading the traditional ways in which relationships were initiated and accomplished. But the social media has that ability of bringing people from different social and cultural backgrounds more easily than the traditional mode of communication. Therefore, social media can help one meet many friends than they could ever meet in their life thus enriching their relationships.

Introverts have the chance of strengthening their relations through the social media. Relations in the workplace can be strengthened through the social media and it has been made easy for employees to exchange ideas (Conlin and MacMillan 1). Through the social media brands can be enriched through the wider range of friends and followers. However, it also ruins the relationships in the workplace and reduces productivity. This is because a lot of time is spent and hate and hatred can be spread over through social networks.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In a negative way, social media is ruining some of the relationships based on the comments made by other people. For instance, intimate relationships can ruined because of some post like in face book or twitter. Meraji (1) note that some posts made on face book or tweets made can lead to resentment that generates hate and hatred.

This can ruin closer relationship because of some comments made on your wall. Some forgotten relationships can no longer be forgotten and escaped if one is using the social media. This is because it has become a platform where everybody meets and friends of friends are on it. Social media can be detrimental to relationships because of the negativity it may arouse. For example, negative or moody response can affect the real time relationships.

Social media and the internet are robbing off people the time that can be used in a more constructive and intimate face to face communication (Anderson 2). This is because most of the friends in the social media use fake names, give wrong information about themselves, and even create the aspect of intolerance and impatient. This harms the real relations more and it is happening in the real world.

The communication that creates the feeling of remorse when wrong is done, is not present in the social media relationships. Social media interactions can now strengthen far away relationships. This is because the people can easily communicate and according to Anderson (2) geographical distance is no longer a hindrance to relationship. This has made some of the relations blossom

It can be concluded that social media has both positive and negative effects on relationships. The mode in which they are necessitated consumes a lot of people time that could have been applied in a more face to face communication. This has endangered the traditional mode of communication and can be detrimental to relationships.

However, it has made it possible to enhance the communication and keep long distanced relationships in check. It has also made it easy for people to interact more easily and one can make friends online rapidly than it can occur in real life. Contrary, the social media can break relationships and create aspects like intolerance and impatient. It is believed that social media would be having more positive impacts on relationships as time goes on.

Works Cited Anderson, Jenna. Q. “The Future of Social Relations”. Pew Research Center’s Internet


Organizational Communication Term Paper essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Introduction

Communication networks

Communication channels in organizations

Barriers to communication


Reference List

Introduction Communication, either formal or informal is the most important tool in all businesses and other related organization. It is of great essence to take into consideration the actual act of communication when studying the hierarchies, channels and processes associable with communication.

It is thus important to take into consideration that communication is human, and thus it comes with all the flaws and strengths of humanity. Organizations are especially held together by cooperation that is strengthened by communication. In such kinds of relationships and networks, information is a key aspect of the network.

This is where communication gets its strength from since there is normally demand for properly relayed information between and among relevant parties. Information exchange, a key aspect of operational efficiency in organizations is thus highly valued by organizations to the extent that organizations devise ways of making their communications effective.

Good business communication skills both with fellow staff members and with customers are important for business prosperity. The success of a business is identified by the achievements of the business which depends on the relationship between the business stakeholders and can be achieved effectively through quality of communication (May and Mumby, 2005, p. 234).

Communication enables a business to address its market availability in identifying and analyzing its competitive position in the market. It is only through communication that a business can establish its performance in the market from which it can realize and determine new and effective marketing strategies. This paper looks at the different channels and ways of communicating in business organizations as well as showing the importance of maintaining good communication skills in a business set up.

Communication networks Communication networks are patterns through which information flows in an organization. Communication networks have been groups into two major divisions, centralized and decentralized networks. There are three centralized networks which are: The wheel network where information must be passed through a central figure in the organization that is considered to be at the centre of the wheel. An organization practicing wheel network for communication can be said to be an autocratic organization.

The second network is the Y network. In this network, one of the members belonging to the network eventually becomes the epicenter of the network. Lastly, there is the Chain network. In this network, there is minimal control between members of the same network. An example of an organization in which this kind of network can be found is the military. Generally, this network is used in institutions where the flow of communication is top-bottom.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The second division which is the decentralized division consists of two networks namely:

Star network which represents the usual basic patterns of communication in most organizations.

Circle network which is a little similar to the star network where each member can communicate with another from both sides of the organization (Redding 1985, p. 465).

Some basic differences between the decentralized and centralized networks depend on the performance and group morals of the networks. Centralized networks are mainly used efficiently in the simple tasks since its efficiency is much more in these tasks. On the other hand, the decentralized network is much more efficient in speed and accuracy in complex tasks. Decentralized networks normally promote higher levels of morals than their centralized counterparts.

Communication channels in organizations Communication channels are means of through which information is passes within and between organizations. The most common channels of communication among organizations include;

Formal communication which employs the use of hierarchy in an organization to pass over information. Thus, information is passed from the top organization directives to the bottom. This then means that subordinates receive information relating to the organization such as policy changes form their immediate supervisors. Similarly, for low level management to pass formal information to the top of the management, it has to go through the middle level management and up to the top superiors (Cheney et al 2004, p. 198). Formal channels of communication can therefore be divided further into the following sub-divisions:

Downward formal movement which involves passing information from the top management down to the bottom. This channels ensure passage of information verbally which is much efficient than non verbal methods. However, there is possibility of information delays due to the long channels involved.

Upward formal communicating which involves passage of feedback to the top management from the subordinate staff. This channel uses tools such as reports and may not be effective due to possible lack of disclosure.

Horizontal formal communication channel defines communication between organization members who have same hierarchical status. It is very significant in passing information within departments.

Informal channel of communication which entails communication within an organization but not in the hierarchical manner. In this channel, any member of an organization can communicate directly with another regardless of their hierarchy. Informal communication channels are advantageous in accelerating the speed at which information is passed. However, its misuse may challenge the management organization.

Unofficial communication channel is defined by spread of rumors and gossip within an organization. This channel mostly involves only peers of an organization and thus not everyone gets involved (Hekmat 2005, p. 1).

Barriers to communication Whether or not barriers exist in communication depends on the characters of the communicating parties. The beliefs and values that shape people’s character and that come from their nature therefore become the source of the key barriers to communication between people. For instance, people tend to defend their dignity during conversations, and thus this may become a great barrier to communication. It however depends with an individual.

This is because the need for a given defense, be it self-esteem or otherwise, may arise as a conversation continues or a person may have a long-term issues. For instance, a person may have the view that he/she is somehow inadequate, he/she may raise some defenses verbally to cover up for those inadequacies.

“Employees, for example, whose egos cannot tolerate criticism, will simply not share information that exposes them to personal critique”. (Redding 1985, p. 47). This lack of self-confident causes such people to hold back from giving personal opinions such as suggestions or even unable to take initiatives with the fear of failing.

Such people will not be able to communicate effectively in any business set up especially if they end up holding managerial roles. They tend to communicate in ways that do not provoke questions or any verbal directives which sometimes may not be as effective as face to face communication.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Organizational Communication specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More A close factor to lack of self-confidence is the lack of defensiveness where one is unable to communicate or pass certain information because of the outcome that may be associated with it. For instance, middle or low level employees may hold back information due to the fear that such information may bring some complications or other problems such as questionable vocabulary and employee vulnerability. However, an organization may face serious consequences because of that piece of information that was held back (Carpenter 1998, p. 1).

For effective passage of information within and among organizations, members should learn ways in they can act against such barriers in order to promote openness and honesty, both of which are significant tools of communicating effectively. However, for employees to be open especially with their superiors, the management also needs to create an environment which makes the employee confortable and able to share views and opinions.

Physical barriers may as well interfere with effective communication where some areas have restrictive rules which do not allow certain groups of people to enter. Physical separation of working areas also hinders communication between the staff members.

Cultural barriers have continued to prevent effective communication within organizations especially where team members have different cultural backgrounds. Due to the different perceptions of life associated with many of the cultural groups, such team members may have different interests which would drift them much far apart and lead to lack of open communication.

Language barriers are similarly one of the greatest barriers to effective communication because in order for a group of people to communicate effectively, there must be understanding which comes along with familiarity of the language being used.

For instance, in a business set up, the only way that the business can achieve marketing success is by using a language that is familiar with the market being targeted during promotions and advertisements (Carpenter 1998, p. 1).

Despite much efforts to promote gender equality, there has been great barriers to communication as a result of gender identification where in most cases, women feel less obliged to give their views and expressions, a position that is traditionally viewed as a man’s responsibility only.

Conclusion Effective communication in business organizations is very important as it helps create a favorable environment which is significant in promoting employee performance. It allows all stakeholders to take part in decision making which is equally important in growth of a business.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Organizational Communication by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More However, open communication in businesses does not entirely lie on the management efforts to involve employees in participation of business maters but also calls for the members’ confidence from a personal level. An open communication channel requires courage as there is the need to communicate directly/verbally in order to pass information in a much more effective way rather than communicating indirectly through reports and the like.

This is because verbal communication gives room for immediate feedback through questioning. “This is because open communicators have to articulate their positions in meetings, public arenas, and in print, they must be secure individuals, confident in their own positions, ability, and authority” (Carpenter 1998, p. 1).

Despite the fact that open communication may create certain demands especially on the employees, the rewords associated with it is far much greater to both the employees and the organization. Similarly, honesty helps create an environment where everyone feels part of the organization through honest passage of information and this is basically what leads to the success of the organization.

Reference List Carpenter, M. (1998). Communication barriers. Retrieved from

Cheney, G. et al., (2004). Organizational communication in an age of globalization: Issues, reflections, practices. Long grove, IL Waveland press.

Hekmat, S. (2005). Communication networks. Retrieved from

May, S and Mumby, D. (2005). Engaging organizational communication theory and research. Thousand oaks, CA: sage.

Redding, C. (1985). Stumbling toward identity: the emergence of organizational communication as a field of study. Mcphee and Tompkins, organizational communication: traditional themes and new directions. Thousand oaks’, CA: sage.


Computer Technician Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

Table of Contents The profession

Source of demand


Government control and regulations

Works Cited

In capitalistic nation like the United States of America, the labor market is controlled by forces of demand and supply. When demand for a certain profession is high, then salaries and wages are expected to be high; on the other side when the demands of a certain profession is low, then wages and demand of the profession will be lower.

When a profession is paying higher than the equilibrium wage rate, then the profession is considered to be getting higher return than the expected ones (Goodwin-White, 1119). This paper discusses computer technician profession as one career that earns high returns than the equilibrium wage rate.

The profession One profession that is earning higher than the equilibrium wage rate is computer technician job; the main work of the technicians is to repairs and maintains computers hardware, software, computer accessories, and servers.

Other than the tasks started above, at high level, technicians are involved in the works of configuring new hardware, maintaining system networks, installing and updating software packages; there are different ranks and levels of the career from certificate level to doctorate level. Wages and salaries from the profession depend with ones level of education.

Source of demand The main source of demand for computer technicians comes from corporate and individual customers who have adopted current technologies in computers. There is an increased use of computer for various activities; the computers, both hardware and software need to be maintained and managed; this is the role of the technicians.

The demand and increased use of computers means that there will be an increased demand for technicians and their service; other than the increase in demand, there is a fast upgrading of computer systems calling for people to need the demand of technicians. To tap the increasing market, technicians use different methods; they include formal employment, freelance computer technicians and businesses.

When employed, their wages is relatively high compared to wage of other people in different professions. On the other hand, when they are operating personal businesses and as freelancers, they get an increased demand for their services, thus increasing their returns (Goodwin-White, 1119).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Supply The demand of technicians is expected to be fulfilled by young people graduating from colleges and universities. However, the arte at which students are taking computer science as their course is not as high as the demand for the course. On the other hand, it is considered as one of the courses that require high college entry marks thus it limits the number of students that engage and take the course this further reduces the supply of professionals.

Another thing that has affected the supply of the labor is increased movement of trained profession to other nations where they go to get better chances in life; the outflow makes the United State market suffer a deficit (Sobel and Stroup 23).

Government control and regulations Although the United States regulates wages and salaries in the economy, it does not set the highest limit that someone should get as his or her salary. On the other hand, there is no central body of technicians that can control the prices they should charge for their services. The lack of control leaves demand and supply to be the only determinant of price in the market; the capitalistic nature of the market works for the good of the profession.

Works Cited Goodwin-White, John. “Emerging Contexts of Second-Generation Labour Markets in the United States”. Journal of Ethnic


The last true story I’ll ever tell Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Table of Contents Introduction


Cultural Analysis


Introduction Most people in American society as well as the world at large perceive American soldiers as the worst kind of people in the world. What they do not understand is the fact that most, if not all, of these solders fight for the good of their country. Moreover, their seniors usually make such decisions. Naturally, cultural lives in societies seem to isolate soldiers from the rest of the world and community.

Their integration in society has been difficult with some, like Crawford, finding it even more difficult while trying to relate to other members of the society. “The last true story I’ll ever tell” is a story concerning a man who is drafted into a squad of soldiers during a period of his honeymoon and then he is sent to streets of Baghdad during the America-Iraqi war.

Crawford writes about the time he spent with his wife through tough and trying moments. In addition, he argues in his book that, in the end of a soldier’s tale, things do not quench to a normal state when he gets back from Iraqi war. Crawford lost his spouse and could not find a stable job for quite a long time after the Iraqi war. He got used to sleeping over, in his friends’ houses while looking for jobs in different areas.

The kind of life he experienced in Iraq and after was so devastating the he never wished for a repeat. This book is a true check to those who believe that people return from Iraqi war unchanged and looked down on by society for serving in a war that some soldiers did not even have a say on whether to go or not. This analysis will try to explore Crawford’s book concerning cultural values in American society.

Discussion “The last true story I’ll ever tell”

In John Crawford’s book, The Last True Story I will Ever Tell, the writer Crawford is drafted from the United States National Guard to work in the Army overseas in the Iraq emperor. The book is drafted as a set of short stories that constitute some of Crawford’s experiences in Iraq.

This book gives a clear structure for recounting an experience with little logic. It is well known that journalist tend to take a global view of situations. This book begins with a story about the invasion where Crawford’s section was caught with a few other sections in a dust storm. For instance, situations happened where they had to work at night without any visibility.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Such experiences were of great concern to Crawford’s unit. In addition, there are times when they could not identify Iraqi tanks. This was quite frustrating to him, given the outcome of such sacrifices. According to him, as indicated in the novel, United States troop were manly in Iraq to guard Bagdad and not innocent civilians.

He goes on to give a situation where in they spent most of their time protecting Iraqi gas stations. Crawford goes on to describe Iraq as a broken State given the fact that it is a third world country, which is at war with itself. Moreover, in his description of the city, he notes that it is filled with desert sand as wells sand due to deforestation and drought.

Crawford’s description of Iraq reveals the surreal illogical of the Bush government claims that Iraq was a real danger to the United States. Crawford’s chapters are gripping, making the reader develop some feelings for his experienced knowledge in Iraq. The author describes their feelings as guardsmen in Iraq, it comes out clearly that they are exhausted and bored, among other problems.

As National Guardsmen, they are recognized as second-class soldiers. This is mainly because they received a junior training as compared to other troops assigned in Iraq. They were relocated within different military groupings, making their Iraq departure time descend lightly.

According to Crawford, the enemy could not be easily identifies as militants (as was usually seen in the press) but rather as civilians since they mixed with them and sometimes using some s human shield. Crawford writes about the grudge that was directed to them. The author also perceives himself or herself as neglected with her friends.

Their time in Iraq makes them to be more desperate and harmful in the society even though they are highly honored in the society. It is quite important to note that any of the troops that step outside the United States face several threats. These range from broken friendships and marriages to heavy casualties that may include deaths, among others such as physical injuries.

This has greatly transformed peoples’ lives. The author goes on to reveal that his marriage also seems to be broken, and ties to console himself with beer from the Iraqis. This gives the book the picture of a group of reprinted stories because the details are simply too painful. In the book, some parts of the story are unknown.

We will write a custom Essay on The last true story I’ll ever tell specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In this context, his wife is seen to move away from his life, making life more difficult for Crawford. His major hopes of seeing a Penelope to be welcoming Muslims gives an indication that the two main clubs. However, the reader never finds out what happened. Finally, it is quite significant to note that United States solders make unimaginable sacrifices to save their country.

Cultural Analysis This book contributor brings to life the fear and destruction of a war zone. The poverty, disease, and crime are very apparent and painful to watch.

Any perception that the US military has changed their mind and saved Iraq will require to be re-examined once the public gets the real facts of what is happening and that people are suffering now more than ever before. Some of the games that keep these people safe are cards and video games, among others.

The United States nationalism sticks to a standpoint on public opinion by creating fear through the various media houses. They achieve its real goals with little bother for the democratic process.

The United States will perhaps leave with fewer casualties than they had in the Vietnam War, but no less domestic influence and damage to its international standing. The United States is facing within several years a historic defeat in Iraq. This defeat appears set to rebuild the Middle East for the upcoming generation. Middle Eastern governments that relied on the United States as a guarantor of their stability and continued existence will be forced to re-consider their positions and policies.

This defeat to US interests will materialize because the Bush government has promised much bigger and persistent strength to the many Islamic groups. The Islamic group view itself as the foremost part of the army of a global struggle against the dominions of evil made in a corrupt American empire. This worldview while opposing United States does so from the position of Islamic hegemony violated, of consecrated domains infiltrated and invaded by infidels.

Conclusion After reading John Crawford’s book, “The Last True Story I’ll Ever Tell”, I have come to realize that my thoughts and beliefs about the soldiers in Iraq were very different to the reality of what happens during war and the aftermath.

Cultural life in the society seems to isolate soldiers from the rest of the world. Their integration in society has been difficult with some, like Crawford finding it even more difficult while trying to relate to other members of the society.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The last true story I’ll ever tell by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More I used to think that soldiers going into the war voluntarily or because of the draft had the soldiers thinking, this is a tough job, but you have to do it for your country. Soldiers must go through harsh conditions and hostile situations with the thoughts in the back of their heads thinking that all they want is just to go home and share with their families.

The conditions described in this book have shown that as hard as it is to be in Iraq, the aftermath for soldiers can be potentially worse. The book tells the stories of some things that someone may picture the United States Army doing, the good, and the bad. It gives you more of an inside look at what the regular U.S. soldier feels like during the war, even up to the point when he gets discharged.


Concept of the Learning and Learning Theories in Education Report custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Types of learning theories

Social learning theory

Personal insight



Introduction Learning is defined as a process through which a person acquires knowledge or skills arising from experience, practice, study or instruction. It can also be defined as a process through which a person’s behavioral tendencies undergo modification as a result of experience and exposure (Bandura, 1977).

Training is defined as acquisition of competencies, skills, knowledge and competencies through teaching of vocational or practical skills and knowledge that have relationships with specific competencies (Illeris, 2004). Examples of learning

First year in a new job

First year in a college

Computer programs used to instruct users how to perform a certain task

Some of the synonyms of learning include; Literacy, education, scholarship, knowledge, erudition. On the other hand, some of the antonyms include; ignorance, illiteracy.

Types of learning theories There are a number of learning theories. They include: Reinforcement Theory, Social Learning Theory, Goal Setting Theory, Needs Theory, Adult Learning Theory and Information Processing Theory (Ileris, 2001). Learning theories help in identifying the suitable learning methods according to circumstances (Marzano, 1991). It also helps in identification of the appropriate language to be used in learning.

Social learning theory Social learning theory is a significantly important theory invented by Albert Bandura in the learning and growth sector. Bandura observed that people can learn new behaviors and information through watching how other people behave and do things. Social learning theory is hinged on three concepts namely. Second, is the fact that internally defined mental states are basically part of this learning process. Lastly, recognition of the fact change will necessarily occur because something has been learned.

Usually workers in an organization observe how their colleagues perform certain tasks. Consequently they get to know how certain tasks are performed. For example newly recruited and inexperienced workers in Coca Coca company in USA observed how their colleagues went about mixing several ingredients in making beverages.Eventually,they got to know how to mix several ingredients in order to make the required product. This theory would generate the same results if a survey was carried out in a similar company

Personal insight Learning can be both formal and informal. In addition learning is a continuous process and therefore one keeps on learning every minute. This brings about development. There exists a great relationship between learning and development. Through learning one gets acquires new ideas, knows new habits, skills which together bring about change. People get to know new technologies through learning.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Conclusion Learning is the key thing in a person’s development and therefore massive investments should be made towards this end. Organizations should realize that the only way to remain successful is by ensuring workers keep on learning new skills and new ways of doing things.

References Bandura, A. (1977). Social learning theory. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall.

Illeris, K. (2004). The three dimensions of learning (Reprint English ed.). Malabar, Fla.: Krieger Pub. Co.

Ileris, K. (2001). Transformative Learning in the Perspective of a Comprehensive Learning Theory. Journal of Transformative Education, 2, 79-89.

Marzano, R. (1991). Fostering thinking across the curriculum through knowledge restructuring. Journal of Reading, 34, 518–525.


Internal Controls Essay essay help: essay help

Introduction Chorafas (2001) notes “Internal Control is a dynamic system covering all types of risk, addressing fraud, assuring transparency, and making possible reliable financial reporting. Beyond risks, internal control goals are the preservation of assets, account reconciliation, and compliance.”

Limitations of ABC Co.’s Internal Control System

The internal control system is designed to identify and avert fraud, material misstatements and errors and omissions. However it can only offer reasonable guarantee that there isn’t material misstatement in the financial statements.

No internal control system, however elaborate, can be by itself guarantee efficient administration and completeness and accuracy of the records nor can it be proof against fraudulent collusion, especially on the part of those holding positions of authority and trust. This is mainly due to the following inherent limitations of an internal control system:

(a) Management has to ensure that the benefits expected from an internal control system outweigh the costs. As a result certain important controls might not be put in place due to the costs involved. E.g. a small entity might not have the resources to employ sufficient staff to ensure proper segregation of duties. (Spencer


Women’s movements in 19th Century Essay essay help

In Britain and across the globe, the contemporary woman may not have gained full autonomy as well as the liberty to enjoy equal rights as men in society. Nonetheless, it is evident that considerable success has been achieved to liberate women from eminent suppression by patriarchal based ideologies. In spite of this minimal yet significant level of achievement, the modern-day woman might take for granted the fact that she has broad choice in terms of personal career development, education, political and economic decisions.

On the same note, it is imperative to underscore the fact that the scenario would have been quite different especially if the 19th century women in Britain would not have aggressively campaigned against suppression by men. To date, there are limited cases where women representation in society is still inhibited by male chauvinistic ideas. For instance, women can vie for political positions without fear of male domination.

This was not the case three centuries ago when women could not make some of the most basic choices like when and who get married to, or perhaps how many children to have in a marital set up. In any case, most sensitive decisions were made on their behalf by men. This paper offers an incisive look into the cultural and political significance of the emergence of a women’s movement in Britain in 19th century.

To begin with, the 19th century women’s movements in Britain emerged owing to deplorable conditions which women went through in society. Feminist ideas had been conceived way back in 17th century as evident from the works of Wollstonecraft’ in 1792 (Vindication) although active women’s movements began in earnest sometimes in mid-19th century (Alexander, 1994, p. 52).

Although Wollstonecraft’s works received a major setback bearing in mind that it was banned from every household, it later gained popularity and fame from late 19th century when it was revived following rapid emergence of new dimensions and ideologies of feminism. Moreover, the rising radicalism towards women’s rights beyond Britain which had been heightened by French Revolution had created fear among British men. This accelerated their reluctance to extend certain rights and powers to women (Alexander, 1994, p. 53).

In order to understand the significance and necessity of the 19th century women movements in shaping present day cultural role of women, it is important to shed light on the social, cultural and legal status that women in Victorian England had to endure in their day to day life. First and foremost, it was a permitted cultural practice for women to obey men without question. Right from birth, a woman had no freedom to make major any decision either when under parental care or married (Hall, 1994, p. 112).

The underlying reason behind this unquestionable obedience was largely due to the fact that culturally, men owned and took charge of all forms of resources and therefore, women were not supposed to rebel. As a matter of fact, women lacked financial mobility that could be used to initiate major cultural changes (Hall, 1994, pp. 112- 114).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Furthermore, singlehood attracted pity and disapproval from society (Hall, 1992, p. 92). The fact that the number of men greatly outnumbered that of women did not make the situation any better since women were in constant competition for the inadequate number of available men in order it conform to societal norms and expectations.

On the other hand, those who failed to secure life partners were forced to emigrate because they were considered less desirable in society (Hall, 1992, pp. 86-94).The institution of marriage was not the type one could reckon with. For instance, immediately after being married, any material possession that a woman owned (and which was rare in this case) automatically belonged to the husband.

This was applicable to all her incomes from various sources (Hall, 1994, p. 116). Interestingly, it is imperative to note that even those who remained unmarried were under direction and guideline of male characters in the household such as male siblings and father since the law did not perceive women as legal beings capable of existing independent of men’s guidance (Hall, 1992, p. 96). Needless to say, the institution of marriage during this era had no close resemblance to what is witnessed in present-day marriages.

Hall (1992, p. 96) explains that being a woman during this time was like a curse since the male ruled society extended oppression from all perspectives, right from the family settings to corridors of law. Once married, a woman was condemned to put up with any kind of mistreatment. Legally, domestic violence, which is illegal in most countries today, was the norm since husbands were allowed to beat their wives though with caution (Hall, 1994, p. 102).

However, this was not observed because the same law prohibited married women from filing such petitions in courts of law (Rendall, 1985, p. 118). Likewise, the law allowed husbands full custodial rights of children in case of separation or divorce. This was not practical at all in spite of it being legally documented (Rendall, 1985, p. 221).

On the contrary, a woman was not legalized to file for divorce under any circumstance but a man could prosecute his wife and upon conviction, she would face dire consequences (Hall, 1992, p. 102). The gravity of the matter lies in the argument that a married woman had not rights even to her own body. The legal vows before marriage required a woman to pass over the rights to access her body to the husband.

Therefore, a woman was not supposed to complain even if her husband used force to obtain the conjugal rights (Rendall, 1985, p. 224). Similarly, a man would decide on the number of children that his wife was supposed to bear, and even then, he had exclusive rights to the children. There were situations when a man would send children to be raised elsewhere without the consent of the woman.

We will write a custom Essay on Women’s movements in 19th Century specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Moreover, women had no place in politics and were not allowed to participate in any sort of political movement during this time period (Hall, 1994, p.118). The rationale behind this male crafted perception was that women were overly incapable of taking part in active politics due to their biological makeup alongside other male chauvinistic ideologies (Hall, 1992, p.93).

From the perspective of biological makeup, men asserted that the process of childbearing consumed a lot of time which seemingly made it impossible for them to attend political meetings on a regular basis. It is crucial to note that the role of women was limited to home duties, which meant a woman’s political participation ought to be confined behind the walls of her home (Hall, 1992, p.78).

Nevertheless, they played significant role of educating their children on various present day political issues in an addition to guiding their sons on how to make best decisions and choices before casting their votes (Hall, 1992, p.78).

Besides societal view, religion also had a role to play in suppressing active participation of women in politics. As a matter of fact, Rendall (1985, p. 221) asserts that religious beliefs that were being taught during that time were orchestrated by the same men who were responsible for making women voiceless. According to Alexander (1994, p. 52), religious instructions forbid women from acting in public.

On the contrary, women were supposed to be meek and obedient to males in society who were regarded to be intellectuals. Despite these setbacks, women defied all odds and gradually started to participate in antislavery campaign.

As exemplified above, the 19th century Britain society dominated by men perceived women as lesser human beings. To a larger extent, women were sidelined from mainstream political and cultural pursuits. It is against this background that various women’s movements emerged to challenge the patriarchal doctrine in order to secure equal rights in social, political, education, legal and employment dimensions.

At first, this was not an easy task since they had to go through myriad of challenges. Needless to say, the present-day recognition of women’s rights and freedom in society owes its success to the women’s movements that were coined during the 19th century.

On a lighter note though, it is vital to underscore the fact that although industrial revolution brought about economic transition, it failed to eliminate or modify socio-political and cultural sufferings that women were going through. The fact that workplace was distinct from home setting further deteriorated the situation because women joggled between job and childcare, not mentioning meager wages that they were earning (Rendall, 1985, p. 222).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Women’s movements in 19th Century by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Therefore, change was inevitable as various brave women angered by continued oppression began to lobby for equal rights as men. At first, some women like Caroline Norton steered the cause single handedly. Although change came in slowly, these early initiatives paved way for organized women movements (Rendall, 1985, p. 224).

As already mentioned, the custodial right of children in any marriage was the sole mandate of husbands. However, Caroline Norton could not stand what she perceived to be unjustified ruling of the court after she divorced with her husband. The latter action barred her from contacting her children (Rendall, 1985, p. 226).

Nonetheless, her relentless effort to regain custody of her children was never fruitful. She was assisted by her barrister friend in circulating pamphlets to question the custodial rights of a mother, a move which generated great deal of public debate (Alexander, 1994, p. 84).

Despite the hostility that her actions attracted from the conservative press, an infant’s custody act was finally enacted in 1839 which transferred custodial rights of children under the age of seven to the mother (Rendall, 1985, p. 204). Although, it might appear insignificant in comparison to present-day law on custodial rights, Caroline’s achievement was a major milestone towards the tough journey in women liberation.

Similarly, society condemned any active participation of women in matters of public interest. It is interesting to note that although men considered women to be physically weak, their morals were expected to be superior (Rendall, 1985, p. 208). In addition, the issue of morality was cited by men as part and parcel of discouraging women from taking part in active politics since the latter was considered to be immoral.

Therefore, the role of women was confined within household level where she was expected to serve her husband diligently (Hall, 1992, p.88). All the same, the ideology behind the promotion of women as the source of superior moral was a blessing in disguise (Alexander, 1994, p. 55).

Indeed, women’s movements towards the end of 19th century placed emphasis on superior moral qualities to demand for favorable treatment of women in employment and education (Alexander, 1994, p. 52). Most importantly, the role of the 19th century women’s movements was visible in securing equal opportunity as men especially on political representation when it came to voting (Rendall, 1985, p. 211).

The movement commonly referred as woman suffrage movement gathered pace in the late 19th century to challenge the male doctrine that denied women from voting. The significance of this historical achievement cannot be overemphasized bearing in mind that modern-day woman is liberal enough to exercise voting rights.

In conclusion, it is evident that the uncontrolled rights and freedom that most contemporary women are benefiting from were not visible some three centuries ago. The fact that the 21st century woman can be treated with equity on matters related to employment, education, marriage, and politics is indeed a great milestone to reckon with.

Culturally, the 19th century women’s movements ushered in a new era of recognition of women as equally important beings that deserved to be treated with dignity. Politically, voting rights as well as political representation by women became a reality following these movements.

References Alexander, S. 1994. Becoming a Woman: and Other Essays in 19th and 20th Century Feminist History. London: Virago Press.

Hall, C. 1994. Family Fortunes: Men and Women of the English Middle Class 1780- 1850. London: Routledge.

Hall. C. 1992. White, Male and Middle Class: Explorations in Feminism and History. Cambridge: Polity Press.

Rendall , J. 1985. The Origins of Modern Feminism. London: Macmillan.


Breaking the Color Line Bar Essay (Critical Writing) college admission essay help

The article by Henry Fetter explains the efforts in overcoming segregation that had persistent in Major League baseball. Henry explains that the Communist Party and the Daily Worker, which was the party’s newspaper, do not merit all the accreditation given to them regarding their contributions towards ending discrimination against Negroes in the Major League baseball. Instead, he argues that the breakthrough came as a result of Branch Rickey’s own initiatives as well as Jackie Robinson’s outstanding courage.

Henry’s assertion is to show that the integration of American Whites and Blacks in the Major League baseball was not influenced by pressure from or activities of the Communist Party, but rather from social and political forces which had more clout than itself. “One would look in vain, however, for any such tribute to the Party or the Worker in other early accounts of the chain of events leading up to the integration of Major League Baseball.”

This paper will highlight some of Henrys examples of other powerful forces other than The Party together with its paper The Worker in breaking of the race barriers in baseball.

Henry debates that the major participants within this debate are Branch Rickey, Dodger President and General Manager, and Jackie Robinson, the talented baseball player, and should be accredited for the breakthrough, and not the Communist Party. Henry posits that that these accreditations are out of the Communist Party’s self praise and not out real campaigns against segregation in organized baseball.

In his defense to his argument, Henry further debates that even Robison, who The Party claims to have fought for to break into the Major League, did not recognize their efforts anywhere for having played any role in the breakthrough, and at one time distanced himself from the comments made by Paul Robeson, a communist, saying he did not speak on behalf of Black Americans.

He argues that the Communist Party and its newspaper, the Daily Worker did not adopt realistic initiatives in fighting discrimination against Blacks. Instead, they presented a radical perspective and unrealistic approaches which could not help end segregation.

Rickey had taken a more realistic approach that understood the challenges that would be faced in the initial stages of integration between Black and White players. He came up with a meaningful approach for the integration process, while on the other hand, the Communist Party only made criticisms to make them synonymous with the public.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Henry explains that other newspapers such as “The Times” contributed more towards breaking the color bar as compared to what the Daily Worker did. According to him, while most newspapers which had wider coverage focused on Rickey-Robinson challenges, the Daily Worker denied any such challenges and pretended that the situation was ideal.

This is because, as Henry’s asserts, The Worker avoided mention of any other force (it only wanted to credit itself) that heavily influenced the breaking of the racial barrier lines. Their main aim was to convince the public that their ideals were not failing in order to gain the public trust. This means that the Daily Worker did not present the real troubles that Rickey and Robinson met while trying to overcome those challenges, but instead, denied.

Henry also believes that the Communist Party’s activities and self-proclaimed efforts were just part of the party’s public relations to gain political clout because their newspaper changed its course when Robinson did not identify with Robeson’s communist view. On the contrary, the newspaper began to present views supposed to support Yankees over Dodgers despite the former having refused to include Negroes in the team for more than a decade.

The strength of the article lies in its ability to present the grounds for the Communist Party and the Daily Worker’s claims on its roles in integration, and then provide criticism to their role by comparing it to that of other organizations including other newspapers. It carefully presents the activities and initiatives adopted by the Communist Party and their degree of impacts to changing the system and the attitudes that were held by many people during that time.

The article also presents the weaknesses of the party as well as its inconsistency to prove that the Communist Party did not create any significant influence, and that it only organized its activities to sell the policies and ideologies of the communist society. The article’s strength also lies on its concrete proof of the writer’s perspective. The article incorporates knowledge from various texts, reports and speeches of other people to prove his facts.

Its weakness lies in its inability to clearly present its purpose. The article does not state the reason as to why it was written and it actually needed to accomplish. However, from Henry’s assertions, the article main purpose was to portray the party and its newspaper the worker as two selfish forces who didn’t want to acknowledge efforts by other s in breaking racial barriers in the sport.

To support this assertion, Henry presents other credible example of forces whose tireless efforts bore fruit. In addition, the article does not mention other political parties which played major roles in overcoming segregation in the Major League baseball, yet it concludes by suggesting that other political forces played greater role than the Communist Party.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Breaking the Color Line Bar specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The article is really convincing. This is because in one of the writer’s defense to his thesis statement he proves that the Communist Party was not consistent in its pro-claimed fight against discrimination. This inconsistency means that the party did not have real intention for fighting segregation other than to spread its communist ideologies.

This is because much of the stories surrounding the integration of all races in the sport revolved around the combination of Rickey-Robinson’s audacity and inventiveness. Furthermore, other credible writers such as Arthur Mann only mention The Party briefly

The important question not addressed in this article is whether other Black players were integrated into baseball Major League during the period of 1947 to the early 1950s or not, and how long other teams in the Major League took to embrace the change in racial policy.

The article clearly presents a critique on the Communist Party’s claims on its contribution towards the changes of the racial policies in the Major League baseball. From the writer’s point of view, it is clearly evident that the Communist Party did not play significant role in the integration process as they have always claimed.


The United Technologies Corporation Ethics Report argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Table of Contents Introduction


Problem Statement


Conclusion and recommendations


Introduction Every industry in the commercial sector has its own ethical standard that must be complied. Ethical provisions maintain an even playing field for all the members of the commercial sector ensuring that the basic norms of exchange are obeyed. It is therefore of paramount importance to every business enterprise to ensure that it maintains a good ethics strategy and program. United Technologies Corporation therefore has an obligation to enforce and maintain a stable and effective ethics compliance program (Desjardins 2008, p 145).

Background Since its first initiative in 1929, the United Technologies Corporation has grown both in magnitude and size. It has increased its employee and consumer base to a seven multinational unit capacity that runs under a 31 billion dollar budget. This has also acted to increase the managerial and strategic concerns.

The company has employed an ethical compliance program that has been used by all member units across the globe. The ethical strategy has faced several historical and strategic challenges that have put its usefulness and relevance to the test. The defense acquisition scandals of the 1980s were a great challenge to the defense based contracts with the United States government.

The company however made it through the investigations retaining its status as the country largest defense contractor. This was however followed by the Packard commission that led to the defensive industry initiative that sought to regulate the unevenness in the ethics compliance standards.

The constant failure of industrial measures and standards led to the formulation of the first company code of ethics in 1990. This marked the beginning of the review and amendment of the broad ranging code to ensure that it complies with the relevant legal requirements (McClenahen 2003, pp 456).

Problem Statement The United Technologies Corporation is a multi unit enterprise that has a worldwide departmental collection. The management therefore faces the challenge of establishing and formulating a cross-cultural and cross-national ethical policy that will embrace all the values that are considered paramount in the various countries and cultures in which the company has offices. It also has a large conglomerate employee base of 205,700 employees who are all affected by the company’s ethical policy.

Review The effectiveness or otherwise of the United Technologies Corporation’s ethics and compliance program depends on how well it serves the interests of the various concerned stakeholders such as the customers employees suppliers shareowners competitors, the community and the outstanding standard of conduct that govern the business transactions and actions in the various jurisdictions.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The existing code of ethics cuts across these interests by providing for individualized provisions that address the responsibility of the company to all these stakeholders. The various interests have therefore been fairly covered as far as mechanism strategy and individual responsibility. The basic framework that is observed by all of the seven units allows each of the units to adjust their ethical provisions to suit the various jurisdictional provisions (Stewart 2005, p 8).

The ethics and compliance program bears specific commitment benchmarks that are applied and observed. They facilitate the transition of the ethical provisions from one business regime to another. This provides for the performance expectations and standards that are applicable and expected form the company.

It also pioneers innovation personal development and social responsibility for the benefit of the business and its proprietors. The standards for internal growth and external relations are clearly provided in the programs provisions. These form the basis of the various alternative strategies that the member units adopt in fulfilling the objects ethics. The strategy and program also provides for the expectations and principle approach that applies to the shareowner value of the company.

Conclusion and recommendations The United Technologies Corporation has successfully implemented and used the current global ethics and compliance program in its day-to-day activities. The program has suffered jurisdictional challenges that therefore needed to be addressed. The acquisition of the new unit for instance presents a new strategy challenge that needs to be addresses through the formulation of a personalized code and strategy.

References Desjardins, J. (2008). An Introduction to Business Ethic. London: McGraw-Hill Humanities Social

McClenahen, S. (2003). “UTC’s Master of Principle, Industry Week. ND

Stewart L. (2005). United Technologies Corporation: Running A Global Ethics And Compliance Program. Business Round Table Institute for Corporate Ethics

We will write a custom Report on The United Technologies Corporation Ethics specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More


Was Vancouver Riots Behavior Normal? Research Paper essay help free

Table of Contents Background information

Reasons behind considering Vancouver riots normal


Works Cited

Background information Vancouver riot was experienced during a match between the Canucks, Boston and Bruins in competition for the Stanley Cup. It was during the finals when Boston Bruins won 4-0 over the Canucks that the youths became violent, burning down buildings and vehicles and even injuring fellow human beings (CBC News).

It is not a surprise to see youngsters rioting after a match, and in the process, engaging in acts that eventually lead to regrets, History, overtime, has confirmed this to be a normal occurrence after such an incidence is experienced in various places of the globe (Stepney). This has resulted into research carried out with the sole purpose of identifying whether there could be some kind of abnormality associated with the form of behaviors that are part of the rioting that usually lead to massive losses for both property and human life.

Results conclude that this is normal as it has so many factors contributing to it such as alcohol and mob reasoning that tends to interfere with an individual’s normal reasoning.

According to CBC News many people are always left wondering how young and sound youth should engage in such actions that result into a lot of harm that costs their outstanding reputation to the public and, even in extreme cases, leading to loss of job and rejection (Smith 1).

However, considering all the possibilities that are responsible for such moves, it becomes sensible to conclude that they are quite normal occurrences that are to be expected especially in crowded areas. It is this very same reason that qualifies the Vancouver riots normal incident.

Reasons behind considering Vancouver riots normal Just like Smith (2) argues, it becomes difficult for people to reason out well once they are in a group, in such cases the limbic system is left to operate instead of the frontal lobe that is responsible for proper reasoning. At this point, the involved crowds usually act out of emotions, which can be either negative or positive. The ultimate results for the actions involved entirely depend on the kind of emotions that drive the crowd.

More often, emotional activities such as sports that entail screams, shouts and other sorts of noise, which can serve as stimuli, lead to the former part of the brain functional, thus leading into some kind of reaction such as riots. Individuals stop thinking as they should and act as groups; this is dangerous as people involve themselves into intolerable acts unlike if they are on their own.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Group brain is risky at a time because people make subliminal moves without reflecting on the consequences. As illustrated during the Vancouver riots, Nathan, young man from a well- off background, is captured by the media in the very act of burning a police vehicle and later apologizes for his own conduct (Smith1).

Such cases are often, which can lead people in committing unethical activities. The effect of group brain is that it transforms an individual. For instance, when such rioting groups are separated, they tend to reason in the appropriate manner, meaning that their frontal lobe is at work.

This gives an answer as to why the members involved during the Vancouver riots came out apologizing for their behavior as an individual (Smith 1). Smith continues to talk of dispersing people before they form groups also attempting to cause distraction that help them not to stray from their normal reasoning as measures to ensure peace during an event such as sports (Smith).

According to Davis (348), usually a crowd is a group or gathering, with no organized structure, it comprises of assembly of people in real -time with each member having an individualistic benefit. Crowds become socially united by virtue of being physically together, and as such, any happening within the vicinity can influence them to act in a very crude manner.

Crowds do not have any set goals and even have no future expectations of coming back together; this gives an explanation as to why they will always act without reason, leading to massive destructions.

Usually, no distinction can be made between individuals because they all tend to have a similar reasoning, this makes what happened at Vancouver a normal phenomenon. Influence is also another factor that can lead to violent behavior. Influence is so powerful that no one wants to be rejected by friends or feel out of place. For this reason, people comply with any type of behavior, however, unethical it is (Pendry).

According to Stepney alcohol is the leading source of behavioral variation in human beings; this is because it affects the body chemistry leading to a change for adrenaline produced. This has an impact on how the brain works. Alcohol and nutrition also have some impact on the way the prefrontal cortexes works.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Was Vancouver Riots Behavior Normal? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This part of the brain develops much later in life. Thus, owing to the fact that people actively involved in the riot were teenagers, it gives a guarantee of their limbic system at work thus leading them to make decisions and act out of emotions. The point that these youngsters were drunk and had a poor diet gives an additional confirmation that the riot was just a normal occurrence. Efforts by the police to close bars and other liquor source did not bear fruits as they had already taken it.

Apart from alcohol, passion is also a significant stakeholder in riots. This is in the sense that all individuals in the group have a team to support. The success or failure of the group support will undoubtedly lead to some kind of reaction being negative or positive. It is this combination of reactions, which can lead to brutality. In an event, of trying to support a team; one has a passion for and has invested time, money and energy.

After loss by the home team during the Vancouver event, fans were subjected into stress, which is a further trigger for emotions. True to Smith’s argument, on the maturity of the brain, the young children and grownups left the scene after they sensed some kind of threat that could result from their home team defeat thus leaving the youths behind who eventually succumbed to their emotions thus causing chaos.

In other cases, spectators trigger, or attempt to provoke fans making them crazy eventually resulting into violence (Smith 5). According to Smith, this event was quite normal. Because, the reactions that led into such actions were distinct. To them, emotions have a big role in controlling ones actions because they affect brains normal functioning thus influencing the manner in which one reasons.

Smith (4) gives fire as an important impulse that arouses emotions. This supports Vancouver riot as normal because it is just immediately after a fire outbreak that the crowds turned violent leading to more and more fire set ups, destruction of property such as breaking of buildings glass windows and a lot of looting. Fire flames are believed to cause some kind of fear and as such some kind of reactions are expected.

Vancouver riot was not the first one to be seen or heard of, there are such more incidences reported all over the globe whereby a lot of damage for both property and human life is encountered. Such riots include those encountered during the European Cup Final in 1985, 2000 South Africa- Zimbabwe match, 2000 American championship and many more. In all these riots, fans acted without reasoning just like after the Vancouver finals (Stepney).

Contrary to the above-discussed reasons is the idea that some percentage of men went to the field with the intention of causing chaos, and they were there just to start something like setting a vehicle on fire so that they induce others (Smith 4). Their aim was to create havoc in order to get a chance for looting and engage in other animalistic actions.

Conclusion It is in order to conclude that when a group of people comes together without a common goal to achieve; social crimes such as riots are likely to occur. Many factors come into play such as the above-mentioned including group brain, passion, alcohol and many more. Brains at work during such moments are not the right ones due to some kind of stimulation.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Was Vancouver Riots Behavior Normal? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Individuals do not reason out on their own while in a crowd as such, their reasoning is usually impaired resulting into unexpected actions that cause regrets at the end of the day. It is in order to claim the riots at Vancouver a normal happening because all the possible factors leading to such behavior were in place.

Works Cited CBC News. Riots Erupt in Vancouver after Canucks Loss. 2011. Web.

Davis, Kingsley. Human Society. New York, the Macmillan Company, 1933.

Pendry,Louise. Carrick, Rachael. Doing What The Mob Do: Priming Effects on Conformity. European journal of social psychology, (31), pp. 83-92

Smith, Charlie. Evolutionary Biology, the Prefrontal Cortex, and the Stanley Cup Riot in Vancouver, 2011, Web.

Stepney, Chloe. Christian Science Monitor: Vancouver Riot and 5 Other Infamous Melees in Sports History, 2011, Web.


Analysis of Art Works in De Young Museum Essay essay help free: essay help free

Albert Bierstadt, The Arch of Octavius (Roman Fish Market), 1858

The material of this artwork is oil on canvas. The artist tries to depict the peculiarities of Rome decline and inability to take everything under control. The combination of lines (horizontal, vertical, and diagonal) conveys the required feeling of movement and defines the two-dimensional shape and form of the image that were inherent to the art of the 19th century.

Texture of such shape gives an amazing visual sense of how the place looks like in real life with its ugly bricks, constant mess, and roughness. In general, the composition works through a variety of objects introduced by the painter.

Teresa Bernstein, In the Elevated, 1916.

Though the artist used oil on canvas as the main material for the work, the techniques preferred made this work different to the one of Bierstadt. The diagonal lines communicate the movement, and geometric shapes and forms prove that people are limited in their actions at the moment and have to follow the requirements set by the surroundings.

An appropriate combination of negative and positive space can make the viewer impartial to the image, still, the inability to identify the texture at the very beginning involves people into the analysis of the work. The chosen rhythm shows how it is easy to catch a moment and enjoy the beauty of life in the most unexpected places.

Edmund Charles Tarbell, Snow Scene, Plymouth, Massachusetts, 1905.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Oil on canvas is the material of the work. The artist introduces the role of winter in human life. Stability, calm, and even some kind of isolation depicted by the presence of negative white shape are the main subjects of the drawing. Horizontal lines promote the sense of space as well as the feeling of piece. The idea of unity makes the composition work and demonstrates the eternity of nature.

Willard Leroy Metcalf, Winter’s Festival, 1913.

By means of oil on canvas, Metcalf perfectly introduces winter as an integral part of human life. Nature is the main subject of the picture, and people are powerlessness to change the surroundings. Vertical lines unite earth and sky and communicate the idea of spirituality with the help of which people can reach piece, understanding, and perfection.

The chosen texture can make people feel uneasy as they cannot gain the necessary control over nature, still, the emphasis on the nature’s role shows that there is no need to strive for this kind of control in some situations.

John Henry Twachtman, Mother and Child, 1893.

Oil on canvas is the material chosen for this artwork. The artist introduces a caring mother with a child, who is too young to accept the reality as it is, this is why some kind of support from mother’s side is crucial at the moment.

Vertical lines aim at promoting spirituality to the image and defining two-dimensional shape and form by means of which people can easily identify the subjects. The chosen calm texture develops trust and comfort that come from mother’s embraces, and the properly chosen balance makes the whole composition works.

We will write a custom Essay on Analysis of Art Works in De Young Museum specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More John Singer Sargent, Trout Stream in the Tyrol, 1914.

The chosen material oil on canvas helps to introduce a moment at the river when the trout stream is mentioned by a person. The idea to use diagonal lines is evident as the artist has to underline the idea of constant movement and the necessity to hurry up in order to enjoy the beauty. Three-dimensional space in the chosen two-dimensional artwork depicts the illusion that involves the viewer into the image. Cold texture in combination with natural colors is the required unity that makes the entire painting work.

Frederick Childe Hassam, Seaweed and Surf, Appledore, at Sunset, 1912.

Oil on canvas is used by the artist in this work. The moment at the seashore with the waves smashing the stones captivates many people. Maybe, it is the horizontal lines, which suggest the required feeling of rest and piece, or it is the three-dimension space of the work with two-dimensional shape with the help of which the author uses the area, or, maybe, it is unstable surface quality that is perfectly described by the chosen texture. Anyway, the chosen balance is what can make the composition work.

Maurice Brazil Prendergast, The Holiday, 1907-1909.

The material is oil on canvas. The author introduces a number of people, who gather together to celebrate the holiday and spend the day in the best possible way. Though the chosen horizontal lines should promote the idea of rest and piece, the artist adds several vertical lines, and such combination proves that image is moving, still, all movements are peaceful and reliable.

The combination of different textures is also the sign that several ideas are united to introduce the whole life as it is. It is complicated, still, it is clear; it is overcrowded, still, it is possible to find the necessary piece; it is unpredictable, but it is charming.

Chiura Obata, Mother Earth, 1912.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Analysis of Art Works in De Young Museum by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Ink and colors on silk is the material that is used by the author to introduce the image of nature and maternity. Evident vertical lines express spirituality as the main subject of the work, and soft texture deprive the viewer of different doubts and misunderstandings. It is a wonderful chance to use a two-dimensional shape and form to interpret the idea of natural eternity and human participation in it. A unity of people and nature is the main engine that makes the life being developed and the whole drawing work.

Sergeant Kendali, Cypripedia, 1927.

Oil on canvas is the material used in the artwork. The sense of this image is to underline the unity of people with nature and the role of women in human life. Vertical lines serve as the evident spiritual aspect of the image, and the two-dimensional shape of a woman in the center in comparison to small flowers and font tress is the sign of her undisputed role as a mother and her fertile image. The emphasis of a woman is the key point of the work that impresses people.

James Abbott McNeil Whistler, The Gold Scab: Eruption in Frilthy Lucre (The Creditor), 1879.

The chosen oil on canvas material is used to create this impressive portrait with a number of caricature features. The main peculiarity is inability to identify clearly the lines. The combination of diagonal and horizontal lines proves author’s uncertainty to define the sense of the image. The texture also remains unclear.

The only definite technique is the three-dimensional space of a two-dimensional shaped work. Such choices clarify artist’s intentions which are the desire to discover a monster inside of people around. Emphasis on the skin of the man and his desire to play the piano unites something unreal and that is what makes the composition works.

Frederic Edwin Church, Rainy Season in the Tropics, 1866.

Oil on canvas is a perfect material to introduce nature by human eyes. Evident vertical lines clarify the sense of the work that is to encourage people and promote spirituality as the main drug against routine mess and duties.

There are so many captivating things around, and people are not able to notice them, this is why the artist uses soft texture and three-dimensional shape and form to involve people into the idea of the picture. The unity of nature with rainbow is a sign of hope and victory of human mind and ability define the truth in ordinary subjects.

Albert Bierstadt, California Spring, 1875.

Oil on canvas is probably the best material to illustrate nature and its impact on human life. Bierstadt uses captivating diagonal and vertical lines to introduce the idea of movement in nature and its spiritual role for people. The texture is soft that allows three-dimensional space creates the required illusion with an ability to depict the objects in real life.

The artist pays much attention to the sky, the heavens people strive to achieve one day. Still, trees, grass, and animals perform the role of positive space in the work, this is why too obvious emphasis on negative space in the form of a white sky cause feeling of isolation.

Martin Johnson Heade, Singing Beach, Manchester, 1863.

The seashore is perfectly described with the help of oil on canvas. The idea of calmness, loneliness, and piece is depicted by thoroughly chosen horizontal lines. There are no vertical or diagonal lines, and their absence helps people focus on their unbiased attitude to nature and life. Soft and calm texture is the sign of artist’s modest behavior, and three-dimensional shape of the work is a kind of artist’s calling for creative thinking about the essence of life, human role, and connection to nature.

Works Cited Bernstein, Teresa. In the Elevated. De Young Museum, San Francisco, 1916.

Bierstadt, Albert. California Spring. De Young Museum, San Francisco, 1875.

Bierstadt, Albert. The Arch of Octavius (Roman Fish Market). De Young Museum, San Francisco, 1858.

Church, Frederic Edwin. Rainy Season in the Tropics. De Young Museum, San Francisco, 1866.

Hassam, Frederick Childe. Seaweed and Surf, Appledore, at Sunset. De Young Museum, San Francisco, 1912.

Heade, Martin Johnson. Singing Beach, Manchester. De Young Museum, San Francisco, 1863.

Kendali, Sergeant. Cypripedia. De Young Museum, San Francisco, 1927.

McNeil Whistler, James Abbott. The Gold Scab: Eruption in Frilthy Lucre (The Creditor). De Young Museum, San Francisco, 1879.

Metcalf, Willard Leroy. Winter’s Festival. De Young Museum, San Francisco, 1913.

Obata, Chiura. Mother Earth. De Young Museum, San Francisco, 1912.

Prendergast, Maurice Brazil. De Young Museum, San Francisco. The Holiday, 1907-1909.

Sargent, John Singer. De Young Museum, San Francisco. Trout Stream in the Tyrol, 1914.

Tarbell, Edmund Charles.Snow Scene, Plymouth, Massachusetts. De Young Museum, San Francisco, 1905.

Twachtman, John Henry. Mother and Child. De Young Museum, San Francisco, 1893.


The Rise of the Roman Catholic Papacy Research Paper essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Introduction The pope is currently the leader of the Catholic Church throughout the world. Early popes spread Christianity as well as doctrines of the Catholic Church, although using different tactics and means opposed to normal ways. The Roman Church converted the Roman Emperor as well as other European countries into the pope’s secular kingdom. The popes therefore acted as both spiritual leaders and earthly kings.

How and why the Papacy in Rome became the center power Emperor Constantintine’s declaration of Christianity as state religion in the former Roman Emperor became the foundation of the Papacy in the Roman Catholic Church. Thus the church that had previously had a humble beginning became the most powerful institution in the Roman Emperor.

However, the early church leaders were eventually replaced by ambitious individuals who wanted to exercise their power and control over the church and the people. When Constantine became Roman’s emperor, he moved his capital from Rome to Constantinople which is today referred to as Istanbul.

As a result, the bishop of Rome surfaced into limelight since the emperor no longer operated from Rome. Thus, he became the most important figure in Rome; in other words, he became the center of power in Rome since the city represented the center of the mighty Roman Emperor. Even though the city was not the Roman government’s headquarters, its prestige still continued.

During this period, there were five major districts referred to as Patriarchates, with each ruled by a church leader who was known as a patriarch.

The districts included Rome, Constantinople, Jerusalem, Antioch and Alexandria. At the start, all the patriarchs were regarded as equally important; however, with time, the patriarchs of Rome and Constantinople turned out to be the most powerful in the emperor. Strong rivalry existed between these two most powerful patriarchs for many years over who was the most eminent. In AD 606, the emperor decided to bring the rivalry to an end, and an imperial edict granted the pre-eminence to Rome.

With time, the Roman Bishop acquired so much prestige that he became less satisfied with being appointed by the emperor, which had been the norm since the declaration of Christianity as a state religion. The then Roman bishop then proclaimed that his appointed was directly from God, and therefore he was the vicar of God, meaning that he represented God on earth. Thus, the Roman bishop was no longer appointed by the emperor; instead, he was elected by cardinals.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Factors that contributed to the dominance of the Roman Papacy over Western Europe In the 4th and 5th centuries, tribes from northern Europe who were regarded as pagans and mostly Germanic consistently attacked Rome, and this finally led to the collapse of the Roman Emperor. However, these tribes on entering Rome after having conquered the Roman Emperor were attracted to the Roman Church especially by the magnificent cathedrals, the powerful and wealthy priest, as well as, imposing rituals. Accordingly, these tribes that had conquered the Roman Emperor felt at the feet for the priests.

The reputation of the Roman bishop regarding his authority as well as sanctity reminded the barbarians of their druids. This was mainly because the bishop had claimed that he was the vicar of God. Soon, the authority as well as power of the Roman bishop extended over parts of Western Europe, making him become the father of nations (pope) that had been conquered by the Roman Church. After having claimed to be vicar of God, the pope now declared himself the bishops of bishops.

This occurred in the 6th century. The pope now became a king over earthly kingdoms, and in effect, a large territory around the emperor of Rome became under the control of the pope. He was not satisfied with being the spiritual leader or the earthly king of these nations that the Roman Church had conquered. The Roman Church therefore sought to increase its control over the world, making Rome the center of power.

The dominance of the Roman Papacy over the larger part of Western Europe was largely contributed by the kings’ superstitious fear of the Catholic Pope as well as his power and wealth. The pope therefore began by wresting from the kings the power as well as the right to appoint the clergy in the kingdoms or countries they represented.

The superstitious fear for the pope’s eternal damnation prevented the kings from resisting against the pope. The supremacy of the papacy peaked around Western Europe until the period of reformation. This, the pope achieved with the aid of nobles who had also feared that they could be destroyed by the Church if they resisted, and so they helped build the Roman Emperor.

The six-century rule and control by the Roman Papacy was also attributed by the brilliance of the popes who ruled during the period. The pope always provided what the masses desired. Whenever the masses wished for salvation without sanctification or to keep their sins, the pope always offered that. If he felt that the masses desired outward rituals in place of inward sincerity, he allowed it.

In addition, the Papacy backed kings who were the likely winners. The Roman papacy also used bribery, excommunication, pomp, as well as, burning whenever he deemed it necessary to survive. By and large, the Roman Papacy founded his dominion on persecution of those who opposed him, his views, and doctrines or did not regard him as the vicar of God.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Rise of the Roman Catholic Papacy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Negative ramifications of the Roman Papacy The Roman Church continued with persecutions to instill his authority and power across the Roman Emperor and territories. The popes declared themselves as the only ones who had exclusive rights to interpret the Word of God, and therefore, they killed anyone who disagreed with them and confiscated their properties. As a result, thousands of innocent people were wrongly accused by greedy priests in order to acquire their properties. The church owned much land across Europe.

The Roman Papacy greatly hindered the progress in literacy that had begun in the regions that the popes ruled. Very few people could read, and any scholar who had acquired literacy in the ancient languages risked being branded a heretic.

This could even lead to persecution since knowing how to read meant that the individual could interpret the bible to the pope’s subjects. Even the popes themselves could hardly read, and the colleges instituted by the church did not impart proper literacy skills. As a result, priests were reduced to ritual performers since they could not even convey the simplest biblical message.

The Roman Papacy also encouraged the worship of idols. Throughout Europe, there were religious objects which people bowed to and respected as religious beings. Holiness in the Roman Emperor and throughout Western Europe involved prostrating oneself before objects which were treated as religious images. The popes also commanded that everyone under their control had to subscribe to what they believed in. They therefore prescribed to their subjects what to believe.

Within the Roman Church, church leaders scrambled for power and money. Each person who held a higher post within the church collected money from his juniors. Money became the most important thing in the Roman Church.

During this period, service fee was charged on activities such as blessing of marriages, anointing of the dead, dedication of homes, baptism of infants, as well as, offering of masses during burials. The church also sold indulgences, which people were made to believe that could shorten their period of suffering in Purgatory and so they paid money for that. Each service had its right price. The church therefore became a massive spiritual market.

The clergy, especially the priests did a lot of evil. Since they were protected by the Roman Papacy, they kept mistresses and frequently visited brothels.

Positive ramifications of the Roman Papacy Although the Roman Papacy has been accused of having committed many evils, there were positive ramifications attributed to the reign of the papacy. During this period, the church freed itself from the worldly rule. It gained independence from the government and rulers of nations and kingdoms. Up to date, the pope, cardinals and clergy are not appointed by heads of governments or administrative levels any more. Elected church officials no longer pledged their allegiance to the king or ruler, but to the temporal power.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Rise of the Roman Catholic Papacy by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More During the same period, the Roman Papacy introduced the idea of crusades. The first pope to come up with the idea was Gregory VII, and was later expanded by his successors. It later became a disgrace if one failed to join a crusade. Thousands of people including men, women, as well as, children attended crusades without any preparation believing that God would provide for them.

Although most of these crusades were inspired by the need to free the Holy Land and Jerusalem from the Turks and the Muslims and therefore involved massacre, most people who later joined the crusades, had sincere religious motives. Again, the crusades helped create relationship between the western and eastern world. This became the foundation of Renaissance.

Conclusion The period of Roman Papacy was a time of political as well as religious chaos and corruption. The Roman popes had the power to exercise excessive authority over the people, and survived by instilling fear into the people and rulers that they were the vicar of God. Therefore, anybody who went against their word faced the consequences as they desired.


Edgar Allan Poe’s The Cask of Amontillado Essay best essay help

The Cask of Amontillado is one of the best known works of Edgar Allan Poe. This is a tale woven together through the use of lies and smooth words coming out from its main character and narrator.

The short story is interesting in the sense that all the information about the characters and the events that transpired that day came only from one source (Poe, p.1). Without remorse Montressor recounted how he deceived his friend Fortunato and led him to a trap that would kill him. It is therefore fitting to use characterization as an element to support the theme of betrayal.

The theme of the story is betrayal. Montressor said that he was a friend of Fortunato and yet he plotted his murder. The elaborate scheme was revealed by the murderer himself when he gave away clues as to how he has planned the event beforehand and that it was not spontaneous act.

Betrayal is the theme most evident in the story because Montressor was able to deceive his friend Fortunato. He played on his weakness. The pride of Fortunato was his downfall but it could never have been exploited until Montressor played the part of a good friend. Fortunato was an unsuspecting prey led to a deadly trap.

The betrayal was perfectly set-up because of the personal qualities of Montressor. This is why Edgar Allan Poe’s characterization is the most important element of this short story. Without the brilliant characterization of Montressor the story cannot stand on its own and the readers would not be convinced that a betrayal of such magnitude is possible.

The author was able to paint the picture of a cold-blooded killer capable of deceiving a friend. He was able to do this by allowing Montressor to be the narrator and the only source of information regarding the other elements of the story. Although the revelation of the character of Montressor was done indirectly, the fact that he was also the narrator of the story enabled readers to have access to his thoughts and feelings.

By doing so the author was able to reveal a great deal of information regarding the foul mind of Montressor. At the same time wary readers can see how the plot to kill Fortunato evolved from an insult, to a grudge and then finally to premeditated murder. The characterization of Montressor also made it clear why the murderer succeeded and why he was able to commit the perfect crime in the sense that no one would know that he was the culprit.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The characterization also revealed how Montressor’s mind work because he was able to foresee different factors that would work in his favor. He had foresight to kill his friend at the height of the carnival because he knew that Fortunato would be drunk. He also knew that it is the only time of the year that he could wear a mask without drawing suspicion. He could also then cover his face to prevent witnesses from identifying the man who was with Fortunato the last time he was seen alive.

Conclusion The most dominant theme of the story is betrayal. The challenge for the author was to convince the readers that a powerful and influential man like Fortunato can be easily led to a trap. In this regard the author had to expertly use characterization to explain the motives of the killer and why he had the capability to commit a terrible crime. The characterization of Montressor also gave readers access to his thoughts and feelings therefore clarifying that he was intent to murder and betray his friend.

Work Cited Poe, Edgar Allan. The Cask of Amontillado., 2005. 27 July 2011.


Like a Winding Street and Long Black Song Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Thematic concerns

Structure and style of writing

Black history and culture


Works Cited

Introduction Richard Wright in his story, Long Black Song, illustrates how a white phonograph sales representative seduces a black woman, Sarah. While her husband, Silas, a farmer, is off in the fields. On returning from duty, he discovers Sara’s infidelity, and this infuriates him.

It is a narrative told from Sara’s point of view, which serves as a reminder that her sexual abuse by white men on black women is condoned in white society. The revelation that, as Silas continues to gain on his property, he is losing on his wife. Ironically, his wife’s infidelity serves to the realization of what is, his most prized property leading him to swear to combat racism to the end.

In Like a Winding Sheet, by Ann Petry, the struggles of a poor, black couple living in “Ghetto” is rendered. In both stories, the black men illustrate anger in a form of violence on their wives, although their main source of anger is different. In Like a Winding Sheet, everyday routine of Johnson, a black male struggling with racism and social pressure, causes anger and frustration to build up inside him (Petry, 16).

Race and cultural superiority have contributed to a larger extend in shaping the aspect of gender identity in the two novels. Hence, a white believes, to assert more control and influence over the other races and gender. On the other hand, a black man embraces the mindset of being superior to the woman.

Thematic concerns Wright and Petry, in an attempt to integrate the African American experience, values and their black background, their work is crafted in several thematic issues that recur in their writing. These include racism and intolerance, class, gender, violence, and sexuality intersects with social pressure. However, use of basic elements like the plot, characters, the mythic structure, and setting is similar in many ways there are differences in the way the two writers respond to issues of gender identity in their respective writings.

In Petry’s story Johnson, a black male, struggles with societal pressures and racism. Wright indicates the many challenges Silas is facing having to take up his family only to return and find his wife cheated on him with the white sales representative (36). Both highlight the class difference between the middle-class whites against the working class mainly composed of blacks.

Sexual assault is condoned on black women by the white men. Violence is a recurring problem as Silas in Wright’s story vows to die fighting against racism. Again, we see Johnson brutally beating his wife to death. Petry’s story illustrates the weakness of gender superiority complex and explores how the phenomenon sways the perception of gender identity in our society.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Structure and style of writing Their system is similar in that they begin with a happy tone in Like A Winding Sheet Johnson and his wife, Mae appearing happy as he tries to revive earlier than her “to surprise her by fixing breakfast”(Petry,1). Nevertheless, because he has been working for long hours, he goes back to sleep.

In the Long Black Song, it starts as Sara is singing a lullaby, which is a reminder of her former lover called Tom who she would probably have married had he not gone to war. As the plots progress, there is a build-up of conflict. The biggest conflict of racism and injustice in Long Black Song is when he is shoot by Silas shoots the white man as came to collect money for the gramophone.

In, Like Winding Street, Petry, portrays the effects of frustration and anger happening to black couple because of poverty. Similarly, Wright claims that black people are oppressed. Petry describes African-American women struggling with an oppressive white dominated society. Both showing how they take a leap of faith towards the end and confront these injustices.

Petry, being a realist, argues that although African American especially women were unjustly oppressed they nonetheless would survive. As an early feminist and visionary, she brought to her compelling fiction of her perspective of two worlds the middle class mostly made up of the white people and the working class of black people in the inner city. To her, black people can only work to redeem themselves.

Wright believes in the necessary commitment to black salvation on the tolerance of an already existing societal history. Nevertheless, the story also displays Wright’s intuitive belief in Black Nationalism. His black characters, through experience brought about by racist violence, makes them understand their identities as “outsiders”, hence brings about emotional attachment among the black community (Wright, 35).

Black history and culture While both authors give the true experience of any black American, religion and cultural impact, it is further emphasized in

Wright’s narrative as opposed to Petry’s. Petry’s links the early cultural association of blacks and whites with an early form of slavery lead by Europeans in Africa, and the modern issues such as women in the struggle for freedom.

We will write a custom Essay on Like a Winding Street and Long Black Song specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Like a Winding Sheet has a great concern about the role of imagination on blacks as illustrated in Wright writings. Petry put herself in the mind of the characters (Petry, 59).

Wright is concerned with the definition of blackness, manhood, crisis, worth, and the sense of belonging impact black men’s understanding of emotional wellness. His assertion seems to concur with Saadawi and Hetata (76) as they argue that African Americans’ attitudes toward the emotional performances of black people is varied.

Gender equality is a social concern that recurs in many African American writings. Naturally, men are socialized to think about the importance of success, power, and competitiveness as seen in both Wright’s and Petry’s stories (Saadawi and Hetata 71).

In a society where too much pressure is exerted on them, and the struggle against racism, their anger is culminated in mixed emotions. Although Johnson, in Like a Winding Street, cares deeply for his wife, which is evident in a different part of the text as he struggles to ascertain his love against this pent up anger.

This is because; male socialization nature is hypothesized to illustrate feelings such as shame and anxiety related to women (Saadawi and Hetata, 84). We see this in Wright’s, Long Black Song where it is only until Sila’s wife infidelity that ironically brings to his realization that his main struggle is with the oppressive society in general (Wright, 39).

Although he physically assaults her, he is really in the process of trying to identify a balance with his anger against the white oppressors, aware of prescribed perspectives by society as a psychological defense. Both narratives show how when a man is confronted with problems he tends to depict stereotypical masculine gender role.

Conclusion These authors both illustrates similarities and differences on how they portray the issue of gender identity in their work. The African American history, race, culture and experience have greatly influenced both the similarities and the differences in highlighting gender identity in the two stories.

Works Cited Petry, Ann. Like The Winding Street. New York: HarperCollins Publishers, 1946

Not sure if you can write a paper on Like a Winding Street and Long Black Song by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Saadawi, El Nawal and Hetata, Sherif. Women at Point Zero, London: Zed Books, 2007

Wright, Richard. Long Black Song. New York: Wiley pub, 1946


Country Profiles: Malaysia and Indonesia Essay scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Country Profile: Malaysia

Country Profile: Indonesia




There are two emerging economies in Asia and these are Malaysia and Indonesia. Aside from the rhyming names there are many similarities that make it interesting to compare both countries. These two countries experienced hardships as a result of being under foreign domination. But the most impressive achievements of its people and political leaders is the creation of a new reality – one that is slowly erasing the stigma of poverty and transforming how they are being perceived by the international community.

Country Profile: Malaysia Malaysia is a melting pot of culture because it is multi-ethnic like many of its Asian neighbours. It is also a multi-religious society and yet it must be pointed out that it is a Muslim nation because majority of its population adheres to Islam. At the same time a powerful Chinese community makes up the other part of the power structure in this country.

From a geographical standpoint, the country is comprised of two regions and from a geopolitical standpoint “a federation of 13 states and three federal authorities” (World Factbook, 2011, p.1). It has now become a key tourist destination in Asia. This is due to the existence of tourist spots such as excellent beaches offering water sports and breathtaking sceneries.

Sixty percent of the population are ethnic Malays while twenty six percent are comprised of Chinese. The rest are Indians and other indigenous peoples (Richmond, 2007, p.45).

The Gross Domestic Product per capita is $14,700 (World Factbook, 2011, p.1). The GDP composition be sector is listed as follows: a) agriculture 9.1%; b) industry 41.6%; and c) services 49.3% (World Factbook, 2011, p.1). The Malays dominate the political realm while the Chinese control the business realm. The Indians on the other hand are the poorest in the country.

It is important to point out that “the United Kingdom is Malaysia’s largest market in Europe and comparatively speaking, Malaysia is the UK’s second largest market for goods in South East Asia, after Singapore” (Foreign


Challenges of Relationship Management with Customers in Business Environment Essay (Critical Writing) essay help free

Table of Contents The Development of CRM relationships

Customer Experience Management

Critique of the Article

Works Cited

Written by Maja Djurica, Gordana Tomic, and Mile Smardzic, the article “Challenges of Relationship Management with Customers in Business Environment” was published on the Cambridge Business Review Journal, Volume number 17, Issue Number1. It appears on page 214-219 of the journal. The article explores the Customer Relationship Management (CRM) as an important strategy of establishing and enhancing relationships between suppliers and their customers.

In the article, the CRM strategy is identified as essential in promoting customer loyalty, which leads to increased business profitability, and low business costs (Djurica, Tomic, and Smardzic 214). Fundamentally, CRM aims at building a loyal customer base that consists of strategically important customers to promote business performance in an organization. In CRM, the relations benefit both the business and the customers.

By providing services that meet the expectations of customers such as high quality services and other benefits, customer loyalty is established (Djurica et al. 214). Moreover, customers are more likely to remain loyal to a particular company to minimize time and psychological costs associated with seeking services from another company.

The Development of CRM relationships The development of company-customer relationships is gradual and involves many stages. Initially, a customer may not be aware of the company’s wares and thus a stranger to the company (Djurica et al. 215). At this stage, the management establishes a communication channel with the potential customers aimed at informing them of the company offerings and persuading the customers to try the same.

After the initial stage, the customer becomes an acquaintance to the company. At this stage, the management aims at satisfying the customers, removing any existing uncertainties, and promoting the company image to the customers (Djurica et al. 216). Offering quality products or services comparable to those of competitors is essential at this stage.

In the next stage, the customer becomes a friend to the company, which is enhanced by regular purchases. Through regular purchases, the management acquires specific knowledge of customer needs and tailors its wares to meet the tastes and preferences of the customers ((Djurica et al. 216). Additionally, at this stage trust relationships are established.

The trust relationships are essential in development of partnerships between the customer and the company ((Djurica et al. 216). When the company and the customers become partners, the company adjusts its offerings to suit customer demands and consumer changing needs. Additionally, the company aims at strengthening the relationships and maintaining customer loyalty.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Djurica et al. hold the view that, for a relationship to develop from friendship to partnership, the company must utilize customer information more effectively than the competition (216). Furthermore, the company must continually improve its offerings and programs in line with the changing consumer needs.

CRM faces many challenges in its implementation in many companies, as a strategy to gain a competitive advantage over other businesses. Firstly, due to the amount of customer data involved, CRM may fail to integrate customer data properly in building stronger customer relationships (Djurica et al. 216).. Most of the CRM initiatives also fail to get the intended user adoption and instead affect customer relations.

This often arises because the loyalty programs and marketing strategies used are intrusive and inappropriate to customers (Djurica et al. 217). CRM may also become ineffective if it fails to integrate other business applications. Additionally, government legislations also limit full implementation of CRM systems. The restriction regards the use of the customer data in promoting company products and services ((Djurica et al. 217).

Customer Experience Management The management of customer relationships is often difficult and challenging. Most companies undertake to manage the customer experiences to overcome these problems.

Under customer experience management, three levels are identified; customer experience regarding the brand, transaction, and relationships (Djurica et al. 217). Through interpersonal relationships that relate to a given brand, brand experience can be established which is beneficial to the company. Brands have a connection with customer relationships hence essential in CRM.

Focusing on brand experience strengthens relationships associated with brand personality (Djurica et al. 218). Brand relationships are developed when the brand has a symbolic value that meets the psychological needs of the customer hence ensuring customer satisfaction. Therefore, experience focused customer management aims at offering products that meet customer needs and satisfaction.

Djurica et al. contend that, in order to maintain profitability, companies should terminate relationships with non-profitable customers (218). Additionally, customers with poor credit rating or dysfunctional customer behavior affect the business performance. If anything, dysfunctional customers affect the morale of employees negatively.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Challenges of Relationship Management with Customers in Business Environment specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Therefore, ending a relationship with such customers to maintain business efficiency is essential. However, termination of a relationship with unprofitable customers should be done carefully to avoid negative publicity that might tarnish the company image (Djurica et al. 219).

Critique of the Article The article offers an overview of the customer relationship strategy as an effective tool for attracting and maintaining customers and improving company profitability. The rationale given for establishing CRM by companies is one of the strengths of the article. The authors associate quality product offerings as a way of ensuring customer loyalty.

Further, the article identifies human behavior as connected to consumer behavior and loyalty, hence an essential component of CRM. However, the article fails to provide substantive reasons why companies adopt CRM as a business strategy. Only two reasons are identified viz. increased profitability and reduced business costs.

In the article, various analogues expound on the different aspects of CRM; for instance, the “leaking bucket” explains the importance of investing strategically in significant customers as opposed to seeking new customers. The article also excels in outlining the stages of development of CRM relationships. It identifies the inputs from the management of the company that can spur the growth of CRM relationships. The authors identify dysfunctional customer behavior as non-beneficial to the company; hence, it should be terminated.

With regard to presentation, the challenges of CRM, which is the main theme of the article, are not addressed adequately. The article also fails to specify the key challenges that face CRM coupled with failure to present the challenges in a sequence. Challenges often arise in the implementation of the CRM; therefore, effective implementation plans are essential.

However, the article does not explain how poor implementation strategies relate to failure of CRM to meet expectations. Additionally, the reasons why companies implement CRM are vague and unclear. Themes and main points do not come out clearly, and much of the information provided cannot account for the increased adoption of CRM management. There are also grammatical mistakes as well as poor sentence structure presentation.

The reference sources for the article provide information to support the authors’ arguments. However, most of the sources cited in the text do not appear in the references. For instance, in the customer experience management, the authors identify three levels of customer experience as suggested by O’loughlin Szmigin and Turnbull.

However, this reference source does not appear in the references. The authors also identify the three areas of interest that influence customer loyalty by O’Malley and Prothero but do not cite this source under the reference list. This indicates that most of the sources used in the article are neither valid nor reliable sources for further reference.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Challenges of Relationship Management with Customers in Business Environment by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Most companies have implemented the CRM strategy as a way of retaining customers and remaining competitive. The article adds important value to understanding of CRM relationships in two ways. Firstly, it identifies the stages of development of CRM relationships and outlines what the management of the company should do to foster customer relationships.

Secondly, it specifies customer experience as the next front in CRM relationships. The authors advise businesses to terminate unprofitable customer, problematic customer relationships, and invest in a strategically important market segment to cut down business costs.

In my opinion, the importance of CRM relationships to a company and customers is well explained in the article. Additionally, the stages of developing effective CRM relationships and the new concept of customer experience are major contributions of the article. The article also excelled in explaining the importance of terminating problematic or dysfunctional customers and investing in loyal customer. However, the key challenges that affect the implementation of CRM relationships do not come out clearly.

In conclusion, I think the costs of implementation of the strategy and managing the CRM application is the main challenge facing CRM implementation. Additionally, setting out clear objectives prior to implementing the CRM would promote its effectiveness and adoption by users.

The implementation of CRM should be a joint strategy between IT department and management to ensure its success. Properly designed training programs aimed at providing essential skills to managers would enable them to utilize the CRM system effectively. Additionally, CRM strategy is a cultural change, which should be implemented in phases to ensure its success.

Works Cited Djurica, Maja, Tomic, Gordana and Smardzic, Mile. “Challenges of

Relationship Management with Customers in Business Environment”. Business Review Journal 17.1 (2011): 214-219.


Analyzing Love and Love Addiction in Relationships Research Paper essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

John Allan Lee’s Intimate Relationships offers six basis love styles viz. Passionate love (Eros), Game playing love (Ludus), Friendship love (Storge), Logical love (Pragma), Possessive love (Mania), and Selfless love (Agape). In passionate love, lovers get attracted to each other as soon as they meet, and they become emotionally involved thereafter. Game playing love involves lovers who are intimate with several lovers at a time, and do not commit to relationships easily.

In friendship love, the partners in play grow their love out of a prior deep friendship. Logical love, on the other hand, involves two partners who choose each other based on shared social and professional similarities, and the ensuing relationship is based on a viable marriage.

The fifth type of love – possession love – is characterized by the need to control the other partner, and a high degree of jealousy. Lastly, selfless love involves the recognition of the other partner’s interests. Such love is exemplified by the willingness to forgo and sacrifice some matters for the sake of the other partner.

In John D. Moore’s book, Confusing Love with Obsession, the predominant love style for most of the characters is possession love (mania). Possession love style entails a need for irrational constant and undivided attention from one’s partner. The possessive lover in this love style easily gets jealous when his or her lover converses with another person; however needful and necessary the circumstance and context of such a conversation.

Many of the characters in the book, Confusing Love with Obsession, fit into the stated description. Given that, the book focuses primarily on raising awareness on when love crosses into the realm of obsession, the characters in the book exhibit an intense and obsessive attraction for their partners, to the detriment of the particular relationship.

The character that I personally identified with is Nancy. I can relate to her situation because it easily relates to that of my sister, and her character might as well be my sister herself – their actions and analysis of situations is very similar. When my sister met her current husband, she was intensely in love with him and soon, within one month, began to forgo her interests for the sake of their ‘relationship’.

Even though, her future husband was fond of her, it was easy to see that she was the one that was willing to ‘go the extra mile’ in the relationship. Within six months, she was talking about her desire to marry her boyfriend, and before anyone in the family could even digest the news, she announced that she was pregnant.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The consistent expression that I remember in her husband is one of passive shock – as if he were a person watching his life proceed before him, with no control whatsoever. They did eventually marry, and do have two more children, but it is a common perception within our larger family that my sister is the ‘husband’ to him – such is her proclivity to monitor and ascertain her husband’s whereabouts.

There are four phases/characteristics of the Obsessive Love Wheel, as enunciated by Moore. These phases analyze the behavior of persons who exhibit a Relational Dependency (RD) characteristic – an inordinately high tendency for love addiction and codependency in a relationship.

The fist phase is the attraction phase. Here, the person develops an immediate liking for the potential lover/partner, and has an instant desire to develop a relationship with the love interest without properly knowing this person. In this phase, the person focuses on the potential lover’s physical appearance at the expense of other characteristics and qualities (Moore, 2006, p.14).

The person also begins to visualize a future with his or her love interest in total disregard for the need of properly anchoring the relationship on friendship first. The second phase is known as the anxious phase. After both partners agree to a relationship, the relational dependent partner begins to exhibit certain characteristics born of anxiety.

The person irrationally starts to think his/her partner is cheating on him or her. Such unsubstantiated claims fester and the person begins to demand ‘accountability’ in their partner, such as asking the partner to state their daily itinerary. The relational dependent partner in this phase also exhibits an unfounded fear of the partner walking away from the relationship, to the extent of having dreams and fantasies of the same.

The partner also begins to develop a close communication contact with his/her romantic partner, constantly calling him/her on the phone, sending emails and text messages, to have an idea of their partner’s almost hourly activities. Based on unfounded feelings of mistrust, tension builds in the relationship. The relational dependent partner now begins to exhibit controlling behavior such as trying to limit his or her partner’s social contact with other people. The partner may turn violent at this stage.

The third phase of the Obsessive Love Wheel is the obsessive phase. In this phase, the relational dependent person intensifies his or her controlling behaviors, and in the end, the partner walks out of the unhealthy relationship. The relational dependent partner’s compulsive behaviors lead him/her to act immaturely; for instance, s/he might go the partner’s work place or home unannounced, with the sole aim of ascertaining the partner’s fidelity.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Analyzing Love and Love Addiction in Relationships specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The obsessive partner may also begin to spy on his or her love interest by physically trailing him/her throughout the day. The last phase of the Obsessive Love Wheel, phase four, is the destructive phase. This phase signifies the end of the relationship. At this point, the partner of the relational dependent person has left due to the behaviors and acts stated in the first three phases.

The relational dependent person sinks into depression given that the relationship fails. The person blames her/himself for the collapse of the relationship, and may seek revenge on the partner by physically harming him/her. Due to low-self esteem arising from abandonment, the relational dependent person engages in self-destructive behaviors such as substance abuse, inebriation, and binge eating. In this final phase, the relational dependent person is considered to be at risk of suicide.

In reading Moore’s Confusing Love with Obsession, I have gained insightful knowledge on love addiction in relationships. Firstly, I have learnt that what I have always considered a normal part of a relationship – jealousy, can have negative effects on an otherwise healthy nascent relationship or friendship. I have always believed that to be jealous of a partner’s otherwise normal interest in other persons is not a problem, but reading Moore’s book has enabled me to acknowledge that jealousy can have devastating effects on a relationship.

Primarily, obsession as described in the four phases of The Obsessive Love Wheel stems from jealousy, borne of low self-esteem. I have thus resolved to develop a more selfless love to all relationships that I may ever commit to, such as the one envisioned in Lee’s Intimate Relationships: selfless love. Jealousy is indeed the biggest influence on, and determinant of, love addiction.

Furthermore, I have learnt the importance of the need to nurse a friendship gradually as it unfolds into a relationship. One of the main problems with love addiction, as I have learnt in Moore’s book, is that the relational dependent person is quick to move from one level of knowing a person and discovering his or her interest, to another. As a result, the relational dependent person does not get to know his or her romantic interest well, and this damages the prospects of having a successful relationship subsequently.

Finally, I have learnt to look out for the warning signs of love addiction in a partner. Because I have read the book, I can now tell when a relationship is headed towards an inevitable end due to a partner’s obsessive behavior. I am able to tell when a partner is being controlling, jealous, and insecure – the known signs of a relational dependent person.

In conclusion, in a world, that places significance in building and maintaining good relationships with our loved ones, the knowledge and insight gained from Lee’s Intimate Relationships and Moore’s Confusing Love with Obsession will come in handy. The types of love espoused by Lee enable one to choose the best kind of love s/he wishes to give to his/her loved one/partner. Finally, knowing the dangers of love addiction will go a long way in ensuring my emotional and even physical safety, as I engage in more relationships in life.

Reference Moore, D. (2006). Confusing Love With Obsession: When Being in Love Means Being in Control. Minnesota: Hazelden Books.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Analyzing Love and Love Addiction in Relationships by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


Customer Relationship In Carlton Hotel Saudi Arabia Report argumentative essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Case Study: Carlton Hotel Saudi Arabia

The Service Marketing Used By Carlton Hotel

Application Of Customer Relationship Management


Works Cited

Introduction Any company relies on its customers to generate revenue. It is therefore very important to establish a strong working relationship with them. In the hotel industry for example, the management deals directly with the client and any unresolved dispute between the two can lead to the hotel incurring major losses.

It is therefore important for the management to implement a customer relationship management strategy to maintain a good relationship with its customers. The strategy is important to offer satisfactory services that lead to increased sales in the hotel (Wenderoth 23). A new hotel being established should put up a workable strategy that will help it capture the customers from other competing hotels.

Case Study: Carlton Hotel Saudi Arabia Carlton Hotel is strategically located in the heart of the capital city in Saudi Arabia, Bahrain. Being a new entrant into the competitive market of Saudi Arabia, Carlton has adopted unique features that make it more outstanding from its competitors.

The location is ideal for customers to access it at any time. Carlton offers a unique model of comfort that is only experienced in a first class hotel. The rooms have been built strategically to enable the guest have the most impressive views of the city. The interior and exterior design of the hotel reflects the culture of the people of Saudi Arabia mixed with a touch of international art.

However, despite the beautiful aspect of the hotel and its ideal location, the management has implemented a customer relationship strategies that have made the services offered at the hotel exceptional. This has made the hotel to be one of the leading hotels in Saudi Arabia with the competitors unable to keep up with its pace.

The Service Marketing Used By Carlton Hotel The service marketing adopted by Carlton Hotel to maintain its customers is unique hence making the venture successful. For a business to successfully market its services, there are things that it should consider. These factors are known as the 3 P’s that comprise the marketing mix of a service (Hoffman and Bateson 43). The first factor that should be considered is the people to deliver the services. Carlton Hotel has employed the best workforce to deal with the customers.

All the employees from the different departments in the hotel possess the required training to enable them deliver their services appropriately. This is an important aspect to consider as most of judgments by a customer are based on the services received from the staff. Carlton’s management ensures that the staff members are friendly and any dispute between a member of the staff and a customer is resolved amicably. The other factor is the process involved to get that service.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Carlton has made it their policy to make the process of dealing with customers simple and efficient (Rabinowitz and Rex 54). There is a department that deals with any problems that arises at any time hence fostering customer loyalty. The physical evidence is the other marketing mix that has enabled Carlton Hotel to stay ahead in the competitive market. The hotel as earlier said is clean, well designed and strategically located. (Zeithami, Bitner and Gremier 33).

Application Of Customer Relationship Management Besides offering fantastic services to its client, Carlton Hotel have established a working relationship model with the customers to ensure that they enjoy the services offered at the hotel. The model adopted by Carlton Hotel has been divided into three parts. The operational part ensures that the services have been advertised to the public to make them aware of its existence (Peppers and Rogers 12). The sales and marketing team has been well trained to encompass all the character traits of an excellent customer service.

They handle any complaints or questions from clients and ensure that the client preferences and habits are recorded. This ensures that the favorable service is always available to the customer at any given time. The hotel has also installed a state of art customer relationship management software that deals directly with the clients. The software enables information of the customers calling the hotel to be stored hence making it easy for the management to serve their clients without confusion.

This is one aspect that keeps on attracting clients to Carlton Hotel. The co-operational part ensures that the management stays in constant contact with the customers. They have managed to do this by sending grateful messages to their guests through emails and to notify them of any changes at the hotels. The clients therefore feel emotionally attached to the hotel hence become regulars (Nagdeman 12).

Conclusion Carlton Hotel has achieved its vision of being among the leading hotel in Saudi Arabia. This is due to its ability of evaluating and implementing the required service marketing in the industry. This has seen the hotel expand rapidly to cater for its increasing clientele over the few months that it has been in operation.

Being situated in a Muslim region, it has managed to balance itself so as to meet the needs of clients from different religious backgrounds. It is therefore very important for any hotel management to critically evaluate and understand all the service marketing issues before implementing them. This is essential for the management to keep a good working relationship with the customer at all times. This not only increases the hotel’s revenue but also helps it maintain the required standard to place it ahead of its competitors.

Works Cited Hoffman, Douglas and Bateson, John. Service Marketing: Concepts, Strategies,


The Song of Roland Essay essay help online: essay help online

The essay is a critical examination of good versus evil in The Song of Roland. This piece of literal work is one of the oldest arts from French literature. There are numerous versions which attest to how popular it was between 12th and 14th centauries. This poem has been seen to be a major example of chanson de geste, which celebrates the life of a hero.

Additionally the story is based on the conflict and the warfare between the Christians and the Muslims in Spain. In order to experience good and evil, there must be heroes and villains. War is seen to be a great thing and even glamorous. However the cost associated with it is usually heavy especially for the heroes. On the other hand, the villains deserve no grief or compassion.

Good is usually thought to be the will of God and in this case the Franks are deemed to represent good since they are moved by the will of God while the Saracens are seen to be evil. Due to this when they die there souls are taken to hell by the devil.

For one to be evil can be as results of lack of knowledge making one to be deceived and to act against the will of God. In The Song of Roland, a proof that lack of knowledge leads to evil is summarized as follows “o est une gent ki unches ben ne volt. [This is a sort of which has never seen goodness]” (Haidu par. 7).

The Christians while fighting with the pagans were of the opinion that they were on the right while the later were in the wrong. To the French, the pagans are evil and criminal individuals who have rejected Christ from whom all those things deemed good come from. For that matter they are to be confronted translating to a war between individuals who were fighting for God and Satan (Dominik 21).

Similarly evil is depicted in several occasions in the poem. For instance we are told of the evil planned of King Marsile who intends to convert into Christianity then become Charlemagne vassal. This is with a clear intention that once the later goes back to France Marsile will break the promise he made. Additionally, the plans Roland’s step father had when he was sent for a diplomatic mission was in itself an evil strategy to get rid of Roland who the formers saw to be a threat in terms of leadership.

He thus planned with the Saracens that the rearguard of Charlemagne will be ambushed and this will be a perfect opportunity to get rid of Roland (Dominik 49). According to the poem, the reaction of King Charlemagne to drive the Saracens towards the river so that those who were not chopped would definitely be drowned although to them was good; it was an evil act in my humble opinion.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is worth noting that all that are thought to be good will always thrive in the end. It is no doubt that the all powerful God will intervene in time to ensure that those fighting for the good emerge as victors in the end. This can be exemplified when Thierry who was less strong than Pinabel managed to fight him in order to decide the case in which Roland step father was to be put to death (Haidu par.5). In my opinion the concept of good versus bad has been clearly brought out in the French oldest literature The Song of Roland.

Works Cited Haidu, Peter. The Subject of Violence: The Song of Roland and the Birth of the State. Bloomington, Indiana: Indiana University Press, 1993.Print.

Dominik, Mark. Holy War in The Song of Roland: The Mythification of History. Viewed on


David Frost’s New project – Interviews with Richard Nixon Essay college essay help: college essay help

David Frost, a TV presenter and a renowned comedian made attempts to get into the books of history in 1977. To accomplish his mission, he dissuaded his producer john Burt to support him financially to start a new project. The project involved conducting numerous interviews with Richard Nixon. The interviews commenced after the preliminary diplomacies but Frost being inexperienced, he does not measure up to the standards to interview Nixon. This essay explores why Morgan describes the film as a battle rather than a trial.

Between 1972 and 1974, a famous scandal dubbed the Watergate scandal which was regarded as a conspiracy of the president rocked America leading to the resignation of President Nixon. After the resignation of Nixon, the new president, Gerald Ford gave Nixon pardon to the displeasure of the American people.

Three years following this event, Nixon agreed to be involved in a series of interviews with Frost who was a comedian and television presenter. The reason why Morgan terms this interview as a battle rather than a trial is because Frost was anticipating outwitting Nixon in the interviews to remain an honorable person. However, this is not what happened since Nixon proved to be witty and difficult than Frost had expected.

The film starts by frantic efforts by Nixon and his colleagues to conduct the interviews with Nixon. This stage presents the first hurdle as Nixon demands a fee of $600000 causing Frost to solicit funds from his friends (Guardian 3).

The film is really a battle as exhibited by Frost and his team as they do an intensive research in preparation of the upcoming interviews. The interviews are similar to a boxing competition that requires high intellectual capacity between Frost and Nixon. The film is characterized by emotional moments as the interviews progress.

Frost and his team seem to be dissatisfied and unhappy with the apparent success that Nixon is achieving during the interviews. Frost and his team had hopes of exposing the corrupt dealings of Nixon during his reign in power but he seems to avoid all the attacks from Frost. In three sessions of two hours each, Frost was not making any success in a bid to achieve his goal while Nixon had managed to ward off all the attacks from Frost (Guardian 3).

The greatest battle that is evident in this film is the value attached to reputation. Right from the onset of the film, the reputation of Nixon is tainted by the infamous Watergate scandal. Nixon is put to task to explain how America would keep its reputation if he ascended to presidency and behaved badly then no legal action was taken against him.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Nixon at some point backs this idea by saying that he was also concerned about the reputation of America among other countries. However, when asked about his reactions during the Vietnam War, he outwits Frost and his colleagues by telling them that the war was intended at testing the credibility of America.

He says that the world was watching carefully to see if America had the character of fighting to the end. Nixon is not happy with the fact that the American people had discarded all his other good deeds and used this scandal to depict him as a bad leader and destroy his reputation permanently. As Frost looks at the interviews as a way of fixing Nixon, he himself looks at the interviews as an opportune moment of restoring his punctured reputation.

The interviews with Frost are an important turning point in the career of Frost as a TV personality. He is very determined to be the winner in these interviews such that other aspects of his life begin to take a nosedive.

He receives the first blow after his show in Australia is terminated since the producers feel that he has the wrong priorities. At some point, Frost starts regretting his actions and wishes that somebody had restrained him before he went too far in the interviews. The battle for reputation is heightened when Nixon calls Frost between their third and fourth interviews.

In the telephone conversation, Nixon expresses his strong passion for their quest to earn respect and how they should get back to the podium of winners. He tells Frost that the outcomes of the interviews will however present only one winner. This phone call prompts Frost to intensify his strategies of being the winner in the final interview. Nixon loses the battle but they both establish respect for one another as it is seen at the end of the film (IMDB 1).

Morgan crafts a story which is a battle leading to the victory of one character over the other. However, during the course of the interviews, the defeat of Nixon is not elaborate. Nixon finally in an emotional concurrence recounts how he had failed his country and friends but immediately lays the blame on others. He says that his mistakes were caused by other people.

Morgan tries to create a different Nixon in the film who is sympathetic as opposed to the historical Nixon who never cared for his people. He portrays him as somebody who blundered and concealed his mistakes through lies. This is something that any member of the audience can do hence the audience can relate with the film.

We will write a custom Essay on David Frost’s New project – Interviews with Richard Nixon specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Frost realizes that Nixon has a heavy burden of guilt and uses this aspect to fix him by telling him that unless he acknowledges blame, his guilt would haunt him forever. Nixon had come for the interviews with the hope of restoring his reputation to Americans but left a relieved man after acknowledging he deserved blame.

Works Cited Guardian. Frost/Nixon. 2008. Web . 02 August 2011.

IMDB. Frost/Nixon. 2008. Web.


Illegal Immigration: Views of Policy Makers, Media and General Public Research Paper best essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Political Debate on Immigration

Media Representation

Public Opinion


Works Cited

Introduction Illegal immigration into the U.S. is a billion dollar question that has fueled considerable public debate within the country in the past few years due the inherent social and economic costs that illegal immigration places on the U.S. government. Estimates from the Center of Immigration Studies within the U.S. place the total illegal alien population within the country at 11 to 13 million people, a number which continues to rise over the past couple of years (Hanson et al., 73).

While originally the U.S. used to welcome immigrants and distinguished itself as a melting pot of cultures, harsh economic realities and strained government systems have resulted in stricter immigration policies being put into effect in order to reduce the number of immigrants into the country (Cassidy, 25).

This is actually a logical move on the part of the U.S government since the country only has a finite amount of social support systems and resources to be able to take care of its current population and as such cannot support constant influxes of thousands of immigrants into the country on a yearly basis (GREENBLATT, 12).

Unfortunately, such policies have inadvertently resulted in people turning towards the use of illegal immigration into the country, seeking the potential luxuries of “the American Way of Life” as being far better than the situations they face in their home countries. The end result is an influx of literally thousands of illegal immigrants into the U.S. with most of them coming from Mexico and South American countries.

Estimates from FAIR (Federation for American Immigration Reform) place the total cost of illegal immigration on American taxpayers as $113 billion year as a direct result of illegal immigrants utilizing state services such as educational institutions, medical care, social services and a variety of other programs that are meant to benefit American citizens but wind up benefitting illegal immigrants as well despite few illegal immigrants actually paying into the system (Hanson et al., 73).

From this it can be stated that, illegal immigration places a substantial burden on the U.S. government and as such the practice should not be tolerated due to its illegal nature which needlessly burdens the U.S. government. It is based on this that this paper will explore the views of policy makers, the media and the general public in order to gain a better understanding of illegal immigration and examine both sides of the debate.

Political Debate on Immigration Currently there are two sides to the debate on illegal immigration one is to grant amnesty to illegal immigrants and grant them the ability to apply for citizenship while the other is a decidedly harsher strategy where illegal immigrants that are caught within the country are subsequently detained, jailed and then subsequently deported back to their home countries.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More States such as Arizona have taken the latter approach towards dealing with immigration as seen in its implementation of strict identity checks which border on racism in order to confirm whether an individual is an illegal alien or not (Thornburgh, 38). Such strategies are concerned with limiting two aspects related to illegal immigration namely the increased rates of crime within states that are attributed to illegal aliens as well as the subsequent drain on state resources that illegal aliens impose.

By taking a harsher stance on the issue it is believed that illegal aliens would be discouraged to even attempt migrating into the U.S. Unfortunately, what this strategy fails to take into consideration is the fact that despite the implementation of harsher rules on illegal immigration this has not discouraged foreign nationals from entering into the U.S. illegally due to the supposedly better conditions that exist within the country.

On the other side of the political debate is stance that allows illegal immigrants to work legally within the country and work towards citizenship at a later date (AVENDAÑO


Role of Religion in Public Life (Church and State) Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

The concept of separation between religion and government has been adopted by several nations to varying degrees. This is in regard to the applicable legal institutions and prevailing views towards the actual role of religion in different countries. In some countries, these institutions are closely interconnected.

The variations exist in the level of religious freedom, tolerance and interrelatedness to secular political and financial ties. Questions have been raised over the extent to which a government should interfere with religious practices within a country. In my opinion, religious freedom and freedom for worship should be guaranteed in the constitution of any nation. The government should only interfere with a religious practice of a particular religion only if it finds a convincing reason to do so.

Religious practices differ across different religions. These variations in practices may sometimes create conflict in the society or may go against the laws of the land established to ensure peaceful co-existence. Such religious practices which can disrupt peace or smooth co-existence in the country can be restricted by the government. However, these restrictions to religious freedom need to be neutral and should be applied equally to all persons.

For example, in 1990, a case was brought before the US Supreme Court (Employment Division v. Smith), where a native person was involved in smoking a hallucinogenic substance as part of his religious tradition (Ontario Consultants on Religious Tolerance 3). Such religious practices may be dangerous to a nation if we take a look at its long-term impacts. Other individuals with evil minds who smoke the substance can easily join the religion since they are protected by the right to worship which include such practices.

In some instances, this has been the foundation of cults which in most cases terrorize the public and disrupt peace in the country. It is always easy to convince people, particularly the youth when they are under the influence of drugs to involve in activities which cause harm to the public.

The government therefore should have the authority to monitor the activities of such religions which come up with practices parallel to any normal societal life or what it considers illegal. It has to adopt a method that results in minimal interference with religious freedom of societies, organizations or individuals (Enyedi, and Madeley, 203). Such fairness in treatment is also guaranteed in the US Religious Freedom Act of 1993.

The government has to accept all religions equally. There are instances where the government should just impose special requirements and not ban the religious activities. For example, what the government of France has done, banning Muslim women from covering their faces in public, could have been better solved if they were to be required to remove the covering in security sensitive places.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Interference with religious practices of a particular religion is also important whenever the government proves that certain practices of the religion is bound to lead to religious conflict or violence. Religiously-motivated violence, terrorism, murder and genocide have often been felt in various parts of the world. The government should have the authority to stop or ban religious teachings which are characterized by hate, intolerance, anger, superiority and arrogance.

Religious extremists have often spread hate messages to innocent individuals and this sometimes lead to religious intolerance that has driven religious fanatics to kill innocent people. Such mass murder or terrorist activities have been experienced in New York (September 11), Sudan, Turkey, Bosnia among other countries. Nigeria is among the countries which have experienced serious religious wars.

In 2010, the US government together with the government of Kenya stopped Al-Faisal, a Muslim preacher, from carrying out in any religious activities in Kenya. It was discovered that the preacher’s teachings comprised hate messages which could have caused religious intolerance, and as a result, he was deported back to his country, Jamaica.

This shows just how important a government’s intervention in certain religious activities is important. However, in such cases, the individuals creating such tensions are the ones who are supposed to be dealt with and not the religion. Extremists profoundly communicate intolerant viewpoints against other religions, which are meant to fuel attacks on individuals who hold different beliefs.

The government has a role to play in preventing religiously-motivated attacks on innocent citizens. The government has to come in and restrict oppression and denigration of individuals who belong to other religions. It has to develop policies which refrain individuals from comparing practices and beliefs of other religions with an intention of negatively criticizing the opposing religion.

Lack of interference by the governments could lead to religious wars such as those experienced during the early time of the Roman Catholic ,when the pope organized for the massacre of Muslims and Turks, who were interfering with religious practices of Roman Catholics in Jerusalem and the Holy City (Arnold 13).

The government also needs to have authority to intervene in situations where the religious practices of an individual interferes with that of another, who for some reasons, can not defend himself/herself. The government has to step in when religious activities of a religious group harm others.

We will write a custom Essay on Role of Religion in Public Life (Church and State) specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For example, when a parent refuses to allow nurses to immunize his or her child against a disease, citing religion, the government has to employ a method that will ensure that the child’s right to life is not violated. In that case, the government has to find a way of talking to the parent to agree to the medical treatment since the child can not speak for him/herself.

While ensuring peaceful co-existence between different religions, it has to allow each person to change his/her religion or belief as he or she wishes (Jefferson 3). It should also permit people from a different religion to associate with others from different religion and to express their beliefs freely. Many countries such as Greece, China and several Muslim countries have often restricted missionary activities by some religions (Iran Human Rights Documentation Center 17). These countries do not allow certain religions to hold public crusades.

This is a violation of human rights of such individuals since these countries have not found any compelling reason to stop them from carrying out their religious activities. This denies citizens of such countries the freedom to change their religion. Such interference also seeks to preserve power as well as believe in a certain religion.

Religion forms a fundamental part of human life and the society as a whole. Freedom of religion and religious practices should therefore be guaranteed in the constitution. However, due to the need for unity in diversity and peaceful co-existence in the multi-religious society, the government has to intervene in situations which could disrupt peace and harmony in the country.

Works Cited Arnold, Jack. Church History: The Height and Decline of the Papacy (1073-1517). Medieval Church History, part 3. IIIM Magazine Online, 1, no. 33 (17 October, 1999). Web.

Enyedi, Zsolt and Madeley, John (2003). Church and state in contemporary Europe: the chimera of neutrality. Philadelphia PA: Psychology Press.

Iran Human Rights Documentation Center. A Faith Denied: The Persecution of the Baha’is of Iran. 2007. Web.

Jefferson, Thomas. Jefferson’s Letter to the Danbury Baptists. Washington DC: U.S. Library of Congress. 1802. Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Role of Religion in Public Life (Church and State) by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Ontario Consultants on Religious Tolerance. The US Government vs Individual Religious freedom in the US. Religious Tolerance Organization, 2011. Web.


Critical Study of Ikuru and the Death of Ivan Ilyich Essay essay help free

Table of Contents Introduction

Enlightenment Moment for Watanabe

Enlightenment Moment for Ivan Ilyich


Works Cited

Introduction Ikuru is a film in current Japan revealing the plight of Kanji Watanabe, a servant in public service who discovers he is on the brink of death since he is a victim of terminal cancer. Watanabe discovers that his life has lost meaning and wants to derive a meaning out of it within the few days that he has to live.

The lead character in this film who is Watanabe is similar to Ivan Ilyich who is a lead character in the novel The Death of Ivan Ilyich. Both characters reach a point of enlightenment in their lives and discover that they have never lived when they are almost dying. This essay will look at the points of enlightenment for both Watanabe and Ivan Ilyich.

Enlightenment Moment for Watanabe The title of the film Ikiru is a Japanese word for life. The film consists of two sections one of them being a show of how useless the life of Watanabe has become. This is occasioned by his association with a group from the society that is fighting for unused piece of land with officials from the government.

The battle between this group and government officials leads to wastage of a lot of time as they deal with the complicated systems of law. The group is exposed to many frustrations until they are taken back to the starting point. By the time they are done with their struggles, the time of Watanabe being in office has expired and he begins endeavors of seeking treatment for his deadly medical condition (Jawayeera 3).

The futility of the life Watanabe has lived is explored through the relationship he has with his son when he finds out that he is suffering from cancer. The point of enlightenment for Watanabe is not very fruitful since it acts as a great failure.

When he becomes enlightened and discovers his condition, he starts looking for fulfillment in his remaining life and at this point he looks for a novelist. Watanabe wants the novelist to give him tips on what a good life encompasses and he is informed of some of the bad things in Japan that he is supposed to distance himself from.

The list of these vices includes dance places, drinking alcohol, clubs where strippers are found among other undesirable places. However much Watanabe tries to find solace in the teachings he gets from the novelist, life to him remains as unsatisfying as ever and his quest continues since he is now enlightened (Jawayeera 6).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The enlightenment of Watanabe continues when he is involved with a little girl working in his office. The young lady has approached Watanabe because she wants him to sign a document that will enable her move from her current job to a new job. This encounter with the young girl causes Watanabe to become obsessed with the young lady. Watanabe cannot express himself well and finds a lot of trouble with this little girl.

When Watanabe realizes that he has cancer, this turns out to be another turning point of enlightenment (Jawayeera 8). While in a bar, he reveals to a stranger that he really wants to spend good time only that he does not know how to utilize the money he has. The stranger agrees to take Watanabe to different places such as dance halls where he enjoys himself because he has known that life is short. In one of the clubs, he even requests a song that affirms this truth that has just dawned on him.

Watanabe had worked for many years at the city Hall but for all these years, he had not achieved anything. As the chief of his section in the office, he had piles of papers on his table and all he had to do was to stamp them. The opening shot in the movie is an enlightenment moment for Watanabe where it is found out that he has Gastric cancer but he does not know.

He just goes through his normal activities in life oblivious of any dangerous condition he might be suffering from. While in the office of his doctor, the enlightenment for Watanabe continues after a patient carelessly shouts that he is suffering from stomach cancer. When the doctor repeats the words of the other patient, Watanabe guesses that he has few days to live and becomes quiet and worried.

Enlightenment Moment for Ivan Ilyich The death of Ivan Ilyich is a true portrayal of the people of Russia and their Society. Ivan Ilyich who is the hero in the story is an optimistic character who finds himself trapped in desires that later plunge him in a lot of suffering. He later tries hard to come out of the situations that have exposed him to great suffering by looking back at his past life.

The reader can identify with Ivan who is a young man from the middle class with a strong passion for success and an insatiable desire to be enlightened spiritually. He is engaged in a life of immensurable luxury which is very expensive. As the novel begins, we see the death of Ivan which is followed by revelation of the cynical nature of his wife and close friends.

Ivan lived a life of luxury until he was involved in an accident that caused injuries to him, an event that caused him to start serious introspection of his life. His life was deemed a life of propriety but after this incident, he only thinks of death. In the last moments of his life that is full of confusion, a ray of light eventually shines into his life.

We will write a custom Essay on Critical Study of Ikuru and the Death of Ivan Ilyich specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The quest for selfish achievements in a world full of skeptical perspectives and the tragedy that can follow only emphasizes the need for embracing spirituality. In the last chapter of the novel, a clear explanation of how finally enlightenment came to Ivan is given.

The moment of enlightenment to Ivan occurs at once and its implication remains constant. Those who were present during his last moments explained that his suffering and pain was with him for additional 2 hours. He gradually stopped gasping as his sound subsided quietly and this signified an end to his mental suffering and physical pain that even the most qualified doctors had failed solve.

Ivan puts the final moments of his enlightenment in writing. He says that it became evident that what had tormented him for long without leaving was disappearing from all sides of his body. When Ivan dies, his colleagues mourn not because they are feeling a sense of loss but their happiness is that his death has created a vacancy that will be of professional gain to them.

The only person who seems to cover this kind of cynicism is Gerasim. Even his wife is not so much bothered by his death as she immediately starts calculating the pension she will get after the death of her husband (Tolstoy 120).

Ivan Ilyich did not take a single moment of reflection in his life till the moment he was staring death in the eyes. This turns out to be a moment of enlightenment for him especially after keenly looking at Gerasim who was a mere peasant and the only person who took care of him when he was about to die. Gerasim tries to explain Ivan the real meaning of life, something his wife and his closest friends had failed to explain to him.

Gerasim was very compassionate and served Ivan selflessly during his last days without complaining because he had accepted that death is an inevitable part of life. Ivan felt so good and at peace for having someone who comforted and took care of him during his last and important moment of enlightenment. He realizes that he had deprived himself something valuable in life, staying close to other people. He realizes that this is the true life and the life of materialism he had lived was false and only deceived him.

Ivan lived without ever questioning the value of the life he lived. As he dies, he considers himself of no worth and this is portrayed through the lives of those who are around him. For instance, his wife seems to blame him always because his sickness has been a bother to her while his daughter Lisa is uncomfortable with his sickness because it interferes with her social life.

They are not connected to the suffering that Ivan goes through but are only driven by self preservation. Their hatred grows as Ivan continues to deteriorate and this is a reflection of the kind of life he lived.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Critical Study of Ikuru and the Death of Ivan Ilyich by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This is explained in the following direct quote from chapter 7 of the novel ,‘How it happened it is impossible to say because it came about step by step, unnoticed, but in the third month of Ivan IIyich’s illness, his wife, his daughter, his son, his acquaintances, the doctors, the servants, and above all he himself, were aware that the whole interest he had for other people was whether he would soon vacate his place, and at last release the living from the discomfort caused by his presence and be himself released from his sufferings.’ (Tolstoy 132).

Conclusion The movie Ikiru opens with a low mood but towards the end of the movie there is a lively moment that tries to prevent the light from dying. Watanabe retires to his home and puts covers himself with a blanket as he cries bitterly. He regrets his life after the realization that he must die. However, what is most painful is not that he has to die but that he has never lived.

He confesses to the stranger that for all the years he has lived he has lived for nothing. Similarly, in the novel Death of Ivan Ilyich there is also a moment of enlightenment. Ivan Ilyich has lived a materialistic nature and never took time to reflect on his life. When he is very sick and nobody wants to be there for him, this is when he gets the assistance of a peasant known as Gerasimi. Just like Watanabe, he discovers that he had wasted his whole life and could not do anything about.

Works Cited Jawayeera, Shan. Ikiru. Web. n.d. 01 August 2011.

Tolstoy, Leo. The Death of Ivan Ilyich. New York: Kessinger Publishing, 2004. Print


Globalization Effects on Food Industry, Trading, Education Research Paper essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Trading and commerce

Eating habits and industries

Education and knowledge sharing


Reference List

Introduction Globalization is an international integration of various aspects such as economic, advancement of technology, culture, and political influence of individual countries into a one single society. For a long period, globalization has changed the world outlook into a positive way. It has been a long journey for globalization to be what it is today. The process has taken five centuries, and five major stages for it to develop (Mabogunje, 2002).

This research paper will focus on how globalization has affected various sectors like food industry, trading, education, and the information technology in the developing nations. Although globalization has been associated with a positive move internationally like advancement of technology, there are other shortcomings associated with it like poor eating habits. Globalization has made positive moves in most of the sectors, although it also came with some shortcomings that are outweighed by its benefits.

Trading and commerce In most of the developing nations, the level of trading has been very disadvantaged due to limitations of some key aspects of commerce like the infrastructure and other trade barriers. Through globalization, an increment of worldwide markets have been noted, where the developing countries can now access the foreign goods and services (Mabogunje, 2002).

The major benefit enjoyed by the developing nations is the capability to import the raw materials from the industrially developed countries, to facilitate the production of goods required in the country. Through the eradication of various barriers of trade, the finally processed goods can be exported in other nations to earn the country some income.

This expansion of trade in the developing nations has also resulted to creation of more employment opportunities for the youth hence reducing the idleness that brings about crimes. Within the last fifty years, there is a great improvement in the movement of the goods and services both inside and among various nations.

The international trade has developed rapidly through the efforts of globalization (Mabogunje, 2002). Another facilitator of trade in the developing countries is the impact of globalization on the financial sectors. These countries can now have access to funds through asking for loans from other countries. This was noted through the improvement of national currencies trade, which was meant to support the growing levels of trade and investment.

Eating habits and industries Globalization in the developing nations has come up with bad eating habits due to easy exportation of foods that increases the caloric intake, without much activities of burning those calories (Hastings, Thiel,


Transfer of Training: Concept and Challenges Report essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Transfer of Training

Transfer of Training: Challenges


Reference List

Introduction Transfer of training is not a new concept but has been there as long as human beings have worked. It can be defined as the ability of an individual or trainees to apply the acquired skills, knowledge as well as behavior in different situations. It could also be termed as the degree to which trainees put into practice (in jobs) the attitudes, behaviors, skills and knowledge they acquired through training.

This is a very crucial aspect that should be enhanced for an organization to prosper through making good use of the potential possessed by employees for the purpose of achieving success and profitability (Broad, 2005). This piece of work looks at the concept of transfer of training with much emphasis being given to the factors that play a role in the success of the process and the challenges involved.

Transfer of Training The process of transfer of training is complex but essential and should therefore be handled with a lot of concern since it determines the performance of employees in an organization to a very great extent. There are various factors that determine the degree of success of the process of transfer of training, some of them being; training design, the characteristics of individual trainee as well as environmental and situation in which training and transfer takes place.

Training design and trainee characteristics usually have a direct impact while the context of training and transfer usually affect the process in a rather indirect manner. An effective training design facilitates transfer of training and vice versa. The training design can be made effective by making sure that the training programs are in line with an organization’s goals and objectives.

The trainee’s learning outcomes should also be clearly stipulated in accordance to workplace expectations. Characteristic of individual participants could be enhanced through effective training, selection as well as induction into an organization which enhance adaptability. The workplace environment should always foster transfer of training. The training environment should be in line with the workplace environment to avoid conflict that may hinder smooth transfer of training (Koster, 2007).

Transfer of Training: Challenges The process of transfer of training is not usually smooth but rather faced with some challenges, which should be handled to make it a success. Some of the challenges associated with transfer of training include; negative attitudes of the trainees where they are not ready/ confident to easily apply what they have learnt, conflicting working environments where the work place policies are quite different from what was taught during training and poor policies that do not foster smooth transfer of training.

Some of the ways through which the challenges can be eliminated include stipulating clear procedures, roles and responsibilities during training, provision of aids on the job, enhancing communication, engaging the new employees in the organizations activities to motivate them to apply their skills and provision of incentives to encourage hard work and better performance (Holton and Baldwin, 2003).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Conclusion It is evident that the process of transfer of training is very crucial and its success determines an individual’s progress and hence that of the organization at large. It is therefore advisable that every effort is taken so as to ensure that trainees are able to put what they have acquired through training programs into practice in an effective manner as this have a stake in determining the performance of the trainees in the organization even in future.

Reference List Broad, L.M. (2005). Beyond Transfer Of Training: Engaging Systems To Improve Performance. New York: John Wiley and Sons.

Holton, F.E. and Baldwin T.T. (2003). Improving Learning Transfer in Organizations. New York: John Wiley and Sons.

Koster, M. (2007). The Transfer of Training into the Work Environment – a Socio-cultural Approach. Marienstrasse: GRIN Verlag


Matthew 6: 24-30 Essay (Critical Writing) cheap essay help

Introduction/ Thesis statement The gospel of Matthew is a book that alludes to the Old Testament books and other books from the New Testament, which had preached the coming and the works of Jesus Christ. Though the book has about three divisions, chapter six, verses twenty four to thirty (Matthew 6:24-34), enormously condemns worship of wealth due to greediness because such worship competes with the true worship of the sovereign Lord. According to Matthew, Jesus used parables, narratives, and miracles to pass his message to the people.

Moreover, he openly condemned ungodly practices like wealth possession at the expense of the faith of an individual. Matthew chose words with precision to ensure that all Christians, even children, clearly understood the message in the sermon. With application of literary elements like symbols and similes among others, Jesus convinced people to worship God and not wealth.

Although the bible has different authors, some of the stories are parallel or similar especially in the Gospels, which are the case with Matthew, John, and Luke. Though translated from Greek, the book of Matthew (Matthew 6:24-30) elaborates the themes of faith or trust, materialism (wealth, possessions and greediness) and Christianity, which ultimately separate man from God.

The passage translation Originally, Matthew 6:24-30 was in Greek, which led to different translations according to personal understanding of the text or message. Therefore, the following is the personal translation from the Greek language and New International Version (NIV). ““No one can serve two masters.

Either you will hate the one and love the other, or you will be devoted to the one and despise the other. You cannot serve both God and money. 25 “Therefore I tell you, do not worry about your life, what you will eat or drink; or about your body, what you will wear. Is not life more than food and the body more than clothes? 26 Look at the birds of the air; they do not sow, reap, or store away in barns, and yet your heavenly Father feeds them.

Are you not valuable than they are? 27 Can any one of you by worrying add a single hour to your life? 28 “And why do you worry about clothes? See how the flowers of the field grow. They do not labor or spin. 29 Yet I tell you that not even Solomon in his entire splendor was dressed like one of these. 30 If that is how God clothes the grass of the field, which is here today and tomorrow is thrown into the fire, will he not much more clothe you—you of little faith?” (Matthew 6: 24-30 New international Version Bible).

Choice of words in the translation in comparison to others The above translation may differ slightly from the Greek version due to the choice of words, which may have a slight different meaning. Greek is not as popular as English; therefore, the use of simple English verbs, phrases or words enables students or readers who are non-native speakers to study effectively.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The words are simple, straightforward, and unsophisticated to enable anyone, even a child, to understand the message in the text. Due to simplicity, readers do not have to refer or infer to the original text in Greek or to the bible dictionary to get the meaning of the complex words in the text.

Moreover, the interpretation of the message is easier due to the simplicity of the words; therefore, the themes like trust and faith are clear. The bible is a complex and enormous book that needs clarity of words; thus, simple words not only attract the readers, but also encourage them to read on.

As aforementioned, English is a worldwide spoken language and unsophisticated language or choice of words enables all new learners to understand clearly the words including the message without the need of an instructor or a teacher for interpretation. Words like “single cubit” are complex words that will force a reader to use a dictionary. Therefore, I opted to use the word “increase your earthly survival time” to bring out the clarity that is lacking in the original text.

The other word is “masters”, which I replaced with “people or individual” for easier understanding. The word ‘masters’ might have two meanings viz. a leader or a boss; therefore, it may confuse the reader. However, a simplified word like ‘person’ cannot have multiple meanings leading to clarity.

I also used the word “richness” instead of “splendor” when describing King Solomon’s wealth to elaborate the text or message. Therefore, the simple choice of words as rich, people, and individual over others like Masters and splendor not only promotes easier understanding of the verses, but also attract new English learner to read and understand the sermon.

The literary elements used in the passage Although the bible has been in existence for many years, Matthew explicitly used different literary elements to elaborate and cite the preaching of Jesus as it is the case in chapter six. According to Matthew, symbolism is one of the major elements applied by Jesus during his preaching. For instance, He used clothes, food, and money among other items during his preaching. According to Jesus, the aforementioned items connoted wealth, greediness, and other worldly possessions that most people fight and struggle to achieve.

Even though Jesus did not condemn directly the issue of amassing wealth, the items he mentioned contribute to wealth, which eventually separate man from God. Money is a symbol of wealth, power, and luxury and thus anybody focusing on money is likely to forget about the existence of God in his or her life.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Matthew 6: 24-30 specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More From the preaching of Jesus about wealth and God, it is evident that, in the process of amassing riches, an individual commits a number of sins. Such deeds not only diminish his or her faith, but may also end up shortening his or her lifespan. On the other hand, Jesus used wild birds, flowers, and grasses, which are symbols of poverty.

True to Jesus’ words, birds, flowers, and grass do not have houses, own land, money, or clothes; nevertheless, they eventually live a happy life, something that majority of human beings lack. Jesus used such symbols to warn people of the futility of chasing earthly possessions at the expense of knowing and revering their Creator.

Additionally, the body is a symbol of life and happiness; therefore, people who take care of their body or life assume God cannot do so. For anybody to live a longer life on earth, he or she should have faith in God and not work hard to prolong it. Finally, Solomon was a famous sagacious rich King; he is a symbol of wealth. However, Solomon’s life did not shine, as it is the case with the birds.

When Jesus used Solomon as a symbol of wealth, he meant to discourage people from struggling or worrying about wealth, which separates them from God. However, slightly complex, symbols motivate the readers to reflect and meditate on the message and understand it fully. To sum it all, Jesus used different elements of work to not only attract his listeners, but also to encourage them to trust in God.

The second literary element is narration, which elaborates Jesus’ preaching. He gives a story on a servant with two masters before underscoring the inability to serve them equally. A servant is mostly a poor person struggling to survive and by having a divided attention, s/he will do a shoddy or poor work.

The master will have to dismiss such a servant for inefficient work and the same story applies to anybody struggling to work for earthly possessions. The use of narration is to bring out simplicity in a bid to clarify the intended message or sermon. The second story is about birds, their lifestyles, and happy life void of anxiety. The third story is about wild flowers and grass, which shine but do not struggle to gain wealth.

Though living in wild habitat, flowers and grasses worry less about what might happen the following day. Through narration, Jesus was able to use common examples that are visible and easy to understand; thus clarifying his preaching .The third literary element is a simile, which compares clothes to flowers. “Not even King Solomon with all his richness dressed like flowers” (Matthew 6: 29).

Though not tended, flowers outshine clothes, which need skill and precision to make and even the inherent beauty of flowers outshines the clothes of a rich man. Therefore, the use of a simile in his comparison elaborates and clarifies the intended message. The simile gives a direct comparison to physical, visible, and tangible items thus making it easier for anybody to interpret the message.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Matthew 6: 24-30 by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The different translations of the words ‘single cubit’ In the old books, the phrase “single cubit” is a bit complex when compared to my translation, which I have replaced with “extends earthly survival with one hour.” conventionally, an adult stops growing in height at the age of twenty-two.

Therefore, he or she has to read the text with concern and deep reflection to understand the hidden meaning, which is to increase one’s lifespan. On the other hand, the best choice of words and other literary forms is simple, open, and clear; no complex words in the translation. Moreover, simple forms of literary choices also promote clarity and easier interpretation of the text or message.

According to the teachings of Jesus in the book of John, the word “food” has different or symbolic meaning as opposed to my periscope. According to John, Jesus used the word food not to mean literary eating, but to imply spiritual nourishment.

In John, Jesus says, “My food, is to do the will of him who sent me and to finish his work” (John 4:31-36). Therefore, according to Jesus, his food was to nourish spiritually all people and the accomplishment of his earthly work is his ‘food’. Although Jesus and his disciples were hungry, he did not allow them to look for food until he was done with his preaching.

The harvests from the fields are useless if nobody listens to the preaching of Jesus. When compared to Matthew, the word “food” has different meaning in the two books. While the book of Matthew literary uses ‘food’ to imply food for body nourishment or nutrients, the book of John uses the same to imply spiritual and Godly nourishment.

Nevertheless, the apostle Luke uses the word ‘food’ when referring to the miracles of Jesus. In the book of Luke, the word ‘food’ has the literary meaning of eating for body growth (Luke 9:13). Though used in different books, both Luke and Matthew refer to ‘food’ as necessity for body nutrients, while in John it means listening to God’s word.

The similarity, difference/contradictions of the story with other Gospels The story of ‘God and Possessions’ is also similar to the story of ‘trust in God’ in the book of Luke 12:22-29. In the two texts, Jesus is asking his disciples not to worry about wealth especially food, clothes, and other forms of possessions at the expense of their spiritual wellbeing.

The two stories are also similar because the apostle Luke uses wild flowers and grass to symbolize poverty. In the same way, he also alludes to the Old Testament on the lifestyle of King Solomon in that, despite being rich, Solomon’s clothes were not as shinny as the flowers of the field.

Therefore, the two stories have the same literary elements and thus the same meaning. The two disciples used the element of narration to emphasize the ministry work of Jesus. Additionally, though slightly different, the simile used in both stories is similar and thus has a similar meaning. The themes of the stories are same whereby trust, faith, Christianity, and wealth are the main themes highlighted. On the other hand, there is a slight difference because instead of using birds, Luke uses a cow as a symbol to elaborate his message.

In addition, Luke does not start with a story about a servant with two masters; thus, slightly differs with the book of Matthew. The book of Luke also highlights the theme of management, which lacks in the book of Matthew. The two stories also contradict because, while Matthew uses ‘bird’, John uses ‘cow’ to symbolically mean poverty yet both of them were the disciples of Jesus who listened the same story at the same time.

Therefore, Jesus preached a similar story to the same audience but at different times, which led to the difference especially in the symbols used. Similarly, the commencement of the story is not in the same way because while Luke omits some of the aspects, Matthew adds some words or phrases that are missing in Luke’s text thus bringing out the contradiction or difference.

Significance of the pericope to the First audience During the times of Jesus, most people struggled to amerce wealth, which made them to commit sins while others decided to worship their wealth and not God. Eventually, Jesus had to condemn the people’s act of leading to the emergence of the above pericope.

Because of the tough times and the need to make ends meet, the first audience to listen the sermon on the above pericope was not only surprised but also confused. Everybody has to work in order to meet his or her daily needs but Jesus was urging them to forget about that and concentrate on God (Musser Para.3).

Therefore, Jesus compelled Christians to practice the virtues of faith or trust other than doubting God. However, some of the disciples and the followers of Jesus opted to forgo their daily routine jobs like fishing to preach the word of God. The disciples of Jesus had to trust in God for the provision of their daily upkeep thus most of them had to continue to compel Christians to worship God other than wealth or other gods.

Significance of the pericope in the contemporary world Contemporarily, wealth or riches are the essential needs but at the expense of God’s word. Currently, both Christian .Most priests, pastors and other church leaders compete to drive lavish cars or enormous bungalows at the expense of their Christian faith. Some preachers or church leaders/ elders especially of the newly sprouting churches fight for leadership positions in their institutions.

The aim for fighting for the leadership positions is to enable them control church funds (money). On the other hand, “Christians or people who acquire wealth or riches in ungodly ways will definitely pay the price” (Wiersbe “Bile Exposition Commentary set volume 2” 1).

Therefore, Christians should trust or have faith in God thus enabling them to acquire genuine wealth. In addition, most Christians like politicians and other leaders worship either their wealth (vehicles, bodies) or other gods. Some people decide to worship other gods because of the lure of acquiring quick money, which completely separates them from God.

Due to greed, some church leaders accept or give bribes to gain favors. Others people (Christians) either practice politics or are politicians who end up supporting one party or the other. Finally, enmity brews up in most churches or Christians. When Christians practice virtues like equality, trust, faith, mercy and love everybody in the world will be worshipping God. Due to fight for power, money and other forms riches kill, fornicate, or even consult witch doctors thus separating them from God.

Eventually people or Christians are not only living a devilish lifestyle but also die prematurely. According to Wiersbe “Bile Exposition Commentary set volume 1”, people or Christians who trust God for their daily provisions live both a longer and peaceful life (15). Therefore, the above pericope preaches or ministers to both Christians and non-Christians to practice Godly virtues. Thusly, the world will be a better place to be if wealth is not a priority among Christians.

Conclusion In Summary, the book of Matthew is an entity in the bible that preaches the desire of Jesus. Jesus always wanted Christians to practice Faith and trust in God for their everyday survival. Although the pericope is in many translations, the message is the same. The apostles of Jesus were among the early Christians or audience to hear the above pericope. Most of them opted to follow Christ and his preaching and they had to forgo their jobs or family. Contemporarily, few Christians practice the message in the above pericope.

Besides worshipping wealth, they also adore other god apart from the sovereign mainly due to greed. Some even kill or fight due to property ownerships but if they adhere to the message in the above pericope, nobody in the world will die or fight over wealth. Finally, according to the pericope God is the provider of all earthly riches therefore anybody who struggles singly to acquire wealth will end up as a pauper.

Works Cited Musser, Donald. An introduction to the Bible revised edition. Nashville: Abingdon, 2001.

New international Version Bible, 1999. Web. < 4:31-36


Tillich theory of art Term Paper essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Autonomy


Heteronomy and autonomy


Work Cited

The concept and perception of depth in art is the ability of a piece of work to explore more than two dimensions. In narratives it is the ability of a product of art to interrogate and appeal to more than the visible dimension. It is the ability of the narrator to move in and out of several realms of thought and sight.

The extent to which a narrative world appeals to this aspect determines the quality and persistence of the piece of work. The depth dimension functions to inspire a since of ambiguity and length to the narrative (Purves and Lotto 43-58). It develops and sustains a curious interest in its audience which is the basis and object of quality and objectivity in as far as the narration is concerned.

The aspect of depth in art creates a widow for the creator of the piece to develop a several themes from the same piece with the help of more than one dimension. The piece of art therefore sways between moods while maintaining a consistent and tolerable collection of activities and reflections within the piece. (Stiles and Selz 40-56). The depth in a photo for instance inspires a more realistic and believable concept of the photo.

Tillich’s theory is inspired by the general human propensity to consider art as a celebration of the obvious human dignity or in a strict sense an appreciation of human nature and reality. This basic notion has formed the foundation of the works of several other related theorists of Tillich’s era.

Ramachandran and Blakeslee (45-90) for instance based their theory on the hypothesis of brain response to pieces of art. Their research being the first of this nature, gave way to a host of other similar researches that have come to the conclusion that the appreciation of art depends on the constituent elements in the piece of art.

This marks the beginning of Tillich’s argument that the quality of a piece of art relies heavily on its ability to employ the various artistic tools and mechanisms at its disposure. The objective cause of any piece of work is not merely to reflect or masquerade mere reality. This is too simple a task for the complex phenomenon of art that can be articulated by any piece of information or sketch (Heidegger 23-70)

The difference between any piece of information and a work of art is the ability of art to distort, enhance and indeed transcend reality all of which are elements of depth in a piece (Wollheim 1).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Zeki notes categorically that it is not a mere coincidence that an artist’s ability to distract the irrelevant features such as the depth dimension of his art and vividly describes the irrelevant features is similar and identical to what the relevant aspects have evolved to do.

This in narratives for instance the depth dimension goes an extra mile in transcending reality to serve its actual cause in a more interesting version that has more to offer as compared to a plain realistic piece of work(5-20).

Zekis research on the response of rats showed that if a rat is taught to differentiate a square and a rectangle, with a reward for a rectangle it learns to respond more promptly to the rectangle than the square. Interestingly the response of the rat to a longer rectangle is much higher than to the normal size rectangle (20 -45). This supports the conception of the depth dimension in Tillich’s theory as a tool of cognitive response.

Tillich’s theory of art embraces this aspect of depth by analyzing the role and relevance of depth in artwork. Inspired by the theological mindset and thinking he interrogates the concept of depth in narratives and similar art works and constructs a hypothesis that great art reflects a conscious awareness of the problem associated with the loss of the dimension of depth

Depth as an element of art plays an important role in the definition and translation of the message of the artist. In narratives the depth dimension shapes the content and conveys the message to the audience in a specific line of interest. Since Tillich’s first attempt at this line of thought, there has been very little attention on the issue and this therefore presents an interesting and relevant research gap that I wish to address in my research. I will discuss the importance Tillich’s approach and the relevance it has to various narrator works (Manning 153 -163).

The research takes an idealist metaphysical perspective by interrogating the various aspects of the narrative that appeal to the depth dimension based on Tillich’s philosophy of art.

This functions to evaluate the value and importance of the depth dimension and document the extent to which various narrators of the century vividly or actually employed this tool in the formulation and creation of their pieces of work. This will also allow the contemporary narrators to consider employing and exploiting the value of the depth dimension in their art works.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Tillich theory of art specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Autonomy Tillich’s philosophy defines autonomy as the individual’s compliance with the personal law of reason. This goes entirely contrary to the general reference of autonomy as the individual independence from a law. The ability of a piece of art to resist the imminent concerns of being conditioned to a specific timeline environment or even shape explains the autonomous character of the item of art.

In effect, the ability of a narrative to generate autonomous reason beyond the basic sense of being able to exercise free will in as far as expressing individual and personal opinion but in the rebellious potential of the narrative to engage in a disobedience of authority and defiance of the fundamental structures and rules inspires a depth dimension. An autonomous culture therefore is one that engages a slim relation between the cultural and religious constructs of theoretical and practical rationality.

The narrative builds on an attractive friendly and acceptable character that falls in line with the religious and cultural demands. He is to be contrasted with a rather compliant but autonomous friend who seeks to address a societal injustice of economic imbalance that cannot be solved by mere expression despite his clear freedom to do so in the hope of finding consolation or revival.

Pâpabuddhi therefore chooses to formulate a rebellious plan that would see him cheat his friend Dharmabuddhi into accepting to join hands to earn a fortune. Going against both culture and religion, he cheats his way to the total wealth and fortune by placing the blame on the socially accepted friend and acquires the wealth to himself.

This aspect of the narrative engages the reader into an independent yet rebellious stream of thought that goes towards not only generating a reaction but also developing a layer of the depth dimension and giving the reader another reason to align their interest.

Heteronomy According to Tillich’s philosophy the ability of a piece of art to challenge the independence of autonomous reason and maintain a consistent ability to command constructs beyond the grasp of reality and its shape allows the piece to maintain a margin of consciousness of the depth dimension of a piece of art. The depth dimension is therefore not conceived as a contest between reason and non-reason but as a conflict of reason it’s self.

Heteronomy therefore acts to react to any autonomous sense of reasoning that confines the depth of the piece of art and allows the piece of art to maintain a conscious distance between depth and complexity in a narrative. The engaging conflict of interest between religion and culture for instance challenges the reader’s ability to accommodate a conflict of morals and a choice of evils that in reality is only a matter of a conflict of reasoning.

The narrative engages the reader in a choice of cultural values of honesty and good faith in sharp contrast to the religious autonomous requirements for unfettered loyalty to friends and family. Dharmabuddhi represents the cultural perfection of a good person while his friend is represented as the exact opposite and still the narrator maintains an even impression of close friendship.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Tillich theory of art by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This comes in as the first layer of depth and goes to invite the reader to take a stand from the beginning. It creates the first layer of bias by aligning the reader to favor a character in the narrative. The harmony in which Dharmabuddhi and Pâpabuddhi operate and acquire a successful climax develops into the second layer of depth that takes a heteronymous challenge of the ability of two autonomous and independent interest’s ability to cooperate and collaborate to deploy a realistic scene.

The narrative is based on a traditional Indian setting that has religious and cultural ties that work in harmony to motivate the behaviors and attitudes of the society. It centers on the values of two men of different moral standing who are involved treachery. The narrative which is part of a series of Indian fables has a limited since of depth and therefore fails to fundamentally capture the reader or listener due to the straightforward since of narration (Goldstein 120-145).

It however makes attempts to identify with depth by engaging in parables and sayings whose purpose is to diversify the piece to incorporate a variety of other societal conceptions and attributes (Wollheim 456- 490). The narrative transcends the rural and urban setting placing the story on a path of ambition that carries the objective and main themes. The narrative also merges the cultural and theological realms in creating a perspective to the reader.

The narrator makes a conscious identification of the depth dimension by maintaining a margin of safety between the narrator and the reader or listener and the narrator and the reader’s subconscious. This recognition adds value and importance to the narrative and allows the narrator to leave a memorable impression of the story. This research will therefore seek to determine the value that is attached to the depth dimension in any such given narrative or alternative piece of work.

Heteronomy and autonomy The conflict between heteronomy and autonomy in a narrative often forms the climax for the reader and creates the highest point that the depth dimension participates in modeling the narrative.

According to Tillich, this often leads to the destruction of reason, its self and the reaching of a compromise for the acceptance of both autonomy and heteronomy the two aspects bear their own depths that maintain and sustain the long or short-lived climax that often leads to the end of the narrative.

It offers closure to the reader or abandons the reader in order to allow the m to generate their own closures and streams of thought. The narrative therefore bows down to structural laws while still maintaining a close link to the authority and power of its own inexhaustible ground.

Dharmabuddhi clearly loses his share of wealth to the treachery of his friend. The narrative develops the final layer of f depth by ensuring that the reader is frustrated at the eminent danger of termination of the better of the two. It stimulates a conflict of reason that is motivated by injustice and unfairness embodied in the treachery of Pâpabuddhi.

The narrator ensures that a compromise is reaches that settles for the authority of the structural provisions and confines of the autonomous self-interests. It does not mean that it is a just compromise but it settles the conflict anyway. The plan however is not fool proof since Pâpabuddhi is unable to effectively dispose of his accomplice to the treachery. The events that lead to the failing of the plan are partially a contribution of cultural constructs as well as religious interference.

The mimosa tree receives pivot attention as a tool of engaging cultural myth and religious symbolism. It therefore plays a uniting role between these two themes and supports the depth dimension in the narrative. The dialectical blend between these toe concepts allows the narrative to haunt or hurt the reader by breaking a well-established relationship between the reader and Dharmabuddhi

The relevance of this marriage in the contemporary context is that it provides a way forward for the technical reason by exposing the shallow empty and meaningless nature of a narrative without the depth dimension. The harmony between these two constructs ensures that the narrative goes beyond morel teaching by appealing to both the subconscious and sense of reasoning.

It gives the reader a reason to associate and repeat or apply the convictions of the narrative in other situations in real life. It also assures the narrator of attention as well as interest in the narrative from the audience or reader. The emptiness of autonomy alongside the destructive nature of heteronomy forms the attitude and tone of any narrative or contemporary piece of work.

Conclusion Most readers have a general tendency to enjoy narratives that employ a riveting plot that engages reversals revelations alongside innovations in the better part of the reality conception of the storyline. Ashliman’s narrative “Dharmabuddhi and Pâpabuddhi” (1-45) employs a simple plot as the framework and vehicle that conveys and gives substance to the narrative.

This then opens the door to ever-deepening length basic layers of association with the various references resonating with each other in a harmonious dissonance. The depth acts to compete with the attention of the reader from the vivid beginning to the end.

In his theory Tillich proposes that, a good narrative does not just begin to tell the story of a bad person and how bad they are and what bad things they did and how they got caught. It brings in several connected layers of stories and bits of scenes that are allowed to build the final narrative. The theory further recommends that every piece of art must maintain a clear relationship between the heteronymous and autonomous concepts that provide a clear path on which the depth dimension in any piece of work may be developed.

The dialectical interaction between the various factions of a narrative of whichever kind determines to a great extent the chances of success to the audience readers or participants in delivering the objects and propositions of the artwork. According to the theory the depth dimension in a narrative therefore brings together the various antagonisms in the story and blends them in layers of a dimension. The layers in the dimension should therefore connect with each other to bear a concrete sense of completeness.

Work Cited Goldstein, Bruce. Sensation and perception .Pacific Grove CA: Wadsworth. 2002.

Heidegger, Martin. “The Origin of the Work of Art”. Poetry, Language, Thought, Harper Perenniel. 2001. pp 23-70.

Manning, Russell. Tillich’s Theology of Art. ND. Retrieved from

Purves, Dale and Lotto, Beau. Why We See What We Do: An Empirical Theory of Vision. Sunderland, MA: Sinauer Associates. 2003.

Ramachandran, Vilayanur. and Blakeslee, Sandra. Phantoms in the Brain New York: William Morrow and Co. 1998.

Stiles, Kristine and Selz, Peter. eds., Theories and Documents of Contemporary Art. ND.

Wollheim, Richard. Art and its objects. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press (1980) p.1.

Zeki, Sarah. ‘Art and the brain’, Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, 127 (2), pp. 71–104. [1998]. Reprinted in Journal of Consciousness Studies, 6 (6–7), pp. 76–96.


Analyzing The Rhetorical Aspect In Dexter Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Introduction

The Plot

The Audience Reception

Dexter’s Character Development: His Vigilante Appeal

Critical Reception


Works Cited

Introduction Talk about justice and everybody will refer you to a court of law. However, the administration of justice in the modern legal system is currently lacking hence leaving a lot of doubts to the citizens. A criminal walks scot free after a lengthy trial due to lack of evidence but in reality all he requires to win a case is money to hire the most sought out criminal attorney to represent him and he is back in society.

Fortunately, there is always a proviso to any rule hence the establishment of lawless groups that seek to represent the wronged in society. These vigilante groups, as they are famously known, take law into their own hands in an effort to maintain justice. The lawless persons date back to the old days of Robin Hood and they continue to make headlines to date. They operate within their own set laws and though illegal, they act in the interest of the society.

That was the idea behind the famous American Television series, Dexter. Based on the novel by Jeff Lindsay, the series revolves around a forensic analyst working for a police department in Miami. However, he has another life that greatly contradicts his normal career in the police force.

He is a serial killer who trails criminals who have gotten off the hook from the justice system and murders them. The role is well played by the main character Michael Hall acting as Dexter Morgan. This paper will critically analyze the character development of Dexter throughout the series and how it has been used to draw positive feedback from the audience (Frederic and Vandome 12).

The Plot In order to understand Dexter’s character, it is important to look at the plot. Dexter is a story of Dexter Morgan who appears as an easy going and diligent forensic analyst. His colleagues like him including his boss LaGuerta. Surprisingly, nobody is suspicious of him apart from one colleague, Sergeant Doakes, who claims that Dexter appears creepy. The series begins with a flashback of Dexter living with his adopted father, Harry Morgan.

Dexter began showing some sociopathic signs in his behavior at a tender age. Harry, a legendary detective, takes this opportunity to start training him instead of taking him to a mental institution for help. He justifies his actions by arguing that Dexter needs to avenge his mother’s death who was killed in his presence by cold blooded murderers. The training gives Dexter the ‘know how’ of avoiding the long arm of the law after committing a crime.

He follows a specific code that he refers to as the ‘Code of Harry’ to clear any trail that would link him to the crime. However, Dexter is not an ordinary serial killer that we are used to. He only murders criminals who have escaped the long arm of the law in one way or another. More so, he conducts a detailed investigation on his victim to prove that he was guilty of the crime charged (Owen 3).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Audience Reception In the first episode, Dexter admits that he finds satisfaction in killing a man in a cruel way and be home to receive his letters from the letter man. These are words of a dangerous man but surprisingly, the audience loves him. The audience’s reception towards the series was overwhelming and several arguments can be attributed to this.

Maybe the viewers were tired of watching the usual series with possessed transgressive characters going unpunished or that the series provided a different story line that was morally right to the society, yet unlawful. That has not been established but the series has won numerous awards as a result. Ironically, the audience loves the character Dexter, in spite of his outstanding role as a serial killer.

Dexter’s Character Development: His Vigilante Appeal One would wonder why a dangerous character such as Dexter would receive a high liking from his fans instead of spite. He operates outside the legal jurisdiction and ironically, he works in the same police force that upholds the law. This contradicting character appeals to his audience.

A scene in episode one clearly shows his disregard for the law process when the prosecution fails to prove a case against a criminal due to a faulty search warrant used when searching his house. Dexter finds his way into the suspect’s house to search for leading clues and he exclaims loudly in his thoughts that he is glad he does not have to use a search warrant to find what he wants.

When conducting any investigation, he involves the audience who take sheer pleasure at neglecting all possible hindrances that would be encountered in a normal investigation. The audience is thrilled at his skills of picking up a suspect. The audience believes in Dexter’s intuition.

They sit back and enjoy while Dexter mutilates the body and clears off any evidence. The guilt conscience of the audience is washed away with the notion that Dexter is socially right in his actions and he is just doing what the police would be too scared to do. On the other hand, Dexter always finds sufficient evidence to eliminate the suspect and the audience seem to enjoy the action even more.

Dexter’s character does not allow him to be remorseful after committing a crime. This character allows the audience to adapt to the belief that his actions are right and just. He is not an ordinary criminal.

We will write a custom Essay on Analyzing The Rhetorical Aspect In Dexter specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More e follows a code and his actions are morally right according to the society. In episode 5 for example, Dexter trails and murders Jorge Castillo, a human trafficker who kills people for money (Dexter Wiki 5). His wife, Valerie Castillo who is the husband’s accomplice in carrying out the evil deeds is also eliminated by Dexter.

An investigation conducted at the police department exposes her evil deeds and not even the police officers show any remorse. Most of them are more than willing to shake the killer’s hand. The episode seems to contradict its title, ‘Love American Style’ as there is no love portrayed in the entire series. The episode enhances the belief that even the police department appreciates Dexter’s work and would act the same way if they were not tied by the law.

The public shows their support in the scenario which saw Oscar, one of the witnesses during Castillo’s murder, drawing a sketch of the murderer. He makes a sketch of Jesus in place of Dexter. The hilarious comparison between Jesus and Dexter plays a huge role of convincing the audience that Dexter’s actions are morally right.

Throughout the series, it is apparent to the audience that Dexter has a compassionate character, though he vehemently denies he does. Dexter tries to convince the audience, through the voiceovers that he is not a normal human being but his love for his sister, Deb and his girlfriend, Rita tells a different story.

His attempt to strictly follow the ‘Code of Harry’ is ground enough that he loved his father by doing what would have pleased him if he were still alive.

Nevertheless, Dexter does not seem to recognize his capability of loving and does not even bother to understand it. He hates his victims and he is happy when he has accomplished his goal of eliminating them. The audience seems to relate with Dexter’s unique character. He lost all the love that he would have given to the universe after the death of his mother and who can blame him? The society appreciates the fact that certain circumstances in our lives can twist us to adapt to an unusual way of living.

It also brings to light the two sides that exist in our life, the humane and the monstrous side. The humane is more prominent but both sides should be governed by some sort of ethics. The audience therefore is able to relate to the monstrous side of Dexter due to the fact that it is governed by a moral code unlike other serial killers (DePaulo and Wilson 12).

The failure by the police department to make a connection shared by Dexter and his audience justifies the vigilante action. This is evident throughout the series and especially in the first episode when Doakes accuses a rival dealer for double homicide. He is proved wrong when Dexter conducts his private investigation and unearths the dealer’s ex girlfriend as the culprit, nullifying Doakes’ earlier investigation.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Analyzing The Rhetorical Aspect In Dexter by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The ice truck killer incidence on the other hand faults the police department who are convinced that the innocent man was guilty (Dexter Wiki 7). This was not until Dexter exposed the real killer hence saving the innocent man’s life. These episodes win the audience’s hearts as it is clear that the police department puts innocent people behind bars. They support the vigilante actions taken by Dexter to uncover the truth.

What stands out is the audience’s preference of Dexter’s character which by any standard is worse than other characters in the series. A good example is Rita’s husband Paul who the audience fiercely despises. Paul is very abusive, an action that makes Rita miserable. Dexter’s character is worse than Paul’s but the audience root for Dexter (Larson 13).

Critical Reception Though Dexter’s character enjoys a wide range of support from his fans, it is not free from criticism. Critics argue that the reason behind Dexter liking is his provocative nature that makes him appealing. They argue that the series has a high female audience who enjoy watching a sweet and handsome man doing what he does best.

The notion is that females are attracted to handsome bad men. The character has also been criticized for encouraging actual crimes in the society. The recent murder by Mark Twitchell is connected to the character of Dexter. Mark stated that he related to Dexter Morgan. Another culprit, Andrew Conley, stated that he felt like a ‘Dexter’ and he had killed his victim using one of the methods used by Dexter to eliminate his victims (Greene, Reisch and Robinson 24)

Conclusion The series takes a different turn from the usual crime series such as Law and Order and CSI Miami. These series relies only on the police department to uncover a suspect. They are characterized with major hindrances as they have to follow the legal procedures put in place to deal with a suspect.

This is not the case with Dexter which gives him multiple options to seek justice. The audience justifies Dexter’s action by proclaiming that the death of the criminals is ‘Good riddance to bad rubbish’. The series is captivating and sure to make you glued to the seat and engage in the investigation process.

Works Cited DePaulo, Bella and Wilson, Leah. The Psychological of Dexter. USA: BenBella Books Inc., 2010. Print.

Dexter Wiki. Dexter Showtime. 2 August 2011. Print.

Frederic, Miller, Vandome, Agnes and McBrewster. Dexter (TV Series): Dramatic Programming, Pay Television 23 Showtime 26 Dexter Morgan, Michael C. Hall, Serial Killer, Miami Police Department, Bloodstain Pattern Analysis, Emmy Award. New York: Alphascript Publishing. 2010. Print.

Greene, Richard, Reisch, George and Robinson, Rachel. Dexter and Philosophy. New York: Open Court Publishing, 2011. Print.

Larson, Chase. TV: Darkly Dreaming Dexter: Why We Root For A Serial Killer.

Rhombus Online Magazine. 9 February 2011. 2 August 2011. Print.

Owen, Rob. TV Review: ‘Dexter’ is dark humor in shades of gray. Pittsburg Post Gazette. 29 September 2006. 3 August 2011. Print.


Analyzing the role of Virgin Mary in empowering women in Christianity and Islam Essay essay help online

The mass media has always been one of the most powerful tools that shape the opinions of the society concerning certain issues that are of critical importance. This is because the mass media is one of the most powerful agents of socialization as it has the ability to remain in the cognitive processes of the actors, hence influence how they act and interpret the phenomenon.

Thus, mass media shapes what the society is by presenting various aspects such as cultural attributes. However, the media is sometimes biased towards what is considered ideal. This paper seeks to examine the representation of women in the American media. The paper will seek to answer pertinent questions as to whether the representation of women in the American media is biased or it reflects the ideal picture of the American women.

To effectively understand how women are presented in the American media, the paper examines the work of Douglas who retraces her life so that she can bring across how the media presents the American women.

Central to her ideas is that the way the media portrays women is not influenced by the popular cultures that govern women behavior, but the media creates this popular culture that determines behavior. This is done by popularizing what the media considers to be the ideal form of a woman. Due to its huge influence as an agent of socialization, the media further influences women to adapt to this ideal types and thus alters the general view of women.

In the contemporary popular media especially in the advertisement industry, it is evident that what Douglas, (45) views as the setting of the popular belief by the mass media exists as media campaigns give what is thought to be the ideal character of a woman. This induces a mental evaluation process that affects the way women think as they evaluate for themselves how far they are from the ideal types from the ideal type.

Such campaigns have been vital in influencing various issues in the female gender such as the walking styles, styles of dressing as well as hair dressing styles. Therefore, women are either consciously or unconsciously encouraged to strive towards this ideal type due to the popular images that are created by the mass media.

The role of the American media in shaping the cultural identity of women has led to what Douglas refers to as a contradiction of cultures as the influences of the media over the generations have been changing.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In comparisons of how media has influenced the cultural identity of women over time, Douglas (48) notes that the influences of the media during the baby boomers was totally different from the influence of the same towards women’s cultural identity during the era of generation X.

Therefore, she concludes that the media has led to a confused identity in women, a fact that has resulted to culture shocks and cultural diversities among women of different generations.

According to Douglas, while the media concentrated on what women could do and what they could not do during the baby boomers, the media of generation X started to focus on the abilities of women and how women can work just like men can. This led to an ideological shift from viewing a woman as a home caretaker and the concept of modernized woman took the center stage.

Examining the role of the media in the 1960s, Douglas notes that the rise of the ideal modern woman ideology forced many women to strive towards achieving this status. The media played a crucial role during this era as various female oriented programs in the audiovisual and the print media focused on the socially constructed ideal woman.

The emphasis of the modern woman in the media further created the urge for millions of the maturing girls to fit into the new social fitting as they felt that they required being that ideal woman of the television. Going by such cases, the media has had a tremendous role in shaping how women view themselves and how they act towards this ideal type.

According to Douglas, (78), the role of media gained influence towards women liberation in the sixties as thousands of baby boomers entered teenage hood.

During this era, television programs such as “I Dream of Jeannie” which portrayed various roles of women took center stage in influencing the cognitive processes of the teenage girls. The influence of the media towards the female cognitive processes further aided the rise of the “pre-feminist agitation” as they were not only cautionary, but also libratory.

We will write a custom Essay on Analyzing the role of Virgin Mary in empowering women in Christianity and Islam specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Therefore, the media struggled to show that the women had the power to liberate themselves to what appeared to be unfavorable cultural restrictions compared to their male counterparts. As feminism gained center stage, the treatment of the media towards this movement turned to be one of the most critical ways that the media influenced women identity.

Women have also been portrayed in a sexual manner by the television and other elements of the media. The emphasis of feminine traits in the media and the popular dressing has been portrayed in a manner that has been considered sexual by many critics.

Some media programs have been accused of making women appear as though they are sex objects as they emphasize on the need to dress in a manner that has been considered seductive. The contemporary media has also portrayed women as though they are judged more on their physical attributes as opposed to their inner attributes.

This have led to women focusing more on their physical attributes as opposed to their inner attributes such as taking advantage of their mental capacity. Such misrepresentation of the image of the American woman by the television has been detrimental to the women folk especially the young generation women as they have been consciously fed that their physical image is their main drivers for attention and recognition.

In conclusion, Douglas manages to show that the role of the media in shaping the cultural identity of women cannot be underscored. Having taken her analysis for a period of approximately four decades, Douglas, clearly shows how the media influenced different stages of women liberation and how this different generational stages affected the conceptualization of women hood by the media and conversely by the women themselves.

The media helped to shape the atmosphere for feminism and the concept of women liberation and the quest for gender equity. The media has constantly influences how women view themselves due to the “ideal” mental pictures it creates. The media popularizes certain desired standards of a woman making many women focus towards that ideal type.

The end result of such a pursuit has been women identity that has been shaped by the media as opposed to a society that has specific needs to address. Nevertheless, the media has played a crucial role in shaping gender identity of women.

Work Cited Douglas, Susan. Where the Girls Are. Three Rivers Press. New York: Three Rivers Press. 1995.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Analyzing the role of Virgin Mary in empowering women in Christianity and Islam by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


American History Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Introduction Everyone dreams of living the American dream. In fact, America is one of the most envied nations in the world. Its constitution, way of life, and the opportunities it offers to its people are favorable. No wonder it is the world super power and has resources to marshal troops in various stations throughout the world.

In addition, it protects the interest of its citizens and even citizens of other countries out of good will. Countries cannot manage such status without adequate resources. It is for this reason that everyone wants to set his or her foot in the United States.

The country is sometimes described as a land of opportunity and freedom, where anyone willing to work hard can get ahead and make a comfortable life for them and their family. In other words, if someone becomes poor in the United States, then this is usually pegged on his/her own shortcomings. This, paper will review these claims with reference to Barbara Ehrenreich’s Nickel and Dimed, On (Not) Getting By in America. It will also endeavor to relate Ehrenreich’s experiences with the same claims (Ehrenreich 42).

Nickel and Dimed, On (Not) Getting By in America This is a story by Barbara Ehrenreich on how she tries to relate expenses to earnings for a minimum wage worker. Ehrenreich explores how Americans that earn the lowest wages survive in a country where they form the largest sector.

To ensure that her writings are non-factious and provides the best case scenario, Ehrenreich decides to try this by herself. She does this in an effort to present the plight of most workers throughout United States. In fact, according to her, these conditions are unlivable and can be referred to as another form of servant class (although not official).

Throughout her story, Ehrenreich poses a hypothetical question regarding survival concerns that face many Americans working on minimum wages. These include expenses that permanently exceed their income, and wants that cannot be met. Ultimately, the desire to live a better life knocks every day. In this regards she takes the unusual role of an undercover, trying to make ends meet through lower class struggles. In addition, she does it in three different states.

Ehrenreich decided to do an inside report after her lunch with Lewis Lapham. In her assignment, Ehrenreich hopes to survive on a minimum wage job for one month, which includes paying for her rent and transport.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In essence, she tries to find out if minimum wages can match expenses at the end of the month. This proves unsuccessful in all her three attempts. At first, the people around her try to discourage the option of actually moving to the level of low class lifestyle. However, out of her misgivings, she decides to go through the actual hardship.

He first month starts in Florida, which is very close to her home. Here, she finds rooms to be expensive in Key West and opts to move 30 miles away. She then finds a job as a waitress, but the wages are inadequate, so she decides to add another job to this by becoming a maid. Handling the two jobs becomes tiresome and demanding physically. She therefore fails in her first assignment.

In her second assignment, Ehrenreich goes to Maine, where she finds it difficult to survive again. Some of the reasons being, she could not survive on one job. This meant that she had to do one or more jobs for sustainability. The jobs she found in Maine were house cleaning and nursing-home aide.

In addition, these jobs were physically demanding, and for that reason, she had to quite Maine too. The last assignment took her to Minnesota, where she was quite lucky to find a job as a Wall-Mart salesperson. It is through these experiences that she found out that jobs considered as lowliest also exhaust peoples’ physical and mental efforts. Moreover, she found out that one needed not only one, but also two or more jobs to survive under a roof (Ehrenreich 2).

What do Ehrenreich’s experiences say about these claims?

These claims are completely rubbished by Ehrenreich’s experiences. In fact, the mere fact that a single job cannot sustain one makes it even more difficult for people to believe that this is manageable. In essence, speaking exclusively for the low income group, hard work, in accordance with Ehrenreich’s experiences, would not guarantee a rise from poverty.

In fact, several indications point out to the fact that these groups would remain in the same situation for the rest of their lives. To this extent, it is possible to concur with Ehrenreich that these conditions are unlivable and can be referred to as another form of servant class.

What obstacles do people at the bottom of the economic order face?

There are several reasons that can peg one in his financial state for the rest of his or her life. These include laziness, personal content, inadequate opportunities, capping, which may be introduced through minimum wages, among others.

We will write a custom Essay on American History specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In this book, more emphasis is put on work related obstacles such as the minimum wage that is inadequate for survival, working conditions as well as inadequate opportunities for further growth, among others. In essence, just as Ehrenreich calls it, these conditions are unlivable and can be referred to as another form of servant class (although not official). This makes it look like a form of capping that ensures they remain poor forever.

How has poverty become not a temporary but a permanent condition for many Americans?

Under these conditions of work, with poor transportation facilities and healthcare resources, people are unable to live healthy lives. In fact, all they earn are consumed without much left to plan with for their future.

Consequently, they have to struggle to survive. No wonder, the government has various mechanisms for providing subsidies to families and individuals to help sustain them. Essentially, with such conditions of works, people are poised to remain poor throughout their lives (Ehrenreich 12).

Conclusion It is known that America is a land of opportunity and freedom, where anyone willing to work hard can get ahead and make a comfortable life for them and their family. In other words, if someone becomes poor in the United States, then this is usually pegged on his/her own shortcomings.

This may be true to different classes of economy, but definitely untrue when it comes to the minimum wage workers. Earnings of between $6 and $7 per hour are quite inadequate as compared to their monthly needs and expenses. In essence, they have to survive by doing more than one job. These claims are therefore untrue when implied for low class economies (Ehrenreich 22).

Work Cited Ehrenreich, Barbara. “Nickel and Dimed, On (Not) Getting By in America”. Holt Paperbacks, 2008.


The Role of Public Service Commission in Canada Essay a level english language essay help

Introduction The role of Public Service Commission in Canada has experienced considerable change over the years in the process of providing professional services, and at the same time safeguarding merit within its scope of service. Human resource has also experienced modernization through various employment Acts. However, there are various issues and trends influencing the operational and legislative impact of Public Service Commission which cannot be treated in isolation to the whole issue (PSC 2).

The commission should endeavor in fulfilling its mandate on protecting and promoting merit within the government. In addition to these, Canada has had difficult time dealing with issues concerning liberal democracy within its political boundaries. Various policies have always been enacted by the government which acts as potential guidelines towards fulfilling as well as enhancing government mandates (Whitaker 54).

Outline and assess the scope of public sector employment in Canada. What are the main issues facing the federal government with respect to personnel policy and how well do you believe the federal government is organized to manage its personnel responsibilities?

The public sector employment in Canada has undergone significant changes regarding human resources. The public service has been on a hiring trend looking for large numbers of young men, Canadian citizens, with vast skills and interests in various fields of service.

The Canadian government is currently interested in the young generation having management skills and interested in working with federal public service commission. The young professionals are considered to have potential abilities which could be utilized by the government in designing policies suitable for meeting future needs of Canadians (Johnson 619-621).

One of the main issues facing the federal government with respect to personnel policy is the issue on merit, politics and disparity on socio-economic activities. Professionalization of the public service requires the government to provide necessary services which calls for the existence of pro-active skills capable of utilizing the available services. In response, the government tried to establish merit system within the public service in its provinces starting with Saskatchewan (Johnson 619-621).

Several current and impending challenges affect the PSC in the process of implementing their role as policy makers. Public Service Commission is endowed with the responsibility of being both managers and overseers on policies and programs regarding the running of government departments. The shift within the Human Resource landscape was recognized by some commissions as far as 1979, this brought about several discussions within subsequent years on the issues meant to determine necessary regulations amongst employees.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These included flexibility, roles and responsibilities as well as efficiencies. There is growing trend on the issues involving scarcity of talent and leadership as a result of issues such as; the aging workforce, shifting focus on the emotional status of workers and increase in the number of operations worldwide 9(3-6).

Canada is known to have high number of post-secondary graduates; this is because of the country’s strength in formulation of education policies. Despite strength in literacy level, it’s noted that Canada lags behind when it comes to technical and advanced level of education amongst the population.

Despite the positive trend in the economic recovery, there has been little imbalance caused by wholesale migration of the population towards the Western region of the country. Challenge would be experienced on the issues concerning computer and information technology which currently tends to shape-up the level of interactions both at personal and across business networks.

Such adoption has brought dramatic change within various places of work since every department is styling up to catch up with the rest of the world. There is also the issue on stakeholders forming alliances for the purposes of addressing various shortcomings within the employment sector. This has made it difficult for the government to coordinate issues between them and the private sector since there are more bodies involved (PSC 7-8).

The other issue facing the federal government concerns the cultural diversity within Canadian major cities such as Toronto. This has contributed to creation of disharmony within the work places on issues such as religion and languages hence putting the government on task of creating policies meant to reconcile such diversity.

There is also the issue on demographic crisis where the rate of labor entrants is lower than that of departures. Federal public service is currently leading in the number of employers, hence with the current trend, is facing difficulties on the issues concerning recruitment and retention of employees. The level of imbalance within the workplaces is expected to create differential attitudes amongst employees.

The young generation appears so much self-centered concerning their various jobs since they believe in mentorship, training and creation of job opportunities by the government. Such cultural trend has been so much entrenched within the Canadian working population hence calling for the government to review its major policies (PSC 9).

We will write a custom Essay on The Role of Public Service Commission in Canada specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The level of unpreparedness of the government concerning employment issues is clearly revealed on the level of insecurity within companies. According to employer surveys, companies are realigning their pay packages for the purposes of retaining generation Y workers since there is less inflow from the millennial.

However, apart from employing young generation, there is need for revising policies which could help in attracting mid-career professionals (PSC 10). The federal government pushed for every reason to remove the laws granting powers to public sector unions on organizing strikes concerning their employment rights.

However, for quite some time the numbers of unionized members have been falling drastically. This has been followed by potential shift in the structure guarding the labor market which results in continual erosion on values safeguarding organized labor amongst the employees. Despite these, the federal government is not doing much to bridge the gap on financial security between government and private workers.

The federal government is also facing the crisis on funding pensions due to certain factors such as economic downturn. Other factors include increase in the number of pensioners, stagnation experienced on the long-term interest rates and low return on the countries assets (PSC 12). There is notable decline in ethics within various government sectors which has seen considerable decline of public trust towards the government.

However, the public sector has experienced improvement due to the job losses within the private sector as a result of economic downturn. There is significant corporate greed as well as poor management within the government departments which led to poor drive on interest on professions within the public service professions. Tension exists between the government and the methods of governance which tends to foster for open policy creation processes, contrary to the traditional management practices (PSC 34).

There has not been any clear evidence showing the level of federal government’s engagement in the full transformation on the basic roles within PSC. The government has been so much motivated by their short-term goals on cutting the budget rather than focusing on long-term goals based on transforming the nature of the government (Johnson 561).

Why have successive governments attempted to limit the influence of bureaucrats during the policy-making process? What methods were used to counteract this influence? Were they successful?

Bureaucrats as opposed to politicians are directly involved in the process of policy formulation but are not under any obligation to answer to the public concerning these policies. The responsibility of being answerable to the public concerning policies is instead vested on the politicians (Whitaker 54). The issue is also linked to democracy since bureaucrats were believed to involve themselves in shaping some public policies secretly.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Role of Public Service Commission in Canada by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Bureaucrats were also associated with various forms of unethical behaviors such as corruption as well as inefficiency in performance. They are known to have great command on information which forms vital area within policy making process, and this tend to ignore opinions of senior government officials.

This makes bureaucrats have the freedom to impose their own policy preferences without consulting the government. Such process creates confusion on the necessary changes desired by the government concerning a policy during implementation process. They have great influence on shaping policy outcome and implementation since their contributions can never be ignored (Whitaker 59).

To limit such influence the government resorted to the use of middle-class movements which were aimed at reducing the powers and influence of the bureaucrats. The move created freedom within the government administrative circles since it was deprived of any political influence. Creation of various boards and commissions helped in the smooth running of government functions since politicians were no longer involved (Johnson and Molloy 203-223).

The nature of appointments also changed whereby merit system was adopted hence assisted in eliminating favoritism and bias amongst the political class. Another mechanism used was establishing counterweight endowed with the responsibility of giving political policy advice which would neutralize bureaucratic influence (Whitaker 60-61).

The government applied the use of private-sector management which assisted in controlling markets providing better regulation conditions as compared to bureaucratic systems. This intervention launched by conservatives did not work well since it only contributed towards lowering of bureaucrats’ status on influence but never led to total elimination of bureaucracy within government. They discovered that their aim on reducing bureaucracy through this method required more of it to achieve the purpose.

There was also the introduction of the chief of staff around every minister serving in the government, this aimed at assisting ministers in political administration within their various departments. The idea also proved unsuccessful since they did not represent any formal role within the ministries (Whitaker 62-63).

To reduce the high level of command bureaucrats had over information, the government tried to prevent departments from exposing their various policy papers. This was aimed at making it easy for the ruling political party to impose any policy of their interest on individuals. While the bureaucrats had knowledge on policy formulation and identification of various errors within policies, the politicians did not, hence the idea proved ineffective (Whitaker 65).

What were the reactions to the recommendations of the Gomery Report? Why did critics believe the recommendations would have a negative impact on government and the public service? Why did the Harper government reject key recommendations in the Report? What initiatives did the Harper government enact in response to the Report?

In relation towards Commissioner Gomery’s recommendations the Liberals decided to come up with some restrictions and their own regulations concerning the manner in which the government was to conduct business.

Their aim was to corner the government whereby they directed that the bureaucrats were not to be entrusted with any issue before weighing the quality of their characters. This resulted into high level of mistrust within the government lowering the morale of workers hence dwindled the efforts of restructuring the relationship between politicians and bureaucrats (Whitaker 68-69).

Critics believed that the recommendations would bring chaos within the government and the public service since there was little truth in them. They believed the recommendations were baseless since they only covered false relations to the problem they were to address.

According to critics the recommendations would grant politicians an illegal upper hand which would grant them powers to manipulate government systems for the purposes of achieving self ulterior motives (Whitaker 69). At the same time part of the recommendations seem to promote mistrust between ministers and their assistants.

The report brought sharp divide amongst the academicians with the non-partisans arguing that the recommendations would fuel bad relations between the politicians and the bureaucrats. They argued that the report deemed to represent a clear departure from the manner in which Canadian federal government should function, hence could be very detrimental to the public.

They solidly opposed the issue on the report which sought to increase the powers of unelected public officials above that of ministers. This was viewed by the critics as a means of damaging the nature of accountability which existed within various departments concerning management and administrative issues. There was no clear demarcation within the report on issues concerning politics, policies, administration and issues concerning management (Whitaker 71-72).

Harper government rejected key recommendations in the report since they contributed towards diminishing the political power of the bureaucrats and at the same time did not grant recognition towards the chain of accountability within the cabinet. There was no firm line within the report that separated bureaucrats from elected officials and also the report sought to reduce the political control of the prime minister of senior public servants.

Part of the key recommendations contradicted with the stated conservative rules. This could be seen within the part of the report which supported greater autonomy and accountability for the bureaucrats which contradicted governing philosophies of the Harper Conservatives (Whitaker 72).

In response to the Report Stephen Harper’s government established itself with clear focus and control over all its businesses. Harper government revealed its impatience with policies within the report which did not consider Conservative views. The government was strongly committed in imposing conservative policy agendas which acted as source of neutralization to Gomery recommendations. He ensured that all departments within the government operated fully under conservative objectives (Whitaker 72-73).

Conclusion Federal public service remains to be Canada’s largest employer despite changes which might occur within other government departments. Canada is faced with the threat of shrinking native population giving way to new immigrants within the employment sector. This has given rise to so many issues and trends within the workplaces which ultimately affect the normal operations of the public service.

Tensions experienced within the PSC could well be handled by the Privy Council Office which is a body concerned with crisis management (Johnson and Molloy 203-223). Concerning political administration, there is great importance in delegating roles based on government’s policies, rules and regulations to avoid unnecessary conflicts.

Works Cited Johnson, David. “Thinking Government: Ideas, Policies, Institutions, and Public Sector Management in Canada”. (2nd Ed.).Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2004

Johnson, David


What the U.S should do in Afghanistan Research Paper essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

What the U.S should do in Afghanistan


Works Cited

Introduction Terrorism is certainly one of the greatest threats to international security, peace, and stability. It is one of the main challenges facing the international community since the end of Cold War, which threatened to plunge countries back to devastating warfare like First and Second World Wars. Consequently, the international community, led by the world’s dominant power, the USA, and its allies has staged a serious war against terrorism (Bergen and Gelb Para. 4).

The menace of terrorism has forced the U.S, and its allies, to step up the fight against terrorism by sending military expeditions and intelligence personnel to countries such as Afghanistan, Iraq, and Pakistan. These countries are believed to be the operational bases from where terrorist groups like al-Qaeda and Taliban plan and execute their heinous acts.

There has been an important and at the same time, an interesting debate, on what the U.S should do in Afghanistan after ten years of military action against Taliban and other terrorist outfits. While the US government appears to be convinced that appropriate time to leave Afghanistan has not come, some commentators, foreign policy experts, a considerable section of the media, and a considerable number of scholars propose that the U.S should leave Afghanistan now.

Nevertheless, the US should continue with its mission in Afghanistan until such a time when it will be convinced that terrorist groups are not in control of Afghanistan and do not have chances of re-seizing power from civilians and a legitimate Afghan government in the future.

What the U.S should do in Afghanistan The U.S and its allies are the main target of the madness of hatred perpetrated by terrorist groups such as Al Qaeda and Taliban. Unfortunately, more innocent and poor people have lost their lives and thousands have been wounded severely as terrorists attack with an aim of killing Americans and citizens from its allied countries, especially the Britain.

For example, during the 1998, Al Qaeda bombings in Nairobi, Kenya, and Dar el Salaam, Tanzania, at the American embassies in those two countries, hundreds of non-American Kenyan and Tanzanian citizens died and thousands incurred life-threatening injuries (Daily Nation Para.6). From a foreign policy point of view, as well as the need to maintain international peace and security, there are sound reasons that back the continued stay of the US and its allies’ military troops in Afghanistan.

First, the Taliban insurgency, which is, essentially, a misogynist group of ignorant, chauvinistic, and intolerant gangsters if left unrestrained, will provide a safe ground from which al-Qaeda will plan to execute their wicked deeds against innocent, unarmed civilians especially the Americans (Bergen and Gelb Para.4).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Therefore, the Afghan War is a war that is worth fighting and important to protection of not only Americans and their properties, but also other people within the international community who easily get hurt by terrorists’ unjustified violent acts directed towards the US and its allies. Second, an unrestrained Taliban can now easily take over control of Afghanistan’s eastern and southern regions and possibly the entire country in the absence of the U.S and the international military forces.

This line of argument is anchored on the fact that, the Afghan government and its ninety thousands-men army are very weak to withstand a serious rebellious challenge from Taliban’s fighters, a reality that is also acknowledged by some Afghan senior government officials. It is hard to win the fight against terrorism overnight. The Taliban outfit in Afghanistan, with the material support from anti-American elements in Pakistan, is strong and calls for plausible strategy to tackle.

The ability of an enemy to fight back harder is not necessarily an indication that the important war against the menace of terrorism and anarchy in Afghanistan is unwinnable. In fact, it is safe to argue that, the U.S military forces and allies continued stay in the south East Asian region coupled with intensified intelligence has started to bear fruits in the war against terrorism.

Following the victorious killing of al-Qaeda leader, Osama bin Laden, in one of the most magnificent manhunt story in contemporary history of humanity testifies of the fruits of the war against terrorism (Klein Para. 12). Thirdly, the available evidence shows that, Afghans, especially the unarmed peace-loving ones, favor the U.S military presence in their country.

For example, an opinion poll conducted by the BBC in 2009 showed that, over sixty-three percent of Afghans favored the U.S military presence in Afghanistan. Therefore, the U.S should continue intensifying the fight against Taliban and Al-Qaeda while at the same time assisting the Afghan government and its army to strengthen itself in preparation for unavoidable future governance challenges.

Afghanistan is in a turbulent transition period, which is accompanied by many socio-economic and political challenges that can be a serious impediment to peace in not only Afghanistan, but also in the whole of South East Asia and to a successful fight against terrorism.

Abrupt departure of the US and international military forces would open up Afghanistan to the reappearance of renewed Taliban military campaigns. Most probably, the al-Qaeda would like to revenge by killing more Americans because of the premature death of their leader, Osama bin Laden, in early May this year.

We will write a custom Research Paper on What the U.S should do in Afghanistan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The dialogue method is crucial in persuading the Taliban to end military campaigns and accept the constitution; nevertheless, the role of a competent and reliable third party in sealing of any possible peace deal, now and in future, cannot be underestimated.

Right now, it is dangerous to give in to Taliban promises that an exit of the Western troops will make them end their unjustified military campaigns. Furthermore, entertaining the thought of sharing power with an illegal armed band that can hardly uphold any single article of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights is tantamount to throwing basic human rights of the poor innocent Afghans to dogs (Foley and Oates Para.16).

Therefore, the U.S should continue with its mission to Afghanistan and even consider approving the 2009 proposal by President Obama’s administration to increase military troops in Afghanistan (Bergen and Gelb Para.15).

In any case, Obama is concerned that he would be blamed in case of a terrorist attack following a quick withdrawal of the US military troops at this moment when all is clear that Al-Qaeda might revenge, the unceremonial death and burial of Osama, by killing more Americans (Bergen and Gelb Para.17).

The US and her allies should then continue to watch vigilantly for any possible terrorist attacks while in Afghanistan while at the same time create an environment that is conducive to meaningful negotiations that involve relevant global actors like the United Nations among others (Atal Para.19).

In short, the US and its allies should take more time to put in place any possible measures that can help Afghanistan people transit into a peaceful country capable of undertaking sustainable nation building processes without dangers of slipping back into anarchy through Taliban control.

Given that a considerable percentage of Afghans, as indicated by recent news opinion polls, favor the US military presence in their country, it is arguable that the majority will not ready to tolerate ‘Stone Age’ governance styles of the Taliban any more (Foley and Oates Para.6).

The benefits won so far from the U.S and allies’ intervention in Afghanistan especially with regard to safeguarding rights of women and girls, should be safeguarded to the bitter end, regardless of the cost in terms of financial resources. The benefits are an indication that the war against Taliban, and by extension terrorism, is winnable.

Not sure if you can write a paper on What the U.S should do in Afghanistan by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Currently, even though women and girls continue to languish in dehumanizing conditions, hundreds of thousands of women and girls are in school; therefore, there is hope for an even a brighter future for them. Their slow but sure emancipation from the largely patriarchal and unjust domination by men, under Taliban control, should be the beacon of hope that the fight against the Taliban is winnable in the near future (Foley and Oates Para.6).

The US should, therefore, complete the work of assisting Afghans repossess their country from Taliban, and spearhead the fight against terrorism by destabilizing terrorist hideouts and safe havens in South East Asian countries. The US must appreciate the fact that, they came to finish that fight irrespective of the unavoidable challenges that have come their way and will continue to emerge in the future.

Conclusion In a recap, the US should continue with its mission of stumping out the Taliban from Afghanistan by putting in place measures that will minimize chances of Afghans slipping back to anarchy. The achievements realized so far, like assisting Afghans to elect a government and give the majority of women and girls their dignity and integrity, should be the beacon of the hope that the US and its allies will defeat Taliban and terrorism in the end.

Works Cited Atal, Subodh. “At a Crossroads in Afghanistan: Should the United States Be Engaged in Nation Building?” CATO Institute, 2003. Web.

Bergen, Peter, and Gelb, Leslie. “Two Arguments for What to Do in Afghanistan.” Time, 2009. Web.

Daily Nation. Nairobi bomb blast mastermind is dead, 2011. Web.

Foley, Conor, and Oates, Lauryn. “What should we do in Afghanistan?” The Guardian, 2008. Web.

Klein, Kent. “Obama Announces Death of Osama bin Laden.” Voice of America, 2011. Web.


Where the Girls Are by Susan Douglas. Book review. Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

The media has had a lot of effects on women based on various perceptions. Douglas cuts out an analysis on how the media has been portraying women in the last few years. In this case, she argues that it has been showing different images of women yet they do not reflect popular values.

As far as she is concerned, these images create certain values by portraying them as ideal (meaning that all women should emulate them). This means that all women should strive to be what is being portrayed by the images that they see through the media. American women have been fed with many images thereby conflicting their desires, aspirations and opinions. In this case, they have been exposed to conflicting images as time goes by.

As a matter of fact, the media has played a big role in creating certain values in the society through the images that they show. It should be known that there are occasions where these images have left women confused on what the society expects of them (Douglas, 1995, p. 30). This is as far as their aspirations and relationship with different members of their family is concerned.

It should be known that these images have been changing as time goes by over the last few decades. Uncertainty that has been created and seen as time goes shows and proves that images have been changing. There are various aspects of these images that have changed in relation to societal trends and needs.

In this case, a single image can portray and send mixed signals. The most notable changes in images have been seen in pop culture because it is always changing in relation to social and economic imperatives (Douglas, 1995, p. 48). This means that images have changed to incorporate shifting trends in societal and economical aspects. In this case, the needs of the society have changed drastically as time goes by based on various parameters.

This has therefore seen the media responding to such changes through the images that they show. Americas’ broadcast journalism has changed a lot in relation to various technological advancements which implies that images have also changed in a broad way. People relate to mass media through the images that they see which has made it (media) to be creative.

As a matter of fact, these images have also been changed in relation to new fashion trends. This means that they have changed for the better based on how the media represents them. By portraying certain images as ideal, the media has tried to be up to date with what the society wants. Some characters and aspirations have been shown in these images in various forms.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is undeniable that images have changed over the last decade in a broad way based on the structure and needs of our society and what different people want to put forward. The media has a motive behind most of these images and this means that they will be made appealing to reach to a wide audience.

It should be known culture changes based on current needs of the society which creates different trends. The most notable area where images have changed drastically can be seen in fashion (Douglas, 1995, p. 23). This is what Douglas refers to as conflicting images based on various competing interests. We are in a competitive world meaning that changes will be seen everywhere.

The images that are shown by the media have helped to establish gender equality in a broad way. This is based on the fact that images that are shown by American Televisions do not in any way reflect popular values. Gender equality has been established through these images by creating a generation of women who are enlightened on various issues that revolve around their lives in the society.

Through these images, women have been in a position to find a voice of their own thereby creating a feminist movement. This has been achieved through the creation of values that will look ideal to these women. In the process, women have strived to match what is being portrayed in such images by voicing their concerns (Douglas, 1995, p. 67).

Most images that are seen on American television end up inspiring women to be successful by all means thereby defying popular values. In this case, according to Douglas, it can be confidently said that these images have helped to establish gender equality. As much as there are occasions where images have left women uncertain on what they want and what the society expects of them, it has enhanced equality because they can stand up to claim their rights.

Women have their own desires but the society has not been giving them a chance to express themselves but through images in the media, the pursuit to fulfill their expectations has been renewed and rejuvenated. This means that they have been inspired to compete with men without fear based on other successful stories of women who have made it by defying all odds.

As a matter of fact, Douglas refers to images of successful women who have made it in life as a reference point. A woman’s right to a voice has been reinforced by different images that continually send mixed signals. In this case, we have different personalities and this means that we will receive messages differently. All this withstanding, women have received such mixed signals differently, thereby being inspired to compete with men in equal measure (Douglas, 1995, p. 134).

We will write a custom Essay on Where the Girls Are by Susan Douglas. Book review. specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More These images have shaped different women’s opinion thereby transforming their lives. Gender equality could not be achieved without such images because Douglas traces experiences by relating to movements. People grow in different cultures and this gives them an experience that ultimately shapes their lives. This means that as women have been shaped positively, they have desired to have a say in the society.

The feminist movement advocates for a lot of gender equality which can be seen through the images that have been shown on American Television. This is in relation to shifting social and economic aspects that show the reality of our society. Gender equality has been enhanced in a great way because images have had an impact on different women’s self- perception.

In this case, it is undeniable that women have changed in a great way and this is as far as their lives are concerned (Douglas, 1995, p. 174). There are women who have emerged to compete with men in different areas like business, politics, leadership and others. This has not changed by sheer coincidence but through images that have been shown by the media. In this case, the media has presented and represented different perceptions that have instilled confidence in women.

A brilliant defense of feminism has been spearheaded by the media through different forums. Women relate to the complex stream of images in the media in a unique way and this has given them an insightful exploration. In the long run, we can say that images have helped to establish gender equality in the society.

Reference List Douglas, S. (1995). Where the Girls Are: Growing Up Female with the Mass Media. New York: Three Rivers Press.


Saint Augustine of Hippo Essay college essay help online

Christened Augustine at birth in Tagaste on November 384, St Augustine of Hippo was born to Patricius and Monica. His father, Patricius grew up as a pagan and one of the curiales of their city until his wife’s Christianity, coupled with her virtuous ways, pushed him into conversion and baptism into Christianity before he died in North Africa.

He had quite an uneventful youth marred only by an episode of stealing pears (Appleton 67). Augustine received a Christian education at the local catechumens where he reports to have learnt about the divine providence, a future with terrible sanctions, as well as the testimony of Jesus Christ, which he considers the most vital of all.

Having excelled in his classes, Patricius decided to enroll himself at Carthage where he would pursue Forensics. However, it took several months to consolidate the necessary funding for his education at Carthage, during which he seemed very idle, leading to the loss of his virtue. As a young person, he possessed an outstanding passion about carnal matters, an awareness that only heightened when he got to Carthage.

Carthage still had some evident pagan features where its ‘ungodly’ attractions, lecherous fellow students, and theatres, amongst others lured him into sin (Bright, Trump, and Fitz 65). He also lost the battle against his pride in his literary skills. In the year 372, he had a child with a mistress he had received the responsibility of seeing. Later on, Monica came to learn of it, much to her disappointment. By then, he only had nineteen years. As a result, he genuinely sought o mend his ways.

In the year 373, he studied a text by Cicero, ‘Hotensius’, which marked the genesis of his love for wisdom. His devotion shifted from rhetoric, which he had studied all along, to philosophy. Rhetoric remained relegated to his profession. During this quest for wisdom, he encountered Manichaeism.

This sect promised to help him find scientific answers to most of the mysterious phenomena that had baffled him for a while (Broadbent 89). The most mysterious aspect that he sought to understand resulted from his sinful past: he wanted to understand the source of evil. The sect also promised to introduce him to a philosophy that seemed free from the influence and restrictions of religion or faith, an idea, into which he completely bought.

He read and took up their beliefs with his usual ardor and passion, which went on for nine years. In the meantime, he went back to Carthage as a young professor of rhetoric. Monica, still upset by his desertion of the truth, even refused to invite him to her house for a while. Back in Carthage, he participated in a poetic tournament, which he won thereby receiving the corona agonistica award.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He eventually came to accept that there was no science in Manichaeism and that caused him to disown that faith. Manicheans also had an ambiguous and at times contradictory philosophy that seemed to embrace virtue while simultaneously excusing immorality. In addition to these flaws, Augustine found their counter-arguments against catholic lacking and unconvincing as they always reiterated that scriptures had some evident flaws.

After repudiating the sect, he went to Italy in 383, where he started a rhetoric school only to close it a short while later when the students sought to defraud him. He got a job as a professor, which he did for a while and that was when he encountered Bishop Ambrose (Flinders 98). This kindly bishop’s exceptionally saintly behaviors would impress Augustine into conversion four years later.

However, he yet wished to try several other ‘truths’ before he found his exact fit. He ventured into an Academic philosophy, with its ‘pessimistic skepticism’ for a while. He then tried Neo-Platonic philosophy, which genuinely impressed him based on the works of Plotinus and Plato. His only desired to find the truth, and learn how to live a perfect life, one that did not seek either honor or wealth built on a foundation of celibacy.

With this goal in mind, he took his child Adeodatus, his mother Monica, and his friends, and together they resorted to Cassisiacum, where he would hold monumental discussions on various topics including truth, God, the soul, true happiness in philosophy, evil, and the providential order of the world, among others (Frost 108). People came to know these as ‘Dialogues’. Augustine received his baptism into Christianity in 387, the year his mother died, forcing him to spend some time in Carthage refuting the beliefs of Manicheans.

He then went back to Africa in 388, whereupon reaching Tagaste; he sold all his wealth and gave the proceeds to the poor beginning to live the perfect life he had always idealized. In 391, he received a priesthood consecration. Although he did not want the post, he proceeded to accept and fulfill the calling. As a priest, he seemed instrumental in the conversion of many souls.

Some of his great successes include the public humiliation of Fortunatus, a Manichean doctor who had come to convert the Christians of Hippo into his sect. The humiliation proved too great for the great doctor to bear thus making him leave Hippo shortly after it happened. Augustine also banned the holding of banquets in the chapels of martyrs, and delivered a discourse during the Plenary Council of Africa that would later become the treatise, De fide et Symbolo

His writings remain categorized into confessions (history of the development of his heart), retractions (growth of his mind), and letters, which define his activities in the church. His letters, currently numbered at 270, contained practical solutions to the members’ problems.

We will write a custom Essay on Saint Augustine of Hippo specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Contra Academicos, De Beatâ Vitâ, De Ordine, On the Holiness of the Catholic Church, and The City of God form part of his great works (Kent, and Brown 43). Augustine assumed the seat as the Bishop of Hippo at 42. People have defined his episcopacy as one dominated by truth, with him as the guardian of people’s souls, and that it seemed rich with sermons on charity.

Augustine led several movements, over doctrinal enemies. These included the Manichean controversy based on the concept of evil. He managed to convert a Manichaean named Felix, believed to be one of the greatest doctors (in terms of proficiency with the Manichean doctrine) of his time during one of his famous public conferences. During this conference, he gave a speech that gave clarification on the nature of evil.

He explained that not all of God’s laws and precepts qualify as evil in nature or by extension. Instead, evil comes from the liberty, or free will accorded man and other creatures, when people abuse the liberty (Portalie 78). Another controversy he helped straighten concerned Donatists and their questions on the sinners in the church, including the morality of priests and its influence over their hierarchy.

Augustine expounded on views earlier mentioned by St. Cyprian and Opatus. He stated that a sinner could remain within the realm of the church, but only with the intention of converting him/ her in the near future. Other controversies he settled include the Arian and Pelagian controversies (Portalie 99). He died in 436.

St. Augustine stood out as an impeccable man with a profound understanding on the doctrines, nature, authority, and institution of the church. He expounded on numerous confounding texts containing doctrines and helped guide most of the dogmas advanced today about the church (Yen 66).

It proves important to note that Augustine did not have any protestant views, but rather catholic, as many protestant critics seek to portray him as an anti-reformist reformer, which seems in contrast to his true nature. Nevertheless, his contribution to religion and humanity in general remains profound regardless of the lens anybody might choose to view his accomplishments.

Works Cited Appleton, Maine. St. Augustine of Hippo. New York: Springler, 2001.

Bright, Cornelia, Trump, Bernado, and Fitz, Julie. A Biography on St. Augustine of Hippo. Paris: Verde Inc., 2000.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Saint Augustine of Hippo by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Broadbent, Stephen. Eternal and Spiritual Issues. The Trumpet 1.1 (1992): 28.

Flinders, Lyon. On Truth, Grace, and Provident Living. Herald To Nations 3.5 (2006): 50-62.

Frost, Richard. Understanding the concept of Sainthood: St. Augustine of Hippo. Roman Theology 4.2 (1994): 23-47.

Kent, Lexis, and Brown, Christopher . Saints and Cathedrals. Washington DC: Basic Books, 2004.

Portalie, Eugene. Life of St. Augustine of Hippo. The Catholic Encyclopedia 1.3 (2011): 34-89.

Yen, Kristen. Standard Works of The Catholic Church. Vatican: Oxford University Press, 1999.


Benefits of Religion Research Paper best essay help: best essay help

Abstract This paper begins with an explanation of what religion means and how it affects people. A brief history of religion in America is provided from the pre-colonial period to the present day status. Then it moves on to give a brief review of major religions in America. Further, the role/benefits of religion are explored, highlighting how religion contributes to well-being community, spirituality, health, education and other various benefits. The paper then finally concludes by highlighting the future of religion in America and the rest of the world.

Introduction Defining religion is a difficult thing since different people or groups have different ideas of what religion is, but most definitions will always incorporate the belief in supernatural power(s) that created universe and continue to rule over it. Therefore, religion is an individual’s choice and each religion has it own belief system that links it to a superpower or God.

Various religions have continued to play a significant role to human spirituality and in helping the whole humankind existence. Since ancient times, religions have been helping the human race in various ways such as providing counseling services, governance, food, and shelter for the poor, and other various means.

Thus, the history of most people appears to be somehow influenced by religion. The history of America and religion are quite interrelated from the pre-colonial period, when various American Indian groups practicing a huge variety of religious traditions shared the continent to the present day America where all major religions in the world are practiced (Corbett-Hemeyer, 2009).

Historically, some religious groups have always outnumbered other groups in terms of number of faithful, with the protestant divisions continuing to be the majority grouping compared to other traditional religious groups in America. In much of the American history, the Protestant Christianity has been the major religious grouping, wielding cultural influence in the United States of America and enjoying privileges of its status.

However, in the in the 20th century, the number of Catholics and Jews grew rapidly becoming the other major religious groupings in America, attracting interest from various scholars. The 21st century has witnessed tremendous changes in the religious cycles, with the number of Muslim faithful increasing significantly to outnumber the Episcopalians, Presbyterians, and other minor religions in the united states, thus classifying America as being any religious grouping country would be so misguided (Hall, 2007).

From inception of the American continent, the religious diversity has always been present, thus, those who had tried to advocate for religious homogeneity had always been faced with quite difficult moments.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This is very true, since, even before the European settlers arrived religious diversity was already present through the various beliefs and practices of the Native Americans and the settlers had different religious orientations such as Protestants, Catholics, Jews, and other groupings.

Hence, where each religious grouping of settlers settled, it spread it beliefs in that area leading to religious diversity within America (Hall, 2007). Due to this religious diversity, the American people practice the major religions in the world, the Native American religions, and their derivatives. In the next section of this paper, the major religions of the America will be explored briefly.

Major religions in America In the world, there are many religions but the ten most organized religions of the world include Christianity, Islam, Hinduism, Buddhism, Sikhism, Judaism, Bahaism, Confucianism, Jainism and Shintoism (Infoplease, 2005). All these religions are practiced in America, contributing to its religious diversity. There are three major religions in America, including Christianity, Judaism, and Islam respectively (Corbett-Hemeyer, 2009).

These three religions, though they have differences in their doctrine and practice, they share some similarities. They are monotheistic faiths, trace their ancestry to Abraham, and believe God as the creator and governor of universe, and most of their sacred narratives share similarities especially in references to same figures, histories, and locations.

Hence, they are commonly referred to as the major Abrahamic Religions. Based on this information, most Americans are religious, with only a few not having any religious affiliation. Thus, the religions believe in God, pray, practice a religion and explain their life happening by appealing to God’s will and word and work (Neusner, 2009, P.1).

Christianity in America

Christians are followers of Jesus Christ and their holy book is the bible. Christianity contributes more two thirds of the religions in America with various forms of Christianity having predominated and defined much of the culture and society over the years (Neusner, 2009).

Christianity is generally divided into Protestants and Roman Catholic. Both forms of Christianity were introduced into America by the early European settlers and they have continued to influence the American Christian society. Protestants Christianity was introduced by the earliest European settlers of Virginia and Massachusetts and it has continued to grow, encompassing various denominations and sects, forming the largest single religious grouping in America.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Benefits of Religion specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Catholic Christianity was introduced in the eastern and the great southwest part of United States by European settlers who settled there especially of Hispanic origins and it has grown to be second largest single religious grouping in America. These two forms of Christianity were the earliest form Christianity but later Orthodox Christianity was introduced in America from Greece and Russia accounting for a small portion of Christianity (Neusner, 2009).

Judaism in America

Judaism is a religion that is practiced by Jews advocating for strict unitary view of God and the major holy book is the Hebrew Bible. There are three main divisions of Judaism in America: the Reform, the Orthodox, and the Conservatives though there are several other sects all forming around 4 percent of all religions found in the United States (Neusner, 2009). Judaism has existed in America since the colonial days when it was practiced few Jewish settlers of that time.

Islam in America

Muslims are believers in Allah (God) and they follow the teaching of Prophet Muhammad. In addition, Muslims recognize the biblical prophets. Initially the number of Muslims in America was quite decimated but recently their number has increased rapidly leading them to become the third largest religious community in the United States with approximately five million Muslims and 1500 mosques located within the country (Neusner, 2009, P.151).

Most of American Muslims are immigrants or descendants of the immigrant Muslim communities with rest being from people who convert. Due to misconceptions and stereotyping of Muslims in the western world, most of American Muslims have kept low profile while concentrating on spreading their religion and economic activities. The next part of this paper will discuss the way the various religions found in America benefit people and community.

Benefits of religion Benefits of religion can accrue to individual, groups and as well the whole humankind. By not basing on specific religion or beliefs, the following are some the benefits people stand to benefit from religion. First, friendship and togetherness is one of the paramount emphases of any religion.

Through service in places of worship, people meet, interact, and forge friendships that can be life lasting. Most of religious beliefs encourage people to feign friendships and support each other in times of difficult in order to promote togetherness.

Religion helps individuals to participate in worship with brothers and sisters of their religion and through the social gatherings, the community growth and wellbeing is enhanced within the religion. Friendship and supporting each other is a vital component of happy and peaceful communities.

Secondly, studies have shown that religion can be a key element in creating national unity of any country. Religion helps in shaping the shared values of a culture into a vital sense of unity.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Benefits of Religion by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The shared values can be crucial ingredient in modeling the national identity dispersing divisive forces such as ethnicity or nationality. Additionally, religion can help to create a national figure who exhibits the valued cultural values, thus unifying the whole country. Lack of shared cultural values brings tension and the sense of togetherness brought by national identity can be lost.

For example, studies have revealed that in the tense Baltic region civil religion is pivotal in shaping the shared values of the a culture into a strong common sense of national unity that will enable the secular pluralistic society to achieve it envisioned democratic process (Miller, 2009). The shared cultural sense can help people of this region to forge a better national identity that can disperse the bipolar of tendency of some of the cultures.

Thirdly, religion has always significantly helped in the well-being of individuals and the community at large in terms of health. The belief system gives hope and reinforces mental attitude, and when coupled with interaction with other members of the religion, a person’s mental health stands to benefit. Studies show that religious beliefs can improve physical wellness of a person, as there have been many documented cases where a person’s religious beliefs have helped in overcoming the disease or challenges relating to health.

According to studies that were conducted on HIV and religious beliefs, it was revealed that spirituality predicts for better disease control, with people who do not attend religious services having twice the risk of dying over in the next 8 years since infection than those who attend religious services regularly (Kluger, 2009).

Individuals and communities reap many health benefits from religious groups that act as owners or sponsors of various healthcare providing facilities and research institutions. These faith-based health organizations (FBOs) provide healthcare to entire communities even to people who are non-religious or not of that faith.

For example, a church-based community VCT is not for use by Christians only but by all members of that society or the Muslim hospitals such as those of Agha Khan International Foundation is for benefit of the whole community in which they serve all people equally without discriminating any group.

In addition, research conducted by religious sponsored research institutions benefit the entire humankind. The FBOs have been quite successful in delivery of healthcare, as research has shown that the FBOs offer services more effectively since the staff members motivated by faith they are more caring, compassionate and supportive in performing their responsibilities (Flanigan, 2009).

More so, the international FBOs working in developing nations have mostly shown greater long-term commitment to local inhabitants than most secular NGOs and this has mostly been enhanced by the ties of religious solidarity they share with the people they serve (Bradley, 2005).

In addition, studies have shown that FBOs services have been very helpful especially when offered to people suffering from substance abuse, violence, and discrimination due to the moral and spiritual dimensions that they incorporate; generally, there is a strong positive correlation between the improved health and religious behavior (Fischer, 2008).

In essence, religion is one the key player in the global health provision and research leading to solutions to many diseases and all these services are offered for betterment of the entire human race.

Fourthly, religion plays a great role in enhancing education globally. Various religious groups sponsor and own thousands of educational institutions worldwide that offer education to all people, mostly regardless of their religious orientation.

These institutions range from kindergarten, through elementary and high school to world-class universities that offer quality education that enhance global literacy and educational level. Through education the communities and individuals globally stands to gain many benefits including enlightenment, technological advancement, improved literacy level, and solution to various global issues.

Even if the education that is offered is for religious purposes, it can mutually benefit the community and the individuals in numerous ways (Katherine, 2011).

Studies have indicated that religion is basic to education in many countries and that education promotes understanding people of different religions hence even the secular international development agencies have to incorporate the understanding of role religion in education in enhancing Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) and tackling global educational challenges (Katherine, 2011).

According studies conducted in Europe on the relationship between religion and education, they seem to support the above notion since they revealed that study of religion is a precondition for tolerance and social awareness of religious diversity and they are a prerequisite for personal development and social responsibility (Jackson et al, 2007).

This is applicable through religious education that encourages cultural relativism rather than any religious education that encourages mono cultural aspects. Therefore, religion can significantly influence the education of individuals and communities directly or indirectly.

More so, religion can help people to cope with loneliness and grief through consolation. In case of grief, religious institutions offer consolation to their members to help cope with sadness. The grieved member is offered consoling words and presence of other religious members help to restore feeling of being loved and appreciated. Through participation in religion people are able to avoid or reduce loneliness as they are busy well being preoccupied with the religious activities.

Thus, the faith in ones religion can be a source of motivation that strengthen one to carry on, tackle obstacles and emerge a better and stronger person from difficulties. Lastly, embracing religion can be a life saving event for some people since there have been some social misfits such as criminals and drug addicts that upon embracing have become good and productive members of the society.

Conclusion Religion is a personal choice though it has existed since time in memorial offering humankind spirituality and other benefits. People through involvement of religion in their life for many years it has somehow influenced their culture and systems of governance. Throughout the history of the world, religion appears to have played a significant role in shaping the events and their outcomes.

For America, the religion will always continue to part of it, people only what can change in future are the religious trends as since the pre-colonial period up to date there have been tremendous religious transformations and emergency of new religions. In addition, the global religious trends will continue to have influence on religion in America due to the fact that America has been assimilating various world religions.

Religion will continue to be beneficial to the religious and non-religious people and communities even in the coming years, since it has always been part of human race, with some people embracing it while others practicing none at all. Since religion influences culture and vice versa, religion can shape the way people interact and become an essential ingredient in uniting conflicting people leading to lasting peace.

Religion also accords the society various tangible benefits through enhancing health, education and empowering of the community. Though religion is beneficial to the community if spread or used in retrogressive manner, it can be a major source of conflict and hatred. For example, wars have been fought around the world since ancient time for religious reasons.

In addition, religious affiliations can be a source of disagreement between different groups in country brewing tension. For example, the recent tension between Christians and Muslims in Nigeria. For benefits of religion to continue helping the world, religion should be approached in an understanding manner that allows room for religious tolerance.

References Bradley, T. (2005). Does Compassion Bring Results? A Critical Perspective on Faith and Development. Culture and Religion, Vol 6(3), p337-351.

Corbett-Hemeyer, J. (2009). Religion in America. Sixth Edition. Ontario: Pearson Education Canada.

Fischer, R. (2008). In God We Trust, All Others Bring Data: Assessing the State of Outcomes Measurement for Faith-Based and Community-Based Programming. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services.

Flanigan, S.T. (2009). Staff Perceptions of the Benefits of Religion in Health and Human Services Nonprofits: Evidence from International Development. Journal of Health


Comparing and Contrasting Islam and Christianity Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Main Analysis

Comparing the World Views of both Islam and Christianity


Works Cited

Introduction Christianity and Islam share a lot of similarities and at the same time differ on several aspects. This paper will carry out a detailed comparison of the Christian and Islam religions. Among the similarities are: they both worship one God, they both believe that Jerusalem is the holy city and lastly they believe that the date of the judgment is decided when one dies.

Despite the above similarities, the two religions differ on other aspects; their main points of differing are: on their central teacher – Christians consider Jesus to be their main figure whereas Muslims believe in Mohammed as their central figure; in reference to the revered texts; Christians consider the Bible as the holy book and Muslims have Quran as their holy book.

Both religions also differ with respect to their places of worship; for Christians their place of worship is church or cathedral and according to the Islamic religion the place of worship is masjid or the mosque (Flemming 332).

Main Analysis Christianity and Islam are closely related religions due to the fact that they revere Abraham and other patriarchs cited in the Hebrew scripture as their spiritual ancestors.

Major denominations of Christianity:




Latter day saints (Anon 1)

Major denominations of Islam:



Sufism (Akhter 171)

Comparing the World Views of both Islam and Christianity On religious beliefs: Christianity and Islam have various differences and at the same time related in other aspects. On the concept of the deity, Christians believe in the trinity which encompasses three persons in one God, that is, the God the father, the son and the Holy Spirit. Muslims on the other hand believe in only one Allah who can not be divided. Consequently, both religions believe in existence of Jesus though the Christians consider Jesus as the son of God whereas Muslims consider Jesus as a respected prophet who ranks second after Mohammed in significance.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the death of Jesus: Christians believe that it was sanctioned by Pontius Pilate and carried out by the roman army and Muslims believe that Jesus was neither killed nor died but he ascended into heaven alive. They, however, both believe that Jesus ascended to heaven. Notwithstanding the fact that they both believe in a holy book, they refer them by different names; for the Muslims, their holy book is called the Quran and the Christians call it as the Bible.

Based on religious practices: On the interpretation of the holy book, Christians interpretation ranges from the statements made by the pope and also resolutions in conventions which is common among the Protestants; Muslims on the other hand interpret the holy book based on the opinion of various scholars and hence there is no individual who is an authority in the interpretation of the holy book according to the Muslims (Brodd and Sobolewsky 10).

With respect to the place of worship: Christians worship in the church or rather the cathedral whereas the Muslims worship in the mosque. Also the two religions differ based on their day of worship; Christians worship on the Saturdays and Sundays and to Muslims hold their worship on Friday.

With regards to the relationship between the church and the state: Christians believe that it should be separated and to an extend Christian countries are democracies. According to Islam, the church and the state are integrated and majority of Muslim countries are governed dictatorial (Christian and Islam 11-19).

On humanity: In the Christian perspective, Christians seek to foster cooperation among their churches especially in their mission to the world. They also seek to heal any historical division that might exist among churches. The main agent of the Christians is the World Council of Churches and they achieve their mission through ecumenical movements. Christians mobilize other Christians in the mission to confront social problems that afflict the societies like poverty and injustice (Young 12).

Islam stresses the need for social justice and they provide for the marginalized and the vulnerable members of the society which include the poor, the hungry and the orphaned. They as well stand against the extreme group of Muslims who take advantage of the conventional brotherhood and sisterhood to further clannism and sexism and they also reject globalization that benefits Multinational Corporation at the expense of ordinary citizens (Young 224)

On human problem: Christians consider a problem as an individual since individuals are sinners and any resolution is personal transformation; they consider the main problem as the separation of an individual from God (Young 213). Muslims appreciate gender justice as a way of promote justice in the Muslim community. Muslims also believe in pluralism. The cause of human problem according to the Muslims is when an individual rejects the guidance of Allah and does not believe in the original sin like the Christians (Young 242).

We will write a custom Essay on Comparing and Contrasting Islam and Christianity specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Cause of human problem: According to the Muslims, human problem is caused by human distraction (Young 242). With regard to the Christians, the main cause of human problem is the original sin that was committed in the Garden of Eden by Adam and Eve; they argue that individuals should be liberated from sin (Young 214).

End of transformation: According to the Christian theologians, human life is subjected to danger by their sins and these sins may encompass ecological dimensions. To the Christians, there is life after death. They believe that Jesus rose from death in order to transform human life on earth (Young 215).

Sacred: According to the Muslims, there is no other God but only Allah and true connection with him can be established through dedication in prayers and also through Jihad, which is a holy war (Young 247). Christians on the other hand believe that there is only one God who exists in three forms, that is, God the father, God the son and God the Holy Spirit. This sacred can be known through the circumstances that he is the agent of creation and the fact that he brought harmony and unity to all the reality (Young 218).

Symbols, myths and rituals: Muslims wage Jihad to demonstrate their protection and allegiance to God. They celebrate rituals such as the holy month of Ramadan and also Id ul fitr which is their holy holiday, and Al-Hijra which is the moment of personal renewal, Christians, on the other hand, celebrate Christmas which is a reflection of the death of Jesus Christ and they also remember Good Friday and Easter Monday (Morrill 2).

Conclusion When the two religions are compared with Judaism especially doctrine wise; both Islam and Judaism are based in the Middle East. Just like the other two religions, Judas believes in Jerusalem as the holy town. Judaism like Christians both shares the history of the Jews but Judaism like Islam designates civilization as a way of life. It is only the secular nature of Judaism that distinguish it form Christianity otherwise they are doctrines which are similar and both are the religions of the tribe of Abraham (Warren 235).

Works Cited Akhter, Shamim. Faith


The Implementation of Corporate Social Responsibility and Ethical Behavior of Qantas Airways Report custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Sustainability of Qantas


List of References

Introduction According to Qantas Airways Limited (2011, par.1), the airlines industry emits a substantial amount of manufactured carbon dioxide. The Group has established a program named carbon-offset that enables travelers to counterbalance carbon emission caused by their flights and moved to using neutral carbon.

The Group has worked together with the community by engaging in donations and global funds to fight diseases. It also works with the government in providing enticements to sponsor research and development that aims at coming up with new methods and techniques of sustaining the environment. Qantas employees also take part in the organization’s “Clean up Australia”.

Qantas has developed a culture of accountability, good governance through transparency and reporting of all activities to its stakeholders, customers and regulators. It complies with global standards of reporting such as accountability (AA100) and International Labor Organizations regulations. Employees are educated on their fundamental human rights and practice.

Sustainability of Qantas The Qantas Group seeks to operate in the most sustainable manner possible. It seeks to operate in a sustainable manner by optimizing and continually improving all its aspects of operations. The specific areas in which the Qantas Group seeks to narrow down to achieve sustainability are areas such as economic and environmental impacts. The group continues to be keen on the economic and environmental impacts as it continues to achieve sound financial results to the satisfaction of shareholders.

The Qantas’ Groups performance and standards in the scope of sustainability have been clear and elaborate. The Dow Jones Sustainability Asia Pacific Index was first published in 2009 and since then, the Qantas Group has consistently featured in the list. The Index listing is reviewed quarterly and annually (Qantas Airways Limited 2010a, par.2).

It is the objective of this measure to ensure the accuracy of index composition in order to provide a good representation of leading sustainability companies. The fact that the Group has been featuring in the index is a clear indication of its sustainability levels (Qantas Airways Limited 2011).

The group has been acknowledged and recognized in the area of sustainability performance and disclosure. For one, it has appeared in the DJSI index since 2009, secondly it has won the ESG Citi Award in the 2010 Australian Investor Relations Association awards.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Thirdly, the 2010 Carbon Disclosure Project Leadership Index (CDPLI) has also included the Qantas Group in its index for New Zealand and Australia. Concerning carbon emission reduction category, Qantas Airways has appears among top ten firms that promote reduced carbon emission hence the only industrial company to appear in the list showing its high levels of sustainability (Qantas Airways Limited 2010b, par.2).

Conclusion Qantas Group has ensured environmental sustainability by participating in the clean up activities in the Clean Up Australian Day (CUAD). The group indeed has a 15 years partnership with the Clean Up program in which it provides support in terms of flight services.

The Qantas has helped the development of online Future Sustainability Leaders Program so that many people may be linked to online training and support. The Qantas Group has enhanced environmental sustainability by adopting an investor definition that focuses on exploiting opportunities and managing business risks in order to grow and remain sustainable.

List of References Qantas Airways Limited 2010a, Community and health. Web.

Qantas Airways Limited 2010b, Health. Web.

Qantas Airways Limited 2011, Qantas Airways. Web.


Physical capital in Ruiz Construction Company Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Table of Contents Ruiz Construction Company

Company’s production process


Works Cited

Physical capital refers to machinery, buildings, equipment and other tangible facilities used in the transformation processes. Production process utilizes inputs and converts them into outputs. Ideally, physical capital cannot convert inputs into outputs without additional supporting factors of production.

Economically as noted by Gwartney et al., production process entails conversion of inputs such as labor, capital and raw materials into valuable products (54). According to Anon, physical capital is subjected to non-economic version of measurement (3). Essentially, the optimal point of physical capital is production of goods and services.

Studies indicate that United States’ long run economic growth is largely contributed by the human capital, technology and the physical capital. Industries in the contemporary production depend on physical capital and technologies to increase production. Construction industry is one of key development initiatives that physical capital through machinery and technologies has impacted.

Through research, economic application of the physical capital to the production processes in most vital industries provide a conclusion as to why some states are richer than others, and the significant sources of economic development (Anon, 5). Ruiz Construction Company is an example of a real company where physical capital has dominated the production process.

Ruiz Construction Company Ruiz Construction Company is a family owned company and a recognized corporation of producing high quality services and products. It is a general building construction and has wide experience and expertise in engineering related works as well as estate development. The company specializes in structural construction, repairs, tunnel construction, installation of infrastructure, and general estate building.

Investment in an economy is essentially the process of creating a free market system. Typically, investment can indicate the level of current capital stock, and capital stock in future. Construction companies result to physical development of the real estates in the United States.

Modern construction companies are investing in physical capital since it is efficient and an effective way of producing quality products. Traditional methods of construction were labor intensive. Present technologies and innovativeness have encouraged utilization of physical capital resources in production (Anon, 10). The corporation growth is accelerated by the investment in technology and capital goods.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More A large percentage of corporation activities are capital intensive yielding to its efficiency and quality of products. Usually, aggregate inputs are subjected to capital intensity production process. Interestingly, the construction industry in United States is growing highly and substantially. The consequence of the growth and the competition makes companies to enhance strategies to provide a competitive advantage.

Company’s production process Contractors are searching many technologies to achieve international standards of building. In United States, technology changes are highly impacting on the current building systems and process. For this purpose, companies such as Ruiz Construction Company are developing new processes and investing on capital intensity.

The company production process entails building system technology, technical aspects, and managerial aspects, environmental aspects, laying out site, planning and product making. In addition, product making is influenced by a variety of factors. These factors range from customer’s request, inputs, technologies used and the construction process.

Conclusion Issues related to human labor intensity in production is old an economic concept. Modern society has changed from labor intensity to capital intensity methods of production. Companies have adapted to growth oriented policies that are driven to capital creation and adoption.

Exploring human capital and physical capital in construction industry is regarded as the order in value creation. In nut shell, physical capital intensity in production, especially in construction industry, increases economic growth and promote development sustainability. The current level of technology and improvement in physical capital creation with human capital endowment acts as an economy broadening factor.

Works Cited Anon. (nd). Physical capital. How great places boost public value. Web.

Gwartney, James, Richard L. Stroup, Russell S. Sobel, and David MacPherson. Economics: Private and Public Choice. Stamford: Cengage Learning, 2008. Print.

We will write a custom Essay on Physical capital in Ruiz Construction Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More


Wire Walking’s History and Examples Research Paper a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Examples of wire walkers


Works Cited

Introduction Wire walking or tightrope walking can be defined as a way of walking on a thin wire or rope usually at accelerated height. It is associated with activities such as somersaulting and other acrobatics that can be viewed as devilish on a high set wire.

A wire walker can use poles to provide balance or he/she can stretch the arms perpendicularly so that they act as poles. Wire walking is done in different styles such as slack wire, tight wire, high wire, slack lining and freestyle slack lining where by height is the defining term for their differences.

It has along history of about 2000 years although it has not been given priority so far. It all started as wire dancing, then grew into walking/ tiptoeing and eventually wire running where the wire walker can walk through a given distance over a short period of time (Dickens 1861, 538). It is a type of game that involves the player (walker) and the audience.

For one to become a good wire walker a lot of exercise is required added with courage. It is one of the most risky exercise one can engage in because of the dangers that surrounds it including falling from the great height which can result into fractures and dislocations of the body organs and in some extreme cases resulting into death.

Not all can be in a position to engage in such a dangerous exercise, apart from those with a passion for it and have some inborn characters which compel and enable them to perform well in such an activity. Wire walking is an occupation which needs a strong mentality and hard working qualities. A strong courage and determination of each wire-walker has, makes them a legend.

Examples of wire walkers Several wire walkers can be looked at so as to understand the motivation behind engaging in such a dangerous occupation. Such include, Adili Wuxor from China who in 1997 won himself a title “Prince of high wire walking” because of managing to walk on a steel wire over River Yangtze in 13 minutes 48 seconds.

To road towards this achievement was not all that easy but involved some risks and disappointments. To begin with, his father was a wire walker and it is possible that Adili inherited this from his father, although, this same father had left a will that was against any family members to participate in this activity due to the poor pay it had earned him throughout his life, and as a young boy Adili could have been expected to go as per his father’s will, but on the contrary he took the risk by defiling this will.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He begun doing some exercise though it was not that easy for him especially with the first attempts; he could cry out of fear and even go to an extend of wetting himself while performing, despite this shameful moves, he did not loose hope but he continued until he gained enough confidence.

Money was not an issue to him, despite its meager pay, he continued participating in the dangerous activity, the love he had for this game and the joy he derived from it could not be compared to the payment he was to get at the end. He was even at one time involved in an accident while performing that cost him his ribs and bornes.

He even went into a comma, but upon recovery he embarked on the activities he could afford and even dint give a dump in using any safety equipment. It is this determination, consistence and passion that have seen him this far not forgetting to mention his win as the first torch bearer in his town. He forges forward towards making this activity known globally such that those who had taken part in it in the past can gain recognition and eventual lead to the development of this occupation (Prince of High-wire Walking 2009).

Niagara Falls is a place that has gained popularity because of many wire walkers who have tried to challenge it. Several walkers have tried to cross this river which is a very dangerous attempt bearing in mind of its many waters and heavy waves and tides.

Blondin was the first one to cross this river on a rope, he subsequently involved in more risky activities such as crossing while carrying his manager and in another occasion while pushing a wheelbarrow, his determination in crossing the river twice a week earned him more confidence and fame where he could attract thousands of spectators.

On looking at Blondin performing, another man, Leonard Hunt got attracted and decides to join this occupation, after breaking this news to a girl friend, the relationship breaks but this does not prevent him from taking this risk. Despite his great performances compared to Blondin, he still does not gain favor from the crowds but he keeps engaging in more and more risky acts all with an aim of outdoing Blondin.

At one time a woman he carried fell down into the waters and died after drowning. He is even involved in an accident where he badly broke his leg but still continued in his walk up to a nearest island. Several other walkers challenged the falls including a woman whose demise became a mystery despite the several cases of death involved. This woman was the only one and the first woman to cross the falls on a rope, she did it backwards while blindfolded and with baskets on her feet (French 2008).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Wire Walking’s History and Examples specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The act of crossing this falls is compared to committing suicide with those who survive being referred to as the dare devils. It therefore, takes courage and some unique traits in a person in order to participate in such a game with a lot of passion and enjoyment despite all the risk including death that involves it (Niagara Falls Daredevils n.d).

Philippe Petit is another man who has gained fame because of the act of crossing the twin towers on a wire. The towers are several meters high and when he had the idea of walking over between the towers he was discouraged by a friend and even his wife but still could not resist the urge to do it.

It took him money and time to prepare on how to under take the risky task bearing in mind how guarded the southern tower was. It took courage to make his first walk despite the threats he received from the observers. After some several trips he gained confidence and now could even perform dances and other activities on the rope while walking.

This earned him fame but he still led a poor life besides engaging in this risky occupation. He even got bewildered on looking at the distance he walked once he was downstairs but despite all these, he still could not resist the call in him to still walk and he says that it was not his choice to do this, but he was chosen by this occupation (Higginbotham 2003).

Conclusion Wire walking is not an occupation that can earn one a living, it only earns fame. Many are the risks that are involved in its undertaking including death. It is therefore an activity that requires great determination, practice, sacrifice and unique character in one for him/her to carry it on.

Works Cited Dickens, Charles. All the year round. Carlifonia: Oxford University. 1868. Print.

French, Phillip. He always was highly strung. 2008. Web.

Higginbotham, Adam. Touching the void. 2003. Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Wire Walking’s History and Examples by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Niagara Falls Daredevils: a History.” Niagara Falls Thunder Alley. Web.

Prince of High-wire Walking, AdiliWuxor. China Xinjiang Uygur Autonomous Region-The Silk Road-News. Ed. Qian Zhao. 7 May 2009. Web.


Four types of courage Essay college essay help near me

Introduction Courage calls upon a person to keep moving on even in the face of hopelessness or obstacles. In the society, there are many changes occurring and one can choose to both panic and fear to confront the change or choose to draw upon inner self and move forward. Rollo May says that one must have courage in order to live a meaningful life in the society. Courage, he insists, is not just one emotion among others, but the foundation on which all other virtues and values rest.

Types of courage Courage is a fundamental emotion that every human being must possess. It enables one to exist meaningfully in the society and have the ability to bring change in the society and self.

Physical courage

Physical courage entails the use of one’s body to show sympathy and cultivate empathy. People with physical courage make a sacrifice every time they choose to exhibit this type of courage. They put their bodies at risk for the sake of others. For instance, in case of a fire fighters walk into burning buildings to try to save lives of people they do not even know.

They risk injuries or even death and to do so they must have physical courage otherwise they would fear putting themselves at risk for others. Another instance that demonstrates physical courage in the recent time is the efforts of the workers in Japan’s Fukushima nuclear plant who have been working to stop the emission of radioactive fumes.

They have put their lives at risk and some may even die due to the effects of the radioactive fumes but they had the physical courage to stay and stop the leak after the area and been evacuated. Other instances of courage are exhibited by ordinary people everyday such as when a father or mother takes a risk for the sake of protecting their children.

Social courage

To make meaningful intimacy one requires social courage. It enables one to put one’s self out there in order to create relationships with other people. Developing relationships calls for an investment of a person’s time and emotions.

The investment may not pay off and so a person must be willing to take the risk of failing and encountering rejection. When a person lacks social courage, they can become loners and feel very isolated. Thus, one must be willing to overcome fear and interact with other people even those that are often neglected by others because they are seen to be different.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More A person must also be willing to be tolerant of other people because people come from different backgrounds and have different beliefs and mannerisms. Moreover, an individual must have the social courage to accommodate others and make their lives easier because everyone has the need of the sense of belonging. Social courage also helps parents who have children with disabilities take care of them without shame of being ridiculed in the society.

They accept their children’s condition and do not hide them from the public. In so doing they bring up children who are not ashamed of their disabilities and they can have the courage to integrate in the society and lead meaningful lives. Such parents are only able to accept such children because they have social courage.

Moral courage

Moral courage helps a person to say no to violence. Violence comes in various forms such as psychological, spiritual and physical. People often condone various forms of violence because they lack the moral courage to take a stand against violence.

For instance, many people will stand by and watch a parent abusing their children or spouses but will not take any action because they fear getting involved in what they consider none of their business. Other people will have knowledge about planned violence but will not report to relevant persons for fear of being found out.

Moral courage is a virtue that many people fear to exercise for fear of being called meddlers but if people choose to exercise this courage so many forms of violence that happen in the society would be stopped and fewer people would suffer. For example, if people had moral courage they would blow the whistle on planned activities such as terrorists’ acts. Imagine the number of lives that would have been saved if one of the planners of the 9/11 attacks had had the courage to report the plan before hand.

Creative change The creative courage enables one to come up with ways of changing the society. A person who has creative courage can choose to go against the majority and do something different that is right.

For instance, in today’s society sex and drugs are very popular especially in the pop culture women are objectified and taken only as sex objects. An artist can come up with songs that are free of women representing sex even though they may not be a hit.

We will write a custom Essay on Four types of courage specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More By choosing to a road, that few would such a person can make a difference and show that people do not need to have dirty music and videos to produce good music. They can incorporate a message that challenges the use of drugs or sex and in this way; they can bring about a positive change among the people in society. Through creative courage one can defy violence and even death in the society by coming up with new ideas to tackle the problem. In so doing, one also exhibits moral courage and social courage.

Moreover, through creative courage people have come up with ideas that have helped to transform the society. For example, people who have come up with ideas of building green houses that help to reduce the amount of greenhouse gases thought of a creative idea and had the courage to follow it until it materialized.

Others have created beautiful songs, movies, poems, books among others that people appreciate. If such people did not have the courage to come up with the ideas and persist in making them a reality, we would be missing many beautiful things in life.

Conclusion Courage is paramount in life. Courage has enabled people to stand for things they believed were right even in the face of opposition and triumphed. Some have stopped evils and helped through moral courage making the society a better place to live in and safe for humanity.

Through courage, humanity is preserved and given an opportunity to advance. It therefore means that without courage it would be very difficult for the people in the society to live meaningful lives. Every person must strive to attain courage because it is the fundamental virtue in living meaningful lives. Through exercising courage, we not only make the lives of those who surround us better, but also our own.


The Relationship between Native Americans and Christians Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Introduction The relationship between Christianity and Native Americans has been a matter of great debate for many years. This topic has been explored in many short stories written by Americans. Among the many stories on this subject, the best example is by Louise Erdrich titled Saint Marie and another is by Leslie Marmon Silko titled The Man to Send Rain Clouds.

In the two stories, the writers have discussed the topic in a way that leaves no doubt as to the nature of the relationship between Christianity and Native Americans. In The Man to Send Rain Clouds, the Christians are tolerant towards the Native Americans but the opposite is the case in Saint Marie. (Silko; Erdrich)

In Leslie Marmon Silko’s story, there is a clear picture of the life lived by Native Americans. From the moment when the story opens, we are confronted with rituals, which seem to have been the order of the day. In the story, Ken and Leon have gone to find their grand father whom they already suspect to be dead.

Just to make sure that they have everything needed to perform the ritual, the two brothers have taken the time to pack some feathers and paint which they use to decorate the old man’s hair. By tying the feather in the old man’s hair, painting his forehead with different colors, throwing corn meal in to the wind then painting his nose, the brothers hope that the old man will be able to send them rain.

While all this rituals are performed, we do not see any sign of Christianity featuring anywhere. Immediately after the ritual that is meant to ensure that their grandfather sends them rain, we are able to see the first relationship between Christianity and Native Americans.

When the brothers are taking their grandfather home, the brothers meet Father Paul who gestures for them to stop. In the ensuing conversation, one is able to realize that there is respect between the two parties. To begin with, the virtue of the brothers agreeing to stop the car to chat with the priest is in itself an act of respect.

Although the brothers do not necessarily agree with the priest, they are courteous in their conversation with him. This courtesy is seen when the priest castigates them for leaving Teofilo to stay out in the sheep camp alone. Instead of rebuking him for meddling in other people’s affairs, the brothers politely answer that “No, he won’t do that any more now.” (Silko)

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This relationship is also seen in the way the gravediggers begin doing their work after “the church bells rang the Angelus.” (Silko)This good relationship is further exhibited as the people head to the grave when Louise seems bothered about the absence of a priest in the burial. This thing keeps on bothering her until she decides to confide in Leon.

Despite the many rituals that the family has undertaken, Louise feels it is important for the “priest to sprinkle holy water for Grandpa. So he won’t be thirsty.” (Silko) Despite Louise being the person who comes up with this proposal, the same thing seems to have been in Leon’s mind since he does not object to the request. Instead, the only answer he gives is “I’ll see if he’s there.” In fact, everyone seems to accept this arrangement since no one objects the presence of the priest in the graveyard.

This good relationship between Christianity and Native Americans is further exhibited in the way the priest receives the request of Leon. When the priest is told of the old man’s death, all that he asks is “Why didn’t you tell me he was dead? I could have brought the Last Rites anyway.” (Silko)This shows that the family not being practicing Christians did not bother the priest.

Although the priest at first refused to honor the summon since there had not been called to perform the Last Rites and a Funeral Mass, he later agreed to the request. As he poured the water in the grave, memories of such a ritual almost came back into the priests mind.

In a strange way, the priest seems to concur with the family that the water would make the old man not to experience thirst something that pushes him “shakes the container until it is empty.” Despite the numerous rituals that the family has undertaken, Leon only believes it is the priest’s water that had the ability to make the “old man send them big thunderclouds for sure.” (Silko)

Although there seems to have been a good relationship between Native Americans and Christians in The Man to Send Rain Clouds, the case is not the same in Saint Marie. From the moment the story begins, every side seems to be fighting to discredit the other. Through Marie, we get to understand that whatever it is that the Natives did was not done from a pure heart.

While the characters in The Man to Send Rain Clouds seemed to believe in the God of the Christians, the same is not true with characters in Saint Marie. Right from the start, Marie who is used as a representation of the Dark One has a sole purpose of ensuring that the “nuns stoop down off their high horse to kiss” her toenails. (Erdrich)

We will write a custom Essay on The Relationship between Native Americans and Christians specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More While Father Paul uses persuasion to convince the Native Americans to join the church, the nuns in Saint Marie led by Leopolda use threats and brutality to achieve this purpose. In fact, Leopolda seems to have been so brutal such that even revelers at the local pub had to erect a poplar stand to ensure that there was no holy witness to their fall.

This is different from Father Paul who coexisted with the locals in a very peaceful manner. Marie likens Leopolda’s attempt to get the locals to join the church to the viciousness exhibited by a Walleye when it is about to strike. (Erdrich)

While Father Paul minds his own business and is willing to welcome anyone in the church, Sister Leopolda uses a “long oak pole” to drive Satan from the midst of her students. Instead of welcoming Marie in a polite manner when she decides to join the Convent, Sister Leopolda literally throws her bundle in the corner and tells her “You’ll be sleeping behind the stove.” (Erdrich)

This is unlike Father Paul who is overjoyed wherever the natives decide to pay him a visit. By analyzing the two stories, it becomes clear that while the relationship between Native Americans and Christianity was good, it could get nasty at times as witnessed in Saint Marie.

Conclusion The relationship between Christianity and Native Americans has been a topic of discussion among American authors for a long time. Among the authors who have discussed this topic in a deep way are Louise Erdrich and Leslie Marmon Silko whose stories titled Saint Marie and The Man to Send Rain Clouds respectively are regarded as the best examples explaining this relationship.

By closely reading the stories, one is able to realize that this relationship was good but at other times, it could get nasty as witnessed in the relationship between Sister Leopolda and Marie.

Works Cited Erdrich, Lousie. Saint Marie, 1984. Web.

Silko, Leslie. The Man to Send Rain Clouds, n.d. Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Relationship between Native Americans and Christians by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


Life after death Term Paper a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction



Works Cited

Introduction Death is the process through which the normal functioning of the body is terminated. Some of the causes of death include accidents and disease infections. Many societies put a lot of concentrations on the aspect of death. Dead bodies are treated with a lot of respect in many societies. The body is taken care of and disposed as per the traditions.

This is because if the people go against the traditions, the spirit of the dead person will come back and haunt them. In some cases, some people left will before death. The burial ceremony should follow the dead person’s instructions. In some societies killing another person was very bad and people feared committing murder. This is because the spirit of the person came back to the murderer and tortured him.

After death, people join the spiritual world. In the Egyptian Religion, belief in life after death was very strong. Upon the death of Pharaoh, he was buried together with his properties as well as slaves who could continue serving him after death. They believed that death was the beginning of a new life in a new world. The Pharaoh was a mediator between the Egyptians and their God (Haddow 157).

Discussion The process through which death occurs has for a long time been a major concern of many religions as well as philosophers. For instance, in many traditional religions, death must have a cause. In African traditional religions, the power of magic like sorcery can cause death.

They had traditional witch doctors that had the power to cure illnesses caused by witches and sorcerers. In many religions across the world, people belief in life after death and also being born again in the world after an individual. Some people belief that after people dies, their spirits enter into unborn children and they are born again through that child. In this case, they believe that the new born child will posses the same characteristics like that person.

In many African societies, children are named after their ancestors as an indication that their ancestors are still living and should be remembered. The issue of life after death has been a great debate in the scientific field as scientists have not been in a position to determine whether or not there is life after death. However, religions like Christianity strongly belief in life after death (Haddow 177).

The concept of life after death is defined differently by different people. Different religions also have their own ways of defining the concept. There is a belief that the concept was coined by intelligent people who saw the need of people having something to hope for after death which marks the end of human life. Life after death is the belief in the continuation of life after death. Some people hold the belief that if an individual’s behavior is good and attends church services, then the person will go to heaven.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the other hand, rude and disobedient people are believed to join hell after death. Life in heaven is full of happiness as people sing to praise the lord. In hell, people are tortured because of their wrong deeds on the world. It is believed that people lament forever in hell. Because of these beliefs nobody likes to be associated with hell. All people wish to lead good lives after death (Haddow 187).

I have a strong belief in the existence of life after death because the world in which we live in is unjust. Job a servant of God asked whether people would live again after death. Many religions have answered his question but in different ways. Many religions belief that life after death is determined be the life we live before we die. Each religion has established rules and regulations which guide people in their relationship with each other.

Observation of these rules and rituals of the religious doctrine leads to a happy life after death. Christians strongly belief in life after death. In the Apostles Creed recited by all Christian denominations whenever the they meet for worship, the statements “the resurrection of the body”, “survival of Saints” and “the communion of Saints” which means a bond between the dead and the living is an evidence that Christians belief in life after death (Dunlap, 157).

The Society of Psychical Research was formed in 1982 by some scientific men who wanted to investigate the concept of life after death in a scientific way. American Psychologist William James Founded another society in America in 1985 with the aim of carrying out that research. The result of their researches was put down in records. F. W. H Myers recorded in finding in his book referred to as “Human Personality and its Survival of Bodily Death in 1903”.

According to Myers the belief in life after death among Christians is a reality. According to her, information from the dead could be passed to living people. G.N.M. Tyrrell, a leader of the SPR asserted that the existence of life after death is the only way through which the security of people’s life will be achieved. In this new life, people will inherit everything and will be guaranteed of immortal life. There is no death anymore (Dunlap, 160).

Traditional evidence in life after death comes out kin the 19th century when living people communicated with the dead with, mediums acting as mediators.

In addition to this, People had the power to visit the spiritual world after which they communicated with ancestors. Once they regained their normal, state, they passed the information to other People. The Christian doctrine discourages the practice of mediums as unholy and against the laws of God.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Life after death specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Seeking assistance from the mediums is against the Christian law. In the book of Deuteronomy in the Old Testament, the bible clearly prohibits the practice. Between the period of 1901 and 1932, Evidence of survival is shown by the communication between Myers who had died in 1901 and five women who were medium. The information gathered by the five women had many things in common.

Another evidence of life after death is re-incarnation. Buddhism and Hinduism religions believe that the soul of an individual after death is either re-born again in another person or joins the supernatural beings. Christians believed in incarnation in the olden days but modernization has changed the idea. In the traditional setting, ancestors visited people physically in dreams and instructed them what to. They also instructed them of the dangers likely to happen to them like droughts and famine and the measures they should take.

The ancestors passed the information to the living through some people like mediums and priests. Many traditional societies offered sacrifices to the ancestors to appease them so that they do not bring misfortunes to them. The quality of the sacrifices also mattered. They offered the best. Communication between the living and the dead is strong evidence that after death, people go somewhere where they continue with their life (Dunlap, 170).

Plato and Socrates his teacher were strong believers of reincarnation. According to Plato, reincarnation of soul depended on the actions of the person before death. The person’s soul is rewarded for the good deeds and also punished for the bad deeds. He also suggested that some souls could be condemned. The aspect of death and fate of soul were very different according to Socrates. According to him, there was evidence that people lived again after death (Shaw 516).

Conclusion In the old testament of the bible, evidence of reincarnation is clearly indicated. In the book of Isaiah, the Lord says that he new Jeremiah even before he was formed in his mothers womb. In the book of Ecclesiastes, the lord says that he did not create his people only to let them die.

These verses give Christians hope that they will lead new lives after death. The life in this world is full of hardships and temptations. Life is never smooth in this world. People have to work hard in order to get their daily basic needs. I belief in life after death which, according to me people lead good lives. Evidence in Christian doctrine, reincarnation and traditional evidence in life after death makes it clear that there is life after death (Prasad 30).

Works Cited Haddow, Angus. Life after Death: PSI Evidence and Religious Belief. The Journal of Religion and Psychical Research, 1.1 (n.d):183-193.

Dunlap, Jeanetta. Reincarnation and survival of Life After Death: Is there Evidence that Past Life Memories suggest reincarnation?. Academy of spirituality and paranormal studies, inc. 1.1 (n.d): 157-170.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Life after death by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Prasad, Ramanuj. The Life After Death. New York: Pustak Mahal, 2005.

Shaw, David. Cryoethics: Seeking life after death. The Journal of Boiethics, 23. 9 (2009): 515–52.


Alcoholism-Nature vs Nurture Debate Research Paper college essay help online: college essay help online

Background Alcoholism can have an effect on anybody. It has massive outlays as it relates to cultures. Even though we have some idea on alcohol, all we don’t know is the exact root of this dilemma. Some researchers are repeatedly looking for answers to the long-standing nature versus nurture debate.

Dissimilar scrutinies are slit between a biological and a psychological example. (Thomas, et al, 2003, p.1939)The analysis done on the abuse of alcohol alone shows that more than $100 billion dollars are spent annually. It is also believed that, every body in America pays up to $1000 annually to cater for the outlays of unnecessary health care, vehicle accidents, crime and mislaid output resultant from alcohol abuse. (Rutter, 2002, p.997)

This research paper tries to relate alcoholism-nature vs. nurture debate to physiological psychology. To start with, “Physiological psychology is the study of the physiological basis of how we think, connecting the physical operation of the brain with what we actually say and do”. (Masters, 2001, p.346) The analysis on physiological physiology regarding alcohol shows that, alcohol displays feelings of superiority and fearless behavior and also, it reduces an individual’s fear.

Alcohol reduces an individual’s fear

Some researches done shows that alcohol serves up to reduce an individual’s echelon of self-awareness. In his article, Jay proves that alcohol leads to the rising of acceptance and reliance.

In one his quotes, “Jay adds to say one who experiences the painful reality of a death in their family may find the experience too difficult to deal with, and the feeling produced by alcohol assists in the coping process”. (Jay, 1981, p.587) Jay adds to say, alcohol helps in reducing the fear of facing some difficult issues. Finally, he concludes by addressing that alcohol helps in relieving some stressful events such as job loss, divorce among others. (Jay, 1981, p.589)

Alcohol displays feelings of superiority and fearless behavior

In his research, an author by name Rutter quoted that, “when people take in alcohol to the point of intoxication, they display feelings of superiority and fearless behavior”. (Rutter, 2002, p.998) Rutter, proved that males who take alcohol show higher levels of violent behavior than females. The violent behavior brought by alcohol gives them the boldness of resisting any kind of fearful act.

Summary In summary, the alcohol abuses and alcoholism have an effect on every body. It is said to have the highest outlays in the world. The analysis done shows that no one clarification appears to be greater than the other.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The research that has already been done shows that by the help of Physiological psychology, alcohol has been proved to have some benefits in ones life. It is believed that, Alcohol displays feelings of superiority and fearless behavior as well as reducing an individual’s fear. The two are among the analyses on alcohol that have contributed a lot in boosting someone’s life.

References List Jay, H. (1981). A self-awareness model of the causes and effects of alcohol consumption. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 90(6), 586-600.

Masters, R. (2001).BIOLOGY AND POLITICS: Linking Nature and Nurture. Annual Review of Political Science, 4(1), 345-369.

Rutter, M. (2002).The Interplay of Nature, Nurture, and Developmental Influences. Arch Gen Psychiatry, 59(1), 996-1000.

Thomas, S, Randall, C,


Scenarios of Critical Decisions One May Need To Make As a Manager Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Human Resource Management involves handling personnel decisions which have an impact in the performance of any organization or company. These decisions may include hiring, position assignment, training, deciding on employees’ benefit and compensations among others.

For that case most organization’s executives appreciate human resource manager’s experiences and skills in assessing personnel (Charles


Erickson’s Theory of Development Research Paper cheap essay help

Erik Erickson (1902-994) was a German psychoanalyst who expounded on developmental stages in relation to the role of specific stage. He believed that children develop in a predestined sequence where their socialization affects them and their self-perception. For instance, when infant’s emotional and physical wants are neglected, they attain their role through developing capacity to have or lack confidence on them. All the same the unaccomplished roles haunt a person in the stages that follow.

Erickson was convinced that childhood is exceptionally crucial for personality development. Convinced by a number of Freud’s theories he however rejected his notion of expounding personality singly on the ground of sexuality. Erickson asserted that personality continuously enveloped even past five years (Sigelman


Ethical failures in business Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Ethical failures in business are not uncommon. Companies sacrifice even the simplest ethical principles for the sake of competitiveness and higher profits. Customer service professionals and salespeople often find themselves troubled by unethical values, with which they are bound to comply.

Customer satisfaction is rightly considered as one of the weakest elements of corporate ethics: competition and market saturation place new demands on businesses. Pragmatism bordering on ethical absurdity often turns into the main instrument of retaining customers.

Yet, unethical profits are never long-term. More often than not, customers do not accept unethical service and refuse to continue their relationships with unethical businesses. Therefore, organizations must build and sustain a healthy, ethical climate which will serve the basic measure of customer satisfaction in the long run.

Martha Wang has recently been appointed to Consumer Affairs Department of Herb’s Garden Products (Bauer


Challenges of the Huge Data in the Day-to-Day Transactions Term Paper essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Radio-Frequency Identification technology (RFID)

General Use of the Current Technological Devices

Storage Challenges Caused by Hi-tech Devices

Data Loss through Portable Devices




Introduction Through the years, there have been many devices, which have ventured to offer relief and easy working procedures to many users. These devices are rather expensive but have a vital task to perform in this vast and rapidly growing technology globe.

Such devices include Radio-Frequency Identification (RFID), Global Positioning Systems (GPS), multi-media devices and Personal Digital Assistant (PDAs), which in the current market are for carrying out different tasks, or running different applications for user contentment. The most powerful feature they possess is their ability to receive, hold, store and send large amount of data. Current technology provides devices with huge storage memory or ability to transact large information.

There is urgent need to address the implications of handling or accommodating data of such large capacity. The devices have grown from large handheld devices to small portable memory cards or chips but increased in transformation and data storage capacity. This paper addresses some of the challenges the huge data may pose in the day-to-day transactions.

Radio-Frequency Identification technology (RFID) “RFID protocol is a communication protocol that uses radio waves to enable the transfer of data from an electronic tag attached to an object for the reader” (Espejo 2009). When passes through a reader, each of the tags generates a string of datum hat makes up a message.

Failure to filter such messages can easily cause clog up on flow of data thus compromise the meaning of data representation or interpretation when another source of data passes through the same threshold. Filtering data therefore facilitates noise reduction, and ability to reduce redundancy of processed data to significant levels.

General Use of the Current Technological Devices The Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) is mainly used in maintenance of field data through use of various features such as RFID transceivers that assists in reading and writing on the transponder. The Global Positioning Systems (GPS) and wireless modem also manage data in a similar manner. The GPS detects geographical coordinates and with support of the mobile modem, the information is sent to the database.

Most of the current multimedia devices enhance information processing and search tools funnel streams of data from the reader heads to centralized systems or hold the information in virtual machines during real-time transactions. Various devices such as the GPS, RFIDs and PDAs have common style of warehousing data analogously.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Users have therefore forgotten the need to implement methods of collecting, cleaning, transferring, warehousing and updating this huge data at the appropriate locations. Various inferences such as management strategies for the RFID’s generated data are very important. According to Espejo (2009), the data is delivered in real time and thus requires immediate propagation of the infrastructure.

The devices are mostly used for processing and storing office files, calendar listings, phone numbers, maps, images, system files, mp3s, movies and even games. The PDA has been characterized by high storage memory of over 4GB and high speeds of over 133x for duplicating, uploading and downloading files.

Storage Challenges Caused by Hi-tech Devices Although many people as well as organizations preferred to process and store their data in these devices, there can be negative aspects that scores of users fail to cover up (Haylor, 2005). Apart from being beneficial, the devices sometimes cause havoc to the data stores and information management systems.

Ignorance over the huge data management has resulted to mismanagement, collapse of the devices or loss of data, which would otherwise be easy to prevent. If users implement good back up systems for their data or avoiding disintegration of information tin various storage location, devices like RFID, GPS and PDAs would be manageable at all levels of usage (Haylor, 2005).

Many organizations have lost important data through theft such as cyber crimes, due to poor storage or lack of traceability options. Huge amount of information is left on machines for and lack of management procedures causes malfunctions.

The portability nature of these devices has made it easy to carry around and be used anywhere, anyhow and anytime according to user’s needs. Portability has also made the information in the machines to become more vulnerable to theft. Malicious attacks on information thefts target portable data devices since it is easy to establish a connection. Increase in theft is also high due to the soaring venerability rates.

Data Loss through Portable Devices Procedures for storing information have also been altered because these devices are subjected to virus attacks, through sharing and downloading of files.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Challenges of the Huge Data in the Day-to-Day Transactions specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Managing information loss has been a high cost to many organizations since a lot of online data transfers from one PDA or one portable device to another can end up infecting the device with attached threats, which ends up destroying the Operating Systems and causing major loss of data (Chumbler, 2007).

Information can also be lost through these devices through hacking. Research shows that people who use devices such as the GPS are vulnerable of loosing their data, as they do not enhance security measures such as passwords or device locks. In many cases, people have hacked through database of many organizations through portable devices, which are codeless (Chumbler, 2007).

Another exponential way of information loss has been through damage. These devices are more vulnerable to damages such as physical breakage than any other form of storage mechanism. Increased capacity for storage means that more data becomes venerable to loss such as theft or system collapse. If you subject a PDA, GPS or RFIDs to instant shock, their data plates will disintegrate and break off.

PDAs are also vulnerable to data loss when batteries run out. This is because a PDA never shuts down even on prompt. All the data is usually stored in the Random Access memory (RAM). It is easy to notice this since upon putting it on, the display changes and displays all data, meaning the devise was still on process. This is a contrasting factor for a PDA, which stores large amount of data (Espejo, 2009).

Many people have had total or major losses after loosing their mobile devices. Current devices curry all personal or official information due to huge storage abilities. This form of information loss limits chances of getting back the information since it means finding back the device.

Sometimes getting back the device becomes null since the data might be compromised. Research showed that many people who have lost their PDAs often plead and give offers to someone who can find the devices due to the huge data losses. People often plead for data recovery and not the devices since data loss is much greater than loosing the device. This shows how important the data is for such people.

Recommendations Current data warehouses for RFID infrastructure depends activities that occur locally at the station. The data faces real-time querying at the source such as the point-of-sales workstation, where it is stored after generation (Espejo, 2009). When one considers getting data from the GPS system, how can one aggregate all generated information to a central point? One of the biggest challenges of managing the collected data therefore involves aggregation since the tag readers can generate and distribute the data to terminals within the network.

Conclusion The store and forward approach is required to manage data at the source since it is an efficient form of transforming information such as enhancing filtering of data at the source, and querying authenticity of foreign locations. There is general lack of designing data to avoid replication, redundancy and storage without any immediate relocation policies in the mobile devices.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Challenges of the Huge Data in the Day-to-Day Transactions by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More According to Hisrich (2008), data production and storage requires “simple performance policy on immediate (online) updates of local databases in response to tag-read and other events. Such policy allows push of data to the central infrastructure (which may be composed of several distributed servers) using persistent queues.”

References Chumbler, M. (2007). Access to government in the computer age: an examination of state public Records Laws. Illinois, IL: American Bar Association (ABA) Publishing.

Espejo, R. (2009). RFID Technology: Technology Issues: Michigan, MI: Gale Publishers.

Haylor, P. (2005). Computer Storage: A Manager’s Guide. Indiana: Trafford Publishing.

Hisrich R. D. (2008). International entrepreneurship: starting, developing, and managing a global venture. London, UK: Sage Publication Ltd.


“A Doll’s House”: Stage Design essay help free

What Type of Play is “A Doll’s House”? One of the foremost characteristics of Henrik Ibsen’s play A Doll’s House is that its plot appears linearly defined, which, in turn, explains the semantic realism of play’s overall sounding. As it is the case with most of Ibsen’s other plays, throughout A Doll’s House, characters’ existential stances never cease undergoing a qualitative transformation. The way characters position themselves at play’s beginning is different from the way they position themselves at play’s end. As it will be shown in this essay, stage design and costumes in “A Doll’s House” influence the characters’ self-positioning and the way the conflict unfolds.

There are reasons to believe that the realism of this particular play reflects the actual workings of the author’s analytical mindset. Ibsen never ceased being aware of the fact that the extent of play’s realistic sounding demonstrates the degree of presented characters’ intellectual flexibility, extrapolated in the particulars of how they address life’s challenges.

As Kaufmann (1965) put it, “[Ibsen] knows that truth never is a possession, but a constant effort to find the appropriate response to every situation which demands a decision” (22). The legitimacy of such our hypothesis can be explored with the play’s synopsis.

“A Doll’s House” Summary Nora Helmer is a married woman, who helped her husband Torvald Helmer (bank clerk) once by borrowing a large sum of money from the bank, after forged her dad’s signature. Torvald is entirely unaware of the forgery that had taken place. Initially, he is a loving husband, who affectionately treats Nora, even though he also appears to be utterly ignorant of Nora’s basic humanity – throughout the play, Torvald treats her as a pretty but soulless doll. Krogstad is another important character in “A Doll’s House”

When being faced with the prospect of losing his job in Torvald’s bank, he threatens to blackmail Nora (because of her forgery) if she does not convince Torvald to refrain from firing him. Eventually, Torvald finds out about Nora’s forgery and becomes enraged over his wife’s presumed infidelity.

In act 1 of “A Doll’s House”, he ends up accusing Nora of moral depravity while suggesting that under no circumstances should Nora have considered keeping secrets from him. Torvald’s behavior opens Nora’s eyes to the fact that she has been loyal to an unworthy man who was unable to address life’s challenges and for whom the continuous observation of social customs meant so much more than ensuring his wife’s happiness.

It begins to dawn upon Nora that her staying with Torvald may very well be compared to the stay of a bird in the cage. After having realized it, Nora decides to leave Torvald, who, in her eyes, has been downsized from a respectful head of the household to a regular moralistic hypocrite, unable to appreciate Nora in a way she truly deserved. Nora says good-bye to Torvald and her children and embarks upon the quest to find her lost sense of identity.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Play Production The earlier provided outline of the plot points out what can be considered the first indication of the play’s dramaturgic uniqueness – the sharply defined dramatics sounding of its themes and motifs. Therefore, it comes as not a particular surprise that the action in A Doll’s House appears spatially limited. As was pointed out by Jakovljevic (2002): “Ibsen’s family drama [A Doll’s House] is set within the space of perspectival constraints.

The entire play takes place in this single set that represents the living room in a middle-class family flat” (432). What it means is that, while staging A Doll’s House, directors must focus their attention on ensuring the psychological plausibility of themes and motifs, contained in this particular play, as their principal priority. The best way to accomplish this is by exposing the essence of psychological anxieties experienced by the play’s characters, as such that relate to the worries on the part of the audience’s members.

Within the context of Ibsen play’s staging, ensuring action’s psychological plausibility will not represent much of a challenge.

The reason for this is simple – unlike what it is commonly assumed, A Doll’s House is not solely concerned with exploring the theme of women’s liberation from patriarchal oppression. It also exposes what accounts for the existentialist incompatibility between husband and wife – subject matter that even today remains utterly relevant.

As noted by Haugen (1979): “Ibsen’s Nora is not just a woman arguing for female liberation; she is much more.

She embodies the comedy as well as the tragedy of modern life” (vii). In other words, there is a clear rationale for a modernist staging of A Doll’s House, as it would emphasize the play’s contemporary themes and motifs. One way of ensuring the conceptual relevance of Ibsen’s play for a modern audience is to stage an unconventional production. The following is how four elements of theatre (set, costumes, characterization, and audience participation) can reflect a modernist staging of A Doll’s House.

Stage Design


Training, Learning and Development programs Employees Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Table of Contents Training and development

Identifying training needs

Selection of Trainees

Training Goals

Training Methods

Training Administration and trainers

Evaluation of the program



For an effective operation, organizations, whether in service, products, public or private entities, need physical and human resources; scholars in strategic business management have agreed that human resources are the greatest asset that an organization can have; without which no business transaction can take place. Human resources management teams with the assistance of line and top managers have the role of maintaining the right employees in quality and quantity teams.

Generally, to have a winning team, organizations should put in place elaborate programs for hiring, training/learning, development, retaining, and redeployment of its staff. Training, learning and development ensure that human resources expertise and talents have been tapped effectively.

Human resources intellectualism, creativity, and innovativeness are developed via an elaborate training process; when these attributes have been developed, they offer a company a competitive advantage (Muller, Maclean and Biggs, 2009). This paper looks into critical stages in any training/Learning


Effects of Computer Programming/technology on Human Behavior Essay college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Technology and Communication

Technology and Information/Education

Technology and lifestyle

Works Cited

The continued use of computers in our everyday life is beginning to alter how we as humans behave. For instance, “multitasking, output and efficiency” (Ullman 2) concepts that ideally just work for machines are slowly defining “human thought and imagination” (Ullman 2).

Computers have a way of actively engaging an individual or seeking their attention when they are about their businesses by either popping up messages on the desktop about “unused icons on your desktop” (Ullman 1) or aid you in writing a document with software like “Clippit” (Ullman 1).

The concept of multitasking “introduced in 1960’s, was an engineering strategy for making computers more efficient” (Ullman 1) and it achieved this by switching “its attention to some other task” (Ullman 1) while waiting for the next human input when being used.

It is only natural for humans to want to adapt this type of efficiency after “years of working in an environment where efficiency is a god and idleness in any component is intolerable” (Ullman 2) by keeping themselves “as busy as possible” and focusing on different things at the same time (Ullman 2).

For instance, we can “drive, eat, talk on the cell phone” simultaneously in an attempt to be efficient; “the ability to multitask, to switch rapidly among many competing focuses of attention, has become a hallmark of a successful citizen of the 21st century” (Ullman 1). With its continuous advancements, modern technology will continue having an impact especially in the areas of communication, information and lifestyle.

Technology and Communication Communication has never been faster or even more instant with the day to day use of both phones and computers. Phones transitioned from the basic feature phones people used to own for the sole purpose of calling and texting, to smart phones that have amazing capabilities and have adapted the concepts of computers. In his article, Mobile Telephone History, Tim Farley exhaustively discussed the development of these devices.

These devices have brought unique changes (Farley 1). Firstly, mobile phones, whether the smart phones or otherwise, provide an avenue for communication among people of different geographic locations, making distance no obstacle. Software like Skype, enable voice or video calls over the internet and this links friends and families in different continents whether using phones or computers. Secondly, communication has also become instant since one is able to get immediate feedback without delays.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Email services have facilitated efficient communication between employers and employees, students and lecturers, in comparison to letter writing which as compared to previous times would take much longer. Thirdly, all these devices have reduced face to face/personal interaction since communication is hugely done using these avenues. This is definitely a negative effect in as much as communication has been enhanced by modern technology.

Technology and Information/Education Modern technology has in effect enhanced our accessibility to information, whether it is about general world news or completing our research projects for school work. In terms of education: students are able to have online discussion forums, do extensive researches and currently there are even online courses which are available for those who cannot attend classes (this is a milestone since conventionally, classrooms were the only forums of learning).

Thomas highlighted some negativity to this form of education. He claimed that although “online discussion forums can be effective in developing student’s knowledge…they do not allow for social construction between students” (Thomas 1).

Another commendable result of modern technology is its ability to make the globe small, i.e. when it comes to television; people in various places can all be streaming live news coverage in a totally different location from the viewers. This means that information is widespread and covers a larger span in the shortest time possible.

Technology has also enabled news and other events watched on television to be streamed live using computers connected to the internet. Other than education and information, in recent times there have been social networks like facebook, tweeter, among others which the young generation has particularly embraced as a form of disbursing information. Much of the rapid spread of news, information and even learning material owe it to technology for providing easy instant access to such.

Technology and lifestyle Our lifestyles have been transformed by advancing technology. Life can definitely be said to have become easier in more ways than one. First change that is undeniably notable is in the house environment.

People own microwaves, dishwashers, washing machines, driers, vacuum cleaners etc, all in an attempt to ease the work they need to do. Secondly, the transport industry cannot be said to have been left behind in this technology. Buses, planes trains and trams, all characterize how we are networking the different geographic locations in order that efficient mobility is achieved.

We will write a custom Essay on Effects of Computer Programming/technology on Human Behavior specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Lastly, the work environment is also not spared for there are different machines and devices that have been adapted to improve productivity and enhance efficiency. Robots are also gaining popularity in such forums since they can do the extra work humans allocate them. With all this in mind, as much as our lifestyle is improving by reducing the amount of work we do, caution need to be taken that individuals do not resort to laziness with the excuse that machines will do the work for them.

Works Cited Farley, Tom. Mobile Telephone History. Cems, 2005. Web.

Thomas, Matthew. The Impacts of technology on communication- mapping the limits of online discussion forums. Impact of Technology, 2000. Web.

Ullman, Ellen. “The Boss in the Machine.” New York Times, February 19, 2005. Web.


Young Goodman Brown Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Table of Contents Prelimbib



Works Cited

Prelimbib Campbell, Donna M. “Puritanism in New England.” Literary Movements. Dept. of English, Washington State University. 21 Mar. 2010. Web. This source points to the main principles of Puritanism, the brief that people live in the state of depravity. It helps understand the message of the story.

Hawthorne, Nathaniel. Young Goodman Brown. Wildside Press LLC, 2005. Print. It is a primary source.

Neary, John. “Shadows and illuminations: Spiritual journeys to the dark side in “Young Goodman Brown” and Eyes Wide Shut.” Religion


Impact of environmental issues and laws in the aviation industry Term Paper best essay help: best essay help

Of late, the world is concerned about environmental conservation and management; domestic and international legislations have been enacted to control operations in different industries in the efforts of attaining sustainable development agendas. The aviation industry has had its share of controls that have affected its operations negatively and positively.

National Air Transport Association applauds the efforts made by environment conservation movements, but it is quick to point out that Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) policies have limited growth in the industry (Aviation Today, 2008). This paper discusses the impact of environmental issues and laws in the aviation industry.

Negative effects of environmental laws and legislations on aviation industry Limited growth

Although the industry appreciates, the efforts of environmental movements like Department of Energy, Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), and Friends of the Earth, the industry feel that the requirements of the set policies limit its growth.

The legislations generally wish to reduce emission from aircrafts; however, they have not developed the machines and engines that are environmentally friendly, they leave the burden to aviation companies. When a company is planning on its developments, it sets the base on the available base of operation; however, the same operation level is challenged by environmental conservation movements. The industry thus lacks a constant source of income necessary for development.

To initiate programs requested by the legislations, it requires massive capital investments; this diverts the need for resources. Aviation companies are left at cross roads whether they should initiate recommended environmental programs or they should consider normal development policies. When aviation companies produce environmentally unfriendly products, legislations in some countries charges them pollution taxes that is not an allowable when computing corporation taxes. The taxes are an additional expense to the company reducing resources available for services expansion.

To be compliant, some machinery and aircrafts have been regarded useless since they cannot life to the standards of the legislations; this is an additional cost of disposal to the industry. In some companies, they have received negative publicity from the conservation groups as they advocate for efficiency and environmental conservation, this has directly affected such businesses (Linda, 2007).

Expensive equipments

The standards set by environment laws and legislations have forced aviation companies to use expensive equipments that are “green compliant”, the cost of such equipments is passed down to the consumer making the services offered more expensive. According to the low of demand, when prices of a service has increased, then the demand for the commodity increases; with the expensive equipments and operating materials, then the demand for aviation services reduces.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Some of the commodities that the laws want used include disposable bags in airplanes, fuel-efficient aircrafts, and aircrafts that do not produce noise.

Kyoto protocol that was ratified in Japan, on 11 December 1997 and aimed to be fully implemented by 16 February 2005, aimed at reducing green house emission . It was a project of the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change and ratified by 37 industrialized countries and European community.

The main aim of the protocol was to ensure that emission of green house gasses was reduced by 5% below their level in 1990 by the end of 2010. The protocol targeted the major greenhouse emitters; the aviation industry was one of the considered industries. When fulfilling the needs of such conventions, the aviation industry has lost some business at least for the short run (Ernesto


Similarities between Capitalism and Socialism. Compare writing essay help

Introduction Socialism has been regarded as kind of economy which relocates its means of production from individual ownership to state ownership and communal ownership.

A state that operates under socialism possesses all the means of production and also supervises them. This system has been believed to construct a different egalitarian system which is founded on the values of cooperation and solidarity. However, this further relies on another feature where human beings are viewed as capable of interacting and cooperating with one another (Newman 3).

Capitalism on the other hand could be reffered as a system where means of production are employed and owned by individuals. This kind of economy develops under the right of an individual who decides freely where and how they want to produce (Hunt and Lautzenheiser 5). Therefore these are two diverse systems; the following essay illustrates the differences and similarities between these two systems.

Economy and Trade Marxist economists described various ideas concerning socialism and capitalism using various illustrations. According to his famous accounts, capitalist was depicted as destructive, a kind of system that is prone to crisis and administered by logic of capital. It was mostly expressed on the basis of economic laws of motion also the desire to accumulate on the capital.

However, socialism denoted elimination or suppression of such logic and its fundamental drives and laws, hence created the likelihood of a rational, organized way of managing social and economic life. Marxist economists condemned capitalism because of instability and irrational outcomes of a system based on private markets and properties.

Marxist noted the devastating social and economic outcomes of capitalist organizations, economic anarchy; for instance, sales seldom matched actual or expected levels of production, and the overall amount of savings planned for investments, hence affecting business cycles. Other associated crises were ineffective outcomes and uneconomical expenditures which led to starvation, unemployment, and ecological deterioration.

There was social disintegration and fragmentation because of unequal distribution of power and wealth and promotion of privacy, social interests, and personal interests over public. It encouraged alienation for instance through commodity fetishism because conception of false needs was encouraged rather than satisfaction of true needs. This led to denial of genuine individual knowledge concerning themselves and also the society surrounding them (Ruccio and Amariglio 216-17).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In contrast, socialism because of eliminating the scope of private markets and properties and its institution of planning, it has been represented as a system that demonstrates basic rationality and stability. Therefore, the results were fairly different; economic coordination and balance which was supervised by a central planning board and analyzed by enterprises and ministries.

Furthermore, the system portrayed effective and socially beneficial expenditures which were based on coherent calculations and no profit making motive. The system created unification and social harmony because of establishment of relative equality and social and private interests which were then allowed to converge.

More importantly, it promoted self realization and true needs could be articulated and the nature of social interactions was transparent and immediate. Marxist economists has also noted the degree at which capitalism has been based on individual exploitation which involves extraction of surplus value while in socialism almost all surplus was appropriated communally or socially (Ruccio and Amariglio 216-17).

Property Rights Socialism could be defined as transfer of titles of a particular property from those individuals who have invested scarcely to those who have contractually acquired them or for some different use. It could be regarded as a social system where the scarce resources or means of production which are utilized to produce consumption products are socialized or nationalized.

The concept of socialization of means of production has been practiced in a number of countries such as Soviet Union and afterwards by Soviet dominated nations of Eastern Europe and various countries all over the world. If private property becomes the means of production, then one encourages differences. By eradicating private ownership everybody’s ownership means of production is equated.

Every person becomes the co- owner of all the properties and this reflects every individual’s identical standing as a human being. The economic rationale of a scheme like that one is suggested to be more effective. In contrast, capitalism which concentrates on private ownership as the means of production seems to be very chaotic. It appears more of a wasteful system which is characterized by ruinous competition, duplicating efforts and lacks concerted, coordinated action.

Unless the communal ownership is substituted with private then it’s possible to eradicate that waste by executing a single, coordinated comprehensive production plan. The property regulations which are assumed under the socialization policy and those which comprise the general legal principles of nations such as Russia are distinguished by two complementary attributes. First, no one possesses socialized means of production but they are owned socially.

We will write a custom Essay on Similarities between Capitalism and Socialism. Compare


Compare of Capitalism and Socialism Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Capitalism: A brief overview

Capitalism: A current perspective

Socialism: A brief overview

Socialism: A current perspective

Socialism and Capitalism: causes for debate

Differences between Socialism and Capitalism

Similarities between socialism and capitalism

Recommendation and Conclusion

Works Cited

Arguably, one of the most outstanding features in human beings is their ability to design systems that help them develop various aspects of their civilizations. Over the last century, nations all over the world have implemented various systems that help them allocate, distribute and govern the available resources accordingly.

Despite the effectiveness exhibited by these systems, various scholars and system analysts have come up with evidence that either support or disapprove such systems in relation to how they help the citizenry achieve their needs, and how the governments allocate various resources. Among the most common systems adopted by most nations are the capitalistic and the socialistic economic systems.

Through their use, these systems have in the recent past proven to be effective to some and detrimental to others. This research paper shall set out to explore the differences and similarities between these two systems. A detailed analysis of how each of these systems affects the distribution of wealth and resources within different nations shall also be provided.

This shall aim at elaborating the extent to which each of these systems has proven to be effective in maintaining certain socioeconomic aspects such as human right, health care, social economy, model of development and social wellness among others in specific nations.

Capitalism: A brief overview According to Hooker, Capitalism traces its roots back to the early middle ages where individuals participated in a form of trade known as mercantilism (1). In this trade practice, individuals would distribute goods and services with the main aim of getting profits (Hooker 1).

One of the recurrent characteristic in this form of trade was that merchants would buy goods from one region and redistribute the same to other regions at a higher price. As time went by, this system of trade was introduced and adopted by other nations across Europe. It is from here that the word capitalism was used to define this evolved economic practice.

Capitalism: A current perspective Considering these undertones, Capitalism can be defined as an economic system in which individuals exercise a high level of freedom in matters regarding to acquisition of property, price determination and private ownership of resources. Members of a capitalistic economic system have the freedom to make their own decisions as relating to how best they can utilize the scarce resources in their possession as well as the freedom to own and operate a business of ones choice (Blumenthal 8).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This indicates that in such economies there is little to no government interference on how businesses, income and profits are earned or regulated. In economic terms, Petras asserts that capitalistic economies are run by the forces of demand and supply (1).

In light of this definition and description, one would argue that this is the most convenient system of economic governance because individuals have the freedom to conduct business in a manner that best meets their business goals (making profits and market expansion), all the while appealing to their creativity in running business endeavors (survival for the fittest). However, documented and practical (real life situations) evidence has in the recent past proved that this assumption is far from the truth.

Socialism: A brief overview In the world we live in today, historical as well as present economic situations have proven that granting individuals the freedom to determine market trends (prices, supply, resource allocation and distribution among others) is not only detrimental to ethical business practices, but also prevents the less fortunate from having access to some much needed social amenities such as roads, hospitals, schools and in some instances land.

The socialistic economic system is based on the principles of equality, freedom of expression and individual’s ability to exercise democracy. As such, is an economic system through which government and other significant regulatory bodies determine how, scarce resources should be allocated and distributed equally to all sectors of their economy.

Socialism: A current perspective In regard to the above description, socialism can be described as a political and economic theory which advocates for the equal distribution of a nation’s scarce resources and wealth through the government (Pierce 16). Arguably, this is a convenient economic system in today’s world which is characterized by greed, injustices and high inequalities in both the social and economic/income perspectives.

Socialism and Capitalism: causes for debate Ask yourself this question: what would happen to the world if people were allowed to only produce goods and services that earned them high profits? Would you afford to buy a car, use the roads, hospitals or even have access to a descent education? The answer that pops up in my head is; ‘NO’. This is mainly attributed to the fact that such amenities have proven to be of great use to us as human beings. In other words, they are highly demanded by people.

It therefore goes without saying that if they were individually owned with no government interference or regulations, the prices charged on such amenities would be insanely high such that only the rich in the society would benefit. So what happens to the poor members of the populace? This scenario highlights the differences between these two economic systems.

We will write a custom Essay on Compare of Capitalism and Socialism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More According to Blumenthal, capitalists believe in the notion that survival is indeed for the fittest (274). As such, the author suggests that capitalists are firm believers of the fact that everyone has a right to own as much land, property, resources as he/she is able to acquire.

Pierce further reiterates that capitalistic economies are defined by the notion that people who do not work as hard as those with property and other resources should not eat or be given special considerations because wealth is a reward for a person’s determination, creativity and aggressiveness in similar business situations (387).

These are logical arguments considering the fact that if people were spoon-fed without any ambitions or efforts, the world would have been a sad place characterized with low productivity, poor growth and development and poverty. As such, the capitalistic economic system would be most desirable if a nation wishes to promote determination, wealth creation and hard work among its citizenry.

However, Ross asserts that this economic system and its proponents fail to acknowledge the fact that there is no country within which people enjoy equitable distribution of natural resources (85). This is mainly due to geographical and climatically factors which in most cases affect the level of resources that can be found in a specific region within a country. In addition, people do not have equal mental skills.

This means that while an individual in Afghanistan can comfortably do some productive farming in the desert, another individual in the Sahara desert may not necessarily posses the same intellect or skills to do the same. In addition, the capitalistic economic system undermines the fact that no government can guarantee employment to all its citizens.

On the other hand, socialists believe in the notion that the government should be responsible for the allocation and distribution of resources within their countries.

This sentiment is further accentuated by the fact that government-regulated resource allocation is the most viable means of promoting equal growth and development within the country as well as an effective tool for combating inequalities and poverty within a nation. With these undertones, this report shall use various parameters to indicate the differences and similarities between these systems.

Differences between Socialism and Capitalism Arguably, people go to work or spend most of their time working so that they can accumulate their wealth base and get financial rewards which in turn enable them to achieve set goals and objectives. According to Ross, capitalistic economies are governed by very strict policies regarding the ownership of private property (128).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Compare of Capitalism and Socialism by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More As such, it would be safe to suggest that economic beliefs held by capitalists are most often influenced by private investment and innovation. This means that capitalistic economies are designed in such a manner that citizens can freely buy and sell their own property/possessions. This is not the case in socialistic economies in which private ownership of property is to a large extent discouraged or lack property rights (Kronenwetter 67).

In regard to investments, Pierce alludes that socialism discourages its proponents from investing (214). Personal investment means that some people will have more resources or wealth than others and this would go against the principles that govern this economic system.

In addition, people probably shy away from investing because at the end of the day, their effort will not matter as much as the notion that they should share their wealth and resources with those who do not have regardless of their effort or contribution in the investment (Pierce 229). Blumenthal therefore asserts that in a socialist setting, the probability of lazy people exploiting their hardworking counterparts is significantly high (114).

On the other hand, Blumenthal argues that unlike socialism, capitalism is a source of encouragement in regard to creativity and innovation (267).

The author suggests that due to the unequal distribution of resources that is normally backed by the capitalists’ desire to succeed; people are often under pressure to exhibit high levels of innovativeness and creativity as they struggle to remain relevant in an economy characterized by high levels of competition related to resource and market share acquisition.

This assertion is further reinforced by the fact that in most cases, people who have limited resources tend to work harder than their counterparts with more resources.

Similarly, Blumenthal sheds some light on the fact that capitalists have a right to patent their property as long as they do not infringe the rights of other people (28). As such, monopoly is a common and acceptable practice in capitalistic economies. However, this is not the case with socialism where every piece of property is government owned and monopolistic business entities are not allowed (Pierce 38).

A great example to expound this fact is the American health care system which is documented as being the most expensive in the world. This is mainly due to the fact that most insurance companies as well as health care facilities are owned by private parties who normally prioritize profits before safeguarding the wellbeing of their clients.

However, this is not the case with Australian health systems where the universal health care system which allows all citizens equal treatment is adopted. The American health care system is an example of a capitalistic business practice while the Australian system represents the socialistic approach in healthcare delivery.

Similarly, a look at the capitalistic Russia indicates that capitalism is detrimental to the growth of any economy. For example, since Poland shifted turned into a capitalistic nation, more than 20% of its labor force were considered unemployed by the year 2004.

In addition, 30% of the employed citizens get low paying jobs. Additionally, the real per capita growth of Poland has decreased significantly in comparison to the preceding 15 years that the country was socialistic in nature (Petras 1). The economic situation being experienced by the people of Poland are similarly being experienced by people in Bulgaria, Romania and most parts of East Germany which is filled with capitalists.

In addition, Russia which is a capitalistic economy has in the past two decades experiences political and economic unrests and declined progress due to the fact that most of the resources therein are owned by a numbered few who use illegal means such as murder, corruption, intimidation and violence to cut-off competition.

In addition, the nation is run by criminals who pillage resources for personal gains. As a result, the provision of social amenities such as hospitals and schools has declined significantly since such issues are not given adequate budgetary allocations in the national budget.

Similarly, the prevalence of sexually transmitted diseases and HIV/AIDS has increased even among young children who are subjected to child labor or forced labor as prostitutes and drug peddlers. In regards to mortality and life expectancy rates, the number of premature deaths increased above 15 million deaths after Russia transitioned to capitalism.

Petras suggest that these numbers would have been significantly lower if Russia stayed as a socialist nation (1). In addition, the life expectancy rate of Russian men decreased from 64 years to 58 years as a result of the increased rates of suicide, drug abuse, alcoholism and prostitution which came about after the transition into capitalism.

On the same not, a country like Armenia which was recognized as a technological hub has been reduced to a sad state of affairs where the number of scientists and researchers reduced from 20, 000 in 1990 to a shocking low of 5,000 professionals in 1995 (Petras 1).

Currently, the country is run by criminals and most of the population therein do not have access to power and heat facilities. These are the side effects that capitalism has on an economy.

The fact that people in capitalistic economies have unrestricted rights to do as they please means that the rich will get richer while the poor becomes poorer. The level of lawlessness exhibited in the above mentioned capitalistic nations is proof enough that without regulatory systems, most of the core values that hold a nation together are most likely bound to be neglected as people try to fight for survival and accumulation of personal wealth.

In contrast, Cuba and Bangladesh have recorded significant progresses since they adopted the socialistic system of economic governance. For example, by the year 2003, Cuba’s infant mortality had improved significantly (6 deaths per 1000 live births) as compared to statistics presented in 1989 (11 deaths per 1000 live births).

In addition, Russia only spent an average of 5% of its GNP on public and private health care while Cuba spent a little over 16.7% to support the same. In addition, the male life expectancy rates increased to 74 years in 2003 while it reduced to 54 in Russia (Petras 1).

During the same year, unemployment reduced by 3% in Cuba. This was as a result of the government initiative which enabled the youth to access training and educational programs that facilitated their efforts of acquiring employment. In contrast, capitalistic Poland had a 21% increase in unemployment during that period (Petras 1). Poverty has also reduced significantly in Bangladesh and Cuba.

This is mainly due to the fact that socialistic economies have regulated minimum wages which are increased in accordance to the type of job being done. In addition, the fact that resources are government owned means that they are distributed equally thereby promoting balanced progress in all sectors all the while ensuring that citizens have access to the basic social amenities. These are the characteristics of socialism that have aided such countries progress to such unimaginable statuses.

Similarities between socialism and capitalism Ross states that the distribution of resources is the key concern in both the Socialism and Capitalism systems. In capitalistic settings, resources are distributed by those who have the ability to acquire them while in socialistic economies; resources and wealth are distributed by the governments. Similarly, both systems have proven to be unfair to various members of the economies. In both cases, wealth and resources are not distributed fairly.

For example, since the government allocated and distributes wealth and resources in a socialistic economy, people who work hard are at a loss since their efforts and rewards will be shared amongst those who do not have regardless of the reasons behind their lack of performance. The same case applies in capitalistic economies where those who are able acquire more resources than those who cannot access them regardless of the reasons behind their inabilities.

As regarding to company policies and management, both economic systems share the concept that markets can be monopolized. For example, the government in socialistic economies controls the market since it has all the resources. The same is true in capitalistic economies where the person/organization with the most resources controls the market (Blumenthal 231).

Regardless of the characteristics, the government has the power to decide and intervene in both systems. By using various economic policies, the government can influence capitalistic markets just as much as it does on socialistic markets. On the same note both systems make provisions for their citizens upon retirement.

For example, in capitalistic economies, private organizations as well as those owned by the government offers their retired employees pensions which help them cope and survive after their contracts have expired. Similarly, governments in socialistic economies have programs that cater for the needs of retired employees when the time comes. These are some of the similarities that are evident in socialistic and capitalistic economic systems.

Recommendation and Conclusion This report has effectively illustrated that there are differences as well as similarities between socialism and communism. While each has various strengths and weaknesses, the discussion herein has shown that capitalism is not the best economic system to adopt in this day and age.

The risks associated with capitalism far outweigh the benefits as has been proven by the examples illustrated in this paper. Considering the fact that both systems have loyal followers, it would be best if they set aside their differences and learn from the weaknesses inherent in their preferred systems.

For example, while socialism advocates for the spirit of brotherhood (sharing and equality) among its followers, it has been noted that lazy socialists may take advantage of their hardworking counterparts and conveniently survive on their effort and sweat. On the other hand, capitalism is based on the Darwinian concept that survival is of the fittest. However, there are capitalists who may suffer due to inadequate access to resources despite the fact that they may want to succeed.

As such it stands to reason that socialists should adopt the Darwinian concept in a bid to promote hard work among fellow socialists and at the same time, the capitalists can utilize the brotherhood concept and share with those who are less fortunate in their economies.

Implementing such a strategy would not only guarantee economical success in terms of growth and development, but it would also ensure that followers in these systems enjoy some peace, equality and fairness as they go about their day-to-day activities. By accepting these changes, the world can finally look forward to a future characterized by practices that work for the common good of all.

Works Cited Blumenthal, Max. Republican Gomorrah: Inside the Movement that Shattered the Party. Minnesota: Minneapolis, 2009. Print.

Hooker, Richards. Capitalism. Web.

Kronenwetter, Michael. Capitalism versus Socialism: Economic Policies of the US and the USSR. California: San Francisco, 1986. Print.

Petras, James. Capitalism versus socialism: The great debate revisited. Web.

Pierce Charles, P. Idiot America: How Stupidity Became a Virtue in the Land of the Free. Massachusetts: Yarmouth, 2009. Print.

Ross, John. Murdered by Capitalism: A memoir of 150 Years of Life and Death on the American Left. California: San Francisco, 2006. Print.


Experimentation on Animals Essay college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

Presenting the Case

Author’s Rebuttal


Works Cited

Introduction The debate about experimentation on animals, though well documented in literature, is still endeavoring to free itself from past controversies and current challenges.

This particular debate have attracted many advocates and critics, each advancing valid reasons as to whether it is morally, scientifically and logically right to subject animals to experimentation (Horner